sap-mm-complete-end-user-manual-to-118-transactional-process (1).pdf

SAP MM
COMPLETE
END USER
MANUAL
118
TRANSACTIONAL
PROCESS

BUSINESS PROCESS PROCEDURE
Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
AC03_Change Service Master
Materials Management
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
Document ID Last Changed on: Last Changed by: Revision Level Page #
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Users of this document assume responsibility for ensuring it is the current revision prior to use. Verify revision level against on-line
document or Master Document List.
Overview
Trigger:
You use this function if you wish to change service masters for frequently procured services.
Business Process Procedure Overview
The service master record can be changed via this transaction. Changes may be necessary in Basic Data, Standard service
Category, Purchasing Data etc. of a Service Master.
Input – Required Fields Field Values/Comments
Activity number Activity Number of Service
Output - Results Comments
Service Master record is changed.
Tips and Tricks
The following service master record functions are available on a single screen:
• Create
• Change
• Display
• Delete
Service master records can only be deleted if no conditions have been maintained for
them.
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access transaction by:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management  Service Master  Service  Service
Master
Via Transaction Code AC03
1.2. On the “Display Service Master Record” screen, , choose Display
Other Services.
1.3. On the “Display Other Service” screen, enter the data as specified in the below
table and choose “Continue”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Activity
number
Number of the master record R Enter Activity Number
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional “C” = Conditional)
1.4. On the “Change Service” screen, enter the following information
Description A short text describing the service R Change description if desired.
Base Unit of
Measure
Base Unit of Measure in which the
service or work is to be measured.
R Change Base Unit of Measure if
desired.
Mat/Srv.Grp Material/Service Group O Change/ Enter the Group for Service
Valuation
Class
Valuation class to which the service
is to be assigned.
O Change/ Choose the Valuation Class With the aid of the
valuation class
(subject to certain
other factors) the
system is able to
find the G/L
accounts that are
updated when
services are

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
entered.
1.5. Save your settings .
1.6. Choose Back.
Result
The Service Master has been changed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
AC01_Create Service Master
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
You use this function if you wish to store frequently procured services centrally as master records and use them on a
cross-application basis.
The service master record counts as part of the master data within External Services Management and serves as a source of data
for you to draw upon when creating service specifications. This enables you to save time and reduces the frequency of errors, since
you need to only enter the complete service descriptions in the service master record once.
A service master record contains the following principal information for the unique description of a service:
• Service number
• Service category
• Descriptive texts (short and long text)
• Base unit of measure
• Material group
• Valuation class
Activity number
Description
Service Category
Base Unit of Measure
Activity Number of Service
Description of Service
Category of Service
Base Unit of Measure of Service
Service Master record for frequently procured
services is created to use it on a cross-
application basis .
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
When creating Service Specifications, you can reference service master records by entering just
the number of the service.
• Display
When you first invoke the entry sheet functionality, the screen is in display mode.
• Create
• Change
• Copy
When creating a service master record, you can copy an already existing one by clicking
.
• Find
Via Other service, you can search for a service master record on the basis of the
service number.
• Delete
Service master records can only be deleted if no conditions have been maintained for
them.
Procedural Steps
Master
1.2. On the “Display Service Master Record” screen, If you have created service
master records earlier, choose Create New Service.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
1.3. On the “Create Service Master Record” screen, enter the data as specified in the
below table.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Activity
number
Number of the master record R Enter Activity Number Overwrite the
entry %_1 with
any number
between 4000001
and 4999999
Description A short text describing the service R Enter a description In the line with the
activity number in the right field
Service
Category
Service Category under which this
activity falls
R Choose the Value in the pull down
menu
Key used to
differentiate
between services
according to their
usage.
Base Unit of
Measure
R Enter a Base Unit of Measure
Mat/Srv.Grp Material/Service Group O Enter the Group for Service
Valuation
Class
is to be assigned.
O Choose the Valuation Class With the aid of the
valuation class
(subject to certain
other factors) the
system is able to
find the G/L
accounts that are

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
updated when
services are
entered.
1.4. Save your settings .
1.5. Choose Back.
Result
The Service Master has been created.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
AC03_Display Service Master
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
You use this function if you wish to view service masters for frequently procured services.
The service master record can be viewed via this transaction.
Activity number Activity Number of Service
Service Master record is displayed.
Tips and Tricks
• Create
• Change
• Display
• Delete
Procedural Steps
Master

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
1.2. On the “Display Service Master Record” screen, choose “Display Other Services”
icon
1.3. On the “Display Other Service” screen, enter the data as specified in the below
table and choose “Continue”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Activity
number
Number of the master record R Enter Activity Number
1.4. On the “Change Service” screen, click on “Switch between Display and change
Modes” to display the following information:
Description A short text describing the service R Display only.
Service
Category
Service Category under which this
activity falls
R Display only.
Base Unit of
Measure
R Display only.
Mat/Srv.Grp Material/Service Group O Display only.
Valuation
Class
is to be assigned.
O Display only.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
1.5. Choose Back.
Result
The Service Master has been displayed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB01_Goods Receipt against Purchase Order
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Users of this document assume responsibility for ensuring it is the current revision prior to use. Verify revision level against on-line document
or Master Document List.
Trigger:
Deliveries from vendors are most likely the result of purchase orders initiated by the purchasing
department
BUSINESS PROCESS PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
Goods are received from the Vendor as a result of a Purchase Order at the receiving area. A goods movement is entered into the
system referencing this PO and a goods receipt material document is posted. Appropriate general ledger accounts are also posted.
Document Date (MM/DD/YY) Date that the document is entered
Posting Date (MM/DD/YY) Date that the document is posted
Movement Type Movement type to be used (101)
Purchase Order Number The purchase order associated with the movement
The output is a material document which can
contain accounting, profit center, and other
financial postings.
Tips and Tricks
A purchase order has been created and has been maintained in the system. When a receipt is entered in
SAP, it must reference a purchase order to verify the 3 way match process (i.e. purchasing departments,
warehouse, and accounting or A/P). The vendor typically provides a packing slip for the material and/or a
bill of lading for the carrier, which will contain information relating to who the vendor is, the material, and
quantity delivered. In the event of a non-stock material, the requesters name should be printed on the
BOL to ensure proper attention.
If the PO number is not printed on the bill of lading, the receiver will need to execute transaction MB0A,
Goods Receipt PO Unknown. The menu path for this is Logistics → Material Management →
Purchasing → Master Data → Subsequent Settlement → Vendor Rebate Arrangements → Environment
→ Condition/Arrangement → Environment → Pricing → Environment → Value Assignment → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For purchase order → PO number unknown.
On the Goods Receipt - PO Unknown: Initial Screen, be sure to fill in the Bill of Lading number and
the carrier in the Header Text field. The movement type is defaulted in. The receiver will need to enter
the vendor and/or material in the Find POs section and press the enter key or green checkmark in the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
upper left hand corner of the screen. The system will provide a list of all open purchase orders that the
receiver can choose to receive against. Once the purchase order and line item are selected, the receiver
will press the COPY button. Then proceed to step 1.4 Goods Receipt PO: Selection Screen.
In exception cases, a goods receipt has been entered for a PO with an incorrect quantity. The initial
receipt needs to be reversed. For example, a PO for 100 pieces of widgets have been ordered and
received. Later, it is identified that one of the boxes is missing 10 pieces. It is now necessary to reverse
the initial goods receipt for the 100 widgets and then post a new goods receipt for the appropriate “short”
quantity of 90. The document date for the corrected goods receipt should be recorded for the initial
goods receipt in the Document Date field. Then, when the remaining 10 arrive, the respective dates will
be entered to allow vendor evaluation to be scored accurately.
To reverse by material document follow the menu path: Logistics → Material Management → Inventory
Management → Material Document → Cancel/Reverse. The material document is needed for this
transaction. If it is unknown, do a pull-down on the material document field and enter in search criteria
relevant to the material document. For example, enter a material number, plant, movement type, posting
date, etc. Remember, the system only displays the information that is entered. Therefore, do not be too
specific especially if the user are not sure. A recommendation would be for the material, plant and
movement type as a minimum. Then press the execute button (the icon resembling a flower or
stopwatch or press F8). Select the material document item and press the “Adopt document” button. The
material document number will be copied into the screen. Now press enter. The heading of the screen
should read, “Cancel Material Document: Selection Screen”. Select the line and press the “Copy” button.
Then SAVE. If the material for that document is displayed, there will be offsetting entries to the previous
receipt by quantity AND value.
Goods receipt tolerances for quantity are set at different levels material master, purchasing information
record, purchase order, and outline agreements. The order of precedence follows the same order from
least specific (lowest) to most specific (highest). For example, the over/under-delivery tolerances are set
at the material master level

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics → Material Management → Purchasing → Master Data → Subsequent
Settlement → Vendor Rebate Arrangements → Environment →
Condition/Arrangement → Environment → Pricing → Environment → Value
Assignment → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt
→ For purchase order → PO number known
Via Transaction Code MB01
1.2. On screen “Goods Receipt for Purchase Order: Initial Screen”, enter information in the
fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8
Document
Date
Default is current system date R Date of the actual vendor delivery
(physical delivery).
Today’s date
defaults in
Posting Date Default is current system date R No user input Today’s date
defaults in
Delivery note Number of the document issued by
the vendor
O Enter vendor’s packing list number if
available.
Bill of lading Number of the bill of lading issued
by the sender.
O Enter bill of lading number if
available.
Doc. Header
text
Document header text. Contains
explanations or notes which apply
to the document as a whole.
O
GR/GI slip no Goods Receipt/Issue slip number. A
number which uniquely identifies a
goods receipt/issue slip.
O
Movement
type
Goods movement type. R Enter the number for the movement
type or choose a movement type from
the menu.
Movement type
is 101 for goods
receipt to
storage location.
Purchase
order
Purchase order number R Enter the purchase order number.
The user can use matchcodes to find
it if necessary.
Plant Plant number. O Enter or select Plant from the pull-
down menu.
If the plant is left
blank, it will be
picked up from
the purchase
order.
Storage
location
Storage location O Enter or select a storage location.
Reason for
Movement
Key that allows the user to call up a
standard text stipulating the reason
for the movement
O
Suggest Zero
Lines
Indicates that items with a quantity
of zero are suggested on the
selection screen for goods
movements with reference to
purchase orders or
orders.
O
Print Key that specifies if GR slip should
be printed.
O If checked, press one of the three
radio buttons.
(Note: On the above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
Press the ENTER button.
1.3. On screen “Goods Receipt for PO: Selection Screen”, some of the fields will be filled in
with information from the Purchase Order and the first screen and some of them will be
open to change as follows:
Item indicator Item indicator button R To receive quantity for the line item,
this indicator must be selected.
Quantity Quantity received R Enter quantity received if different
from the PO.
Eun Unit of measure in which goods
receipt is entered.
O May be changed
to alt. UOM, if
specified on
Material master
record.
Material Material number R No user input Defaults from the
PO
Plnt Plant key O No user input Defaults from the
PO
Sloc Storage location R Enter storage location if different from
PO.
PO Purchase order number R No user input Defaults from the
first screen
Item Item number of purchasing doc. R No user action necessary. Item

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
numbers are provided in increments
of 10
S Special stock type O No user input Defaults from the
PO
DCI Delivery completed indicator O If the line item of the purchase order
is complete, set this switch.
Used esp. in
cases where
quantity received
is less than PO,
and PO is
considered to be
closed.
BUn Base unit of measure (stock
keeping unit)
O
Material
desc.
Material description R No user action necessary
Batch Batch number to which the material
is assigned.
O Must be entered
if ‘batch required’
field is set on
material master.
R Batch in restricted use indicator O
MvT Goods movement type. R No user action necessary Defaults from the
first screen
S Sign of material posting (+ if inward
movement, - if otherwise)
R No user input System
calculated
T Stock type. O Specifies to which stock the specified
quantity is posted.
Default is blank
which means
unrestricted
stock, however,
it can be posted
to quality,
blocked, etc.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8
1.4. Select the relevant lines that have been received from the packing list and Press the
“Adopt + Details” radio button to copy the PO information to the document.
*** Please note that the system will display a message for deficit quantities receipts and over
delivery quantities. For example, if a PO line has an expected quantity of 100 pieces and only 80
pieces were delivered, a deficit warning will appear. The same will happen with over delivery
quantities. In this case an error message will be displayed. Warning can be overridden by
pressing enter. Errors, however, cannot be overridden. Errors must be resolved.
1.5. On screen “Goods Receipt for PO: New Item”, the fields will be filled in with information
from the previous the Purchase Order and the previous screen. The user may change the
following fields:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
Unit of entry Quantity received R Enter quantity received if different
from the PO.
Eun Unit of measure in which goods
receipt is entered.
O May be changed
to alt. UOM, if
specified on
Material master
record.
Stor.
Location
Storage location R Defaults from the previous screen May be changed
on this screen
Stock type Stock type the quantity will be
posted
O
Del. Note
quantity
Delivery note quantity. Indicated by
vendor in the accompanying
papers.
O
Del. Note
UOM
Unit of measure in delivery note O
Deliv. Compl. Delivery completed indicator.
Indicates the item is considered
closed even with a partial delivery.
C
Prod.
Dt/Exp.Dt
Date of production of the
batch/Shelf life expiration date
O
EAN in OUn International article number
(EAN/UPC) in order unit
O
EAN check International article number check.
EAN in a different unit than Oun.
O
EAN check
UOM
EAN check unit of measure
Unloading
point
Unloading point for delivery O
Reason for
mvt.
Reason for movement key. O Select from the drop-down list
No.
containers
Number of container (QM).
Specifies the no. of containers in
the inspection lot.
No. of GR
slips
Number of GR/GI slips to be
printed.
O Default is “1”. Delete if the user do
not want any print-outs.
Text Additional text O
Save the transaction. (Select yellow file folder, or F11).
Result: Document posted.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB1C_Goods Receipt - Others
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
• Material received in previously as Non-Inventory PO which has now been included in material master
needs to be received into inventory.
Business Process Description Overview
Unplanned receipt of Non-Inventory material into Inventory (Movement 503 into Quality stock, 501
into Unrestricted Stock)
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Document Date (MM/DD/YY) Date that the document is entered.
Posting Date (MM/DD/YY) Date that the document is posted.
Movement Type Movement type to be used.
Plant Plant number
Receiving Location Storage location where materials will reside after transfer
Material Material number
Quantity Quantity of material to be transferred.
Storage location Storage location where material will reside after transfer
The output is a material document
that can contain accounting, profit
center, and other financial postings.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics > Material Management > Inventory Management > Goods
Movement > Goods Receipt > Other
b) Logistics > Logistics Execution> Inbound Process > Goods Receipt for
Purchase Order, Order, Other Transactions > Goods Receipt for Other
Activities
Via Transaction Code MB1C
1.2. On screen “Enter Other Goods Receipts: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Document
Date
Default is current system date R No action necessary
Posting Date Default is current system date R User may select other posting date. The system checks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
whether the posting
date entered is
allowed by means
of the posting
period permitted.
Material slip Identifier of an external document O Enter external document number if
available
Doc. header
text
explanations or notes which apply to
the document as a whole.
O Enter any necessary notes for this
transfer document
Defaults for
documents
items
Section Heading
Movement
type
Goods movement type R Enter the number for the movement
type or choose a movement type from
the pull-down table.
503= Quality
Inspection Stock
501= Unrestricted
Stock
Special stock Special stock identifier O If movement type is
selected from the
menu, this field is
filled automatically
if necessary.
Plant Plant number R No user input required Default is 2000
Reason for
Movement
Key allowing the user to call up a
for a movement (for example, reason
for a return delivery).
O Enter Reason for Movement or select
from pull down table
Storage
location
Storage Location (where material will
be stored)
O Enter a Storage location or select from
the pull-down table.
If Storage Location
is entered, it is
carried through to
item details screen.
If not entered,
storage location will
be required on item
details screen.
GR/GI slip
print
Section Heading
Print GR/GI slip will print at receipt O Check to have a GR/GI slip will print at
receipt
Individual Slip One slip for each material C Click for individual w/out inspection
text
Select one of these
is Print box was
checked
Indiv. Slip
w.inspect.text
One slip for each material. Includes
Inspection Text
C Click for individual with inspection text Select one of these
if Print box was
checked
Collective Slip One slip for all materials C Click for one slip for all materials Select one of these
if Print box was
checked

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
1.3. Press <Enter>
1.4. On screen “Enter Other Goods Receipts: New Items”, enter information in the fields as
Please note, the fields that appear and those that are required are completely dependent upon
the movement type selected by the user. For movement type 561 the following screen would be
displayed:
Vendor Enter vendor if known O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
Material Material number R Enter the material number
Quantity Material quantity R Enter the quantity of the material to be
moved.
The quantity is
automatically
converted to stock-
keeping units.
UnE The unit of measure in which the
goods movement is entered.
O Enter the unit of measure if different
than the default.
Pull down table
access. The
system will use the
default unit of
measure (entry) if
this field is left
blank.
Sloc The storage location where the
material will be stored.
R Enter the storage location - if not
entered on initial screen.
Pull down table
access.
Batch The batch number to which the
material is assigned.
O Enter the batch number if known,
system will generate a new batch if not
known.
1.4.1. Multiple materials may be handled with the same goods movement screen.
Pressing ENTER locks the material for this transaction but allows for any quantity changes prior
to saving the goods movement.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
1.5. Save the transaction by clicking the save icon or (Ctrl+S), You will receive a message
saying the following:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB03_Display Material Document
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Users of this document assume responsibility for ensuring it is the current revision prior to use. Verify revision level against on-line document or
Master Document List.
Trigger:
A material document needs to be displayed.
Usually, this transaction will occur when the user desires to view the material document and/or the accounting document to verify
that the proper accounts are credited/debited when goods are received or issued.
Material Document If the number is known, enter it. If not, conduct a match-code search for it.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics → Material Management → Inventory Management → Material
Document → Display
(b) Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Foreign Trade/Customs → General
Foreign Trade Processing → Environment → Purchase – Import →
Inventory Management → Material Document → Display
(c) Logistics → Production → KANBAN → Environment → Inventory
Management → Material Document → Display
1.2. On screen “Display Material Document #####: Initial Screen”, enter information in the
Material
Document
Alphanumeric key that uniquely
identifies the material document.
R If unknown, conduct a match-code
search
Material
Document
Year
Calendar year of the material
document
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
1.3. On screen “Display Material Document #####: Overview”, view the related functions by
highlighting the item and clicking on the appropriate radio button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME5T_Check Status of Stock Transfer
Materials management
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger: User wishes to list stock in transit due to cross-plant or cross-company transfer.
This report displays a list with all stocks that are located in a plant's stock in transit. These can be plant-to-plant stock transport
orders or cross-company-code stock transport orders. On the selection screen, you can choose which types of orders are to be
displayed. You can also include purchase orders that are flagged with the 'delivery completed' indicator or flagged for deletion.
Input - Required Fields Field Value/Comments
No fields are required. But, the user search
will be more accurate if the user selects
multiple parameters.
Display stock in transit
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
1.1 Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics > Materials Management > Inventory Management > Environment >
Stock > Stock in Transit
Via Transaction Code MB5T
On screen “Stock in Transit”, enter the following selection criteria:
Database
Selections
Header
Material Material Number O Enter if necessary.
If number is unknown, conduct a
matchcode search for this number
Receiving Plant Receiving plant code O Enter if necessary
Receiving Plant
Company Code
Company code of the receiving
plant
O Enter if necessary
Issuing Plant Issuing plant code O Enter if necessary
Special Stock Special stock type O Enter if necessary
Stock Transfers
Order
Indicate if cross-plant stock transfer
should be displayed
C By default, this is set, so that cross-
plant stock transfer will be
displayed.
Cross-Company-
Code
Indicate if cross-company stock
transfer should be displayed
C By default, this is set, so that cross-
company stock transfer will be

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
displayed.
Incl. POs w. Del.
Cmpl. Status
Indicates that purchase orders with
the delivery completed status are
also included in the selection.
O Leave blank
Incl. Deleted
Purchase Orders
Indicates that deleted purchase
orders are also included in the
selection.
O Leave blank
Incl. Blocked
Purchase Orders
Indicates that blocked purchase
orders are also included in the
selection.
O Leave blank
Press or press F8 key.
The report will be shown.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB51_Material
Material Management
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
• User wishes to search for material movements by material.
This process describes the method to search for and display the material movements by material.
will be more accurate if the user add more and
more parameters.
Materials with the associated movement
types.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB51_Material
Material Management
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Inventory Management > Environment
> List Displays > Material Documents
(b) Logistics > Materials Management > Physical Inventory >Environment > Mat.
Doc. For Material
(a) Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Foreign Trade/Customs > General
Foreign Trade Processing > Environment > Purchase-Import > List >
Material documents for goods movements
(b) Logistics > Production > Repetitive Manufacturing > Environment > Mat.
Document for Material
(c) Logistics > Customer Service > Service Processing > Environment > Sales
and Distribution > Master Data > Products > Assortments > Environment >
Material > Environment > Material Groups > Environment > Information
System > Environment > Goods movements > Material document
(d) Logistics > Logistics Controlling > Inventory Controlling > Environment >
Material documents
(e) Information System > Environment > Goods movements > Material
document
1.2. On screen “Material Documents List”, enter the below information:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB51_Material
Material Management
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Please note: entering more data on this screen will narrow the parameters of the search.
Material Material Number O If number is unknown, conduct a
Plant Plant number O Drop-down menu is available
Storage
Location
Relevant storage location for material O Drop-down menu is available

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB51_Material
Material Management
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Batch Batch number (if used) O Drop-down menu is available
Vendor Vendor number O If number is unknown, conduct a
Customer Customer # O Enter the customer number
Movement
Type
Movement type that the user are
searching for
O Drop-down menu is available
Special Stock
Indicator
Indicator specifying a special stock
type.
Posting Date Date when the movement occurred O Enter Posting Date
User Name User name in R/3 O Enter User Name
Trans./ event
type
Key identifying a transaction or
event.
Reference Reference document number O Type-in to restrict search results to
certain reference numbered
documents
Lathe usert The lathe usert determines the list
format.
Database Indicates that the database is reading
the material documents for the
material with material document
header and material document items.
O Select ‘Database’ if necessary Selected by default
Short Docs Indicates that a short document is
displayed instead of an archived
document. The database is reading
this short document.
O Select ‘Short Docs’ if necessary
Check Short
Docs. In
Archive
Indicates that the system is reading
material from the archive.
O Check ‘Short Docs. In Archive’ if
necessary
Press <EXECUTE> key
1.3. On screen “Material Documents List”:
On this screen, the user can view the existing material documents that the search found.
• Some of the relevant information included is: the material, storage location, movement type,
material document, posting date, quantity, and plant.
• If the user clicks on one of the material document numbers, the user may drill-down into more
information by clicking on the radio button “Choose Detail.”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB51_Material
Material Management
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.4. Exit this view. (Click on yellow up-facing arrow icon, or Shift-F3)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MB52_Materials Document
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
• User wishes to search for material movements by material.
This process describes the method to search for and display the material movements by material.
will be more accurate if the user add more and
more parameters.
Materials with the associated movement
types.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Inventory Management > Environment
> List Displays > Material Documents
(b) Logistics > Materials Management > Physical Inventory >Environment > Mat.
Doc. For Material
(a) Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Foreign Trade/Customs > General
Foreign Trade Processing > Environment > Purchase-Import > List >
Material documents for goods movements
(b) Logistics > Production > Repetitive Manufacturing > Environment > Mat.
Document for Material
(c) Logistics > Customer Service > Service Processing > Environment > Sales
and Distribution > Master Data > Products > Assortments > Environment >
Material > Environment > Material Groups > Environment > Information
System > Environment > Goods movements > Material document
(d) Logistics > Logistics Controlling > Inventory Controlling > Environment >
Material documents
(e) Information System > Environment > Goods movements > Material
document

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
1.2. On screen “Material Documents List”, enter the below information:
Please note: entering more data on this screen will narrow the parameters of the search.
Material Material Number O If number is unknown, conduct a
Plant Plant number O Drop-down menu is available
Storage
Location
Relevant storage location for material O Drop-down menu is available

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Batch Batch number (if used) O Drop-down menu is available
Vendor Vendor number O If number is unknown, conduct a
Customer Customer # O Enter the customer number
Movement
Type
Movement type that the user are
searching for
Special Stock
Indicator
Indicator specifying a special stock
type.
Posting Date Date when the movement occurred O Enter Posting Date
User Name User name in R/3 O Enter User Name
Trans./ event
type
Key identifying a transaction or
event.
Reference Reference document number O Type-in to restrict search results to
certain reference numbered
documents
Lathe usert The lathe usert determines the list
format.
Database Indicates that the database is reading
material with material document
header and material document items.
O Select ‘Database’ if necessary Selected by default
Short Docs Indicates that a short document is
displayed instead of an archived
document. The database is reading
this short document.
O Select ‘Short Docs’ if necessary
Check Short
Docs. In
Archive
Indicates that the system is reading
material from the archive.
O Check ‘Short Docs. In Archive’ if
necessary
Press <EXECUTE> key
1.3. On screen “Material Documents List”:
On this screen, the user can view the existing material documents that the search found.
1.3.1 Some of the relevant information included is: the material, storage location, movement
type, material document, posting date, quantity, and plant.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
1.3.2 If the user clicks on one of the material document numbers, the user may drill-down into
more information by clicking on the radio button “Choose Detail.”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
1.4. Exit this view. (Click on yellow up-facing arrow icon, or Shift-F3)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM11_Create Batch Search Strategy for IM
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger:
The purpose of this activity is to create batch search strategies for Inventory Management.
When entering the goods issue of a material handled in batches, you can enter * in the Batch field in order to initiate automatic
batch determination. The system then uses a specific search strategy to find batches with certain characteristic values (such as
status, shelf life, etc.) and suggests these batches in a list. In this list, the batches are sorted by specific criteria (sort sequence),
and the characteristic values are displayed. The system suggests how to distribute the given quantity to the batches found. You can
accept the system’s proposal for the goods movement or you can distribute the quantity manually.
The system can only search for batches on the basis of search strategies. Therefore, you have to define these strategies. In a
search strategy, you define the values according to which the system is to find batches.
A search strategy is assigned to a strategy type. Strategy types are defined in the Customizing system. Depending on the
configuration of the strategy type, you can define a search strategy at various levels.
Movement Type Movement Type for which you want automatic Batch search strategy
Material Material Number
Batch Search Strategy is created for Inventory
Management.
Tips and Tricks
The strategy type allows you to define search strategies at the following levels, for example.
o plant/movement type
o plant/movement type/material

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Procedure Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Central functions  Batch Management  Batch Determination 
Batch Search Strategy  For Inventory Management  Create
Via Transaction Code MBC1
1.2. On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial screen, make the following entries and
Choose Key Combination.
Strategy Type Strategy Type for Batch
determination
R Select Strategy Type
(NOTE: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
1.3 In the Key Combination dialog box, choose radio button Movement Type / Material and choose
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
1.4 On the Create BP: Batch Number (YB11): Fast Entry screen, enter in Movement Type input
field and make the following entries for Movement Type/Material:
Movement
Type
Movement Type for which you want
automatic Batch Determination
R
Material Material Number R
No. batch
splits
The number of allowed batch splits
during batch determination.
O Enter Plant where material will be
active or select from pull down menu
Changes
allowed
Number of batch splits can be
changed
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8
Dialog batch
determination
Indicator which controls whether
batch determination is to be run in
the foreground.
O
Dialog UoM Indicator for the unit of measure in
which the quantities are displayed
during batch determination
O
Quantity
proposal
Exit to Quantity Proposal O
Over delivery
allowed
Allows the total of the split quantities
of the batches found to be greater
than the requested requirement
quantity.
O
Dialog batch
determination
You use this key to determine
whether batches are selected at the
start of batch determination and, if
so, how they are selected.
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
1.5 Select the entered line and choose Selection criteria.
1.6 The batch class assigned to the material (for example, YB_EXP_DATE_002 for Expiration
Date) and the characteristics of the class are shown. Confirm the data by choosing Enter and
Back (F3).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
1.7 On the Create BP: Batch Number (YBXX): Fast Entry screen, select the entered line again and
choose Sort.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8
1.8 On the Create BP: Batch Number (YBXX): Sort Rule screen, make the following entries.
Confirm the data by choosing Enter and Back (F3).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
Sort Rule Sort Sequence R Enter the sort rule you defined for
example for expiration date
(YB_EXP_DATE_SORT)
.
1.9 Choose Save.
Result: Batch Search Strategy has been created for Inventory Management.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger:
To analyze the issues and receipts of inventory at plant level for materials.
Analyze the issues and receipts of inventory at plant level for materials
None
Print Physical Inventory List
Tips & Tricks
In order to print, the output devices must have been defined in the system. The output device
can be set to a default output device (SU02) to be the same printer. Every time a job is spooled it
will automatically be directed to that device.
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management  Inventory Management  Environment 
Inventory Controlling  Standard Analyses  Plant
Via Transaction Code MCBA
1.2. Enter selection criteria:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Characteristics
Plant Plant code O 1000
Storage Location Storage Location O
Material Material numbers O
MRP Controller MRP Controller O
Material Groupings
Material Type Material Type O
Material Group Material Group O Enter your group #
Valuation Class O
Period to Analyze
Month From and to months O Enter months to get relevant data for
selected months.
Valuation
Standard Choose this radio button for materials with
Std valuation
O Defaulted
Std w/o
Distribution
Choose this radio button for materials with
Std valuation w/o Distribution
O
Material Ledger
Active
Choose this radio button for materials with
Material Ledger Active
O
Current Price Current Price O
Parameters
Analysis Currency Analysis Currency O
Exception Exception O
Note: On the above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
1.3. Press execute icon or F8, the system shows the blocked invoices as shown
given below screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8
1.4 Select the plant line and choose “Switch drilldown” button or F7.
Choose Material

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
Choose Enter

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
Choose 1 material

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8
Double click on one material
1.5 To generate hardcopy:
 Choose from menu Plant Analysis  Print
 Select print option

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCBA_Plant Analysis
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
 Choose Print button.
 Select printer (use dropdown – leave inputs in window blank, press enter to get
a list of all printers. Double click on the desired printer)
 Click green check mark
• User can also select to download to a spreadsheet – List - Export – Save to PC
file. The system will ask for information as to what kind of file the report is to
be saved to. The user should respond according to his/her needs.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCE1_ Purchasing Group Analysis
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
To analyze the purchasing activities of a Purchasing group.
Analysis of procurement activities at purchasing group level can be reviewed using this report.
None, but Period to analyze and purchasing
group can be used to have limitation on the
output
PO Value
Invoice Amount
PO’s
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Via Menus SAP Menu  Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  RFQ /
Quotation  Request for Quotation  Reporting  Purchasing Information
System  Standard Analyses  Purchasing Group
Via Transaction Code MCE1
1.2. On the screen “Purchasing Group Analysis: Selection”, enter information in the
fields as specified in the table below:
Selection
Criteria
Characteristics O .
Purch.
Organization
Purchasing Organization O Via matchcode search
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing Group Via matchcode search
Vendor Vendor number O Select from drop down menu
Period to
analyze
O Use to narrow search if necessary
Month Month O Via matchcode search
Parameters O Via matchcode search
Analysis
Currency
Key for the Currency in which the
Analysis is carried out
O Via matchcode search

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
Exception Name of the Exception O Via matchcode search
1.3. Click on the Execute button.
1.4. Review the “Purchasing Group Analysis: Basic List” screen:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MCE3_ Vendor Analysis
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
To analyze the purchasing activities at Vendor level.
Analysis of procurement activities at Vendor level can be reviewed using this report.
None.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Quotation  Request for Quotation  Reporting  Purchasing Information
System  Standard Analyses  Vendor
Via Transaction Code MCE3
1.2. On the screen “Vendor Analysis (PURCHIS): Selection”, enter information in the
Selection
Criteria
Characteristics O .
Purch.
Organization
Vendor Country Vendor Country Via matchcode search
Vendor Vendor number O Select from drop down menu
Plant Plant
Period to
analyze
Month Month O Via matchcode search
Parameters O Via matchcode search

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
Analysis
Currency
Key for the Currency in which the
Analysis is carried out
O Via matchcode search
Exception Name of the Exception O Via matchcode search
1.4. Review the “Purchasing Group Analysis: Basic List” screen:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MD15_Collective Conversion of Planned Orders
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
Requirement to convert Multiple planned orders to purchase requisitions.
Select planned orders and convert to purchase requisitions.
MRP Controller Group responsible for MRP
Material Identifies material
WBS Element
Purchase Requisition Purchase requisition number
Plant Plant ID d
MRP Controller
Purchasing Group Group responsible for purchasing
Converted Quantity Quantity to be requisitioned
Delivery date Date product is due at plant
Release Date Date PR must be converted to PO
Multiple planned orders are converted to
purchase requisitions
Tips and Tricks
Right mouse click will display drop down with the following options: Help, Back, Possible entries,
Assign Supply Source, Save, Cancel and Exit.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Materials Management>Materials Requirements Planning
>MRP>Planned Order>Convert to Pur Req>Collective conversion
(b) Logistics > Production > MRP > Planned Order > Convert to Pur. Req >
Collective Conversion
Via Transaction Code MD15
1.2. On screen “Collective Conversion of Planned Orders to Pur Req: Initial Screen”, enter
information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Plant Plant id R Enter or select from match code list
Order
Selection
Section Header
MRP
Controller
Group responsible for MRP R Enter or select from pull down list
Material Material master record number
WBS Element
From opening
date
Date range for opening date O Enter if you wish to restrict selection
period
To opening
date
Date range for opening date O
Procurement
Type
Defaults to “F” (External) O Leave as External “F”
Purchase req.
parameters
“Fixed”
Indicator
Firms the pur req, and determines
that it cannot be changed
automatically by MRP.
O
1.3. Click on the Enter button.
1.4. On screen “Collective Conversion of Planned Orders to Purchase Requisitions:
Complete Display”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Item indicator Selection Indicator R Click on the planned orders you wish
to convert
1.5. Click on the Convert Online button
Note: To convert all planned orders to purchase requisitions immediately, press the <Do Not
Convert On-line>button. This will bypass the “Details” screen.
1.6. On screen “Convert Planned Order to Purchase Requisition: Details”, enter
information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
Purchase
Requisition
data
Section Header
Purchase
Requisition
Purchase requisition number R Leave blank, let system assign
MRP Area An MRP area represents an
organizational unit for which the
company can carry out MRP
separately
C Display only

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
Converted
Quantity
Quantity to be requisitioned R Copied from planned order
Plant Plant id R Copied from planned order
Item Category Item category
Storage
Location
Location where material is to be
stored
O Copied from planned order, enter if
known (and blank)
Acct.
assignment
category
Key pointing to auxiliary account for
costing
O Leave blank
Delivery date Date product is due at plant R Copied from planned order
BOM
Explosion
Number
Specifies production series O Enter if specific date required for BOM
explosion
Release Date Date PR must be converted to PO R Copied from planned order
Invoice
Receipt
Invoice expected R Should be checked Blank indicates
free goods
GR
Processing
Time
Goods Receipt processing time O Copied from material master
Firming
indicator
Firms the req and determines that it
cannot be automatically changed by
either MRP or the control system
O Default is ‘on’
MRP
Controller
Person who executes and monitors
MRP
R Copied from planned order
Goods Receipt Indicator for printing goods receipt O Enter “x” or select from pull down list
Purchasing
Group
Group responsible for purchasing R Enter or select from pull down menu
Agreement Contract document number O
Purchasing
org
Central procurement group who
negotiates with vendor
O
Fixed vendor Source of supply to be used on
requisition
O
Supplying
plant
Plant to supply material O
1.7. Click on the Assign Supply Source button to automatically assign a source (i.e.
vendor info record, contract, or schedule line) to the requisition.
1.8. Click on the Save button to convert the planned order to a purchase req.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME01_Create Source List
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Qualification of a vendor to supply specific materials or services for a plant (i.e. adding a supplier to an
approved manufacturer list).
A source list specifies all the allowed sources of supply of a specific material for a Plant. It also indicates the validity period for
which each the sources can be used. A preferred source of supply can be indicated during each validity period by checking the
“Fix” column. Sources can also be blocked during a validity period by checking the “Block” field.
A source list enables the pre-qualifying of vendors to supply specific materials, and to plan future source arrangements.
Material Material Master number
Plant Receiving Plant
Valid from Date the vendor starts being a valid source
Valid to Dates vendor stops being a valid source
Vendor Supplier for the material being procured
Pur. Org Purchasing Organization
Source List Source of supply for specific material within Plant
Tips and Tricks
A source list is specific to each plant. A separate list needs to be maintained for each plant for each
material. (Note: the plant is a mandatory field when creating a source list).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access Maintain Source Lists manually by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master Data>Source
List>Maintain
(b) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Foreign Trade/Customs>General Foreign
Trade Processing>Environment>Purchase – Import>Purchasing>Master
Data>Source List>Maintain
(c) Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing>Master
Data>Source List>Maintain
Via Transaction Code ME01
1.2. On Maintain Source List: Initial Screen:
Enter:
Material Material Master Number R Material master number known or via
match-code
Plant Receiving Plant R Enter receiving plant number
( Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=Required; O-Optional; C=Conditional )

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
1.3. On Maintain Source List: Overview Screen:
Enter:
1.4. Choose ‘Save’ or ‘Ctrl+S’.
Field Name Description R/O/C * User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Master Number R Defaults from Initial Screen
Plant Receiving Plant R Defaults from Initial Screen
Valid From Date vendor starts being a valid R Enter the date

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
source
Valid to Dates vendor stops being a valid
source
R Enter date
Vendor Vendor name / number R Enter the known vendor number or
search via match-code
Pur. Org Purchasing Organization R Enter Purchasing Organization code
PPI. Shipping Plant O Enter if appropriate cannot be the
same as Receiving
Plant
OUN Order unit O Enter unit of measure for ordering
Agreement Contract/Scheduling agreement O Enter Outline agreement number if
applicable
Item Item number O Agreement item number if
applicable
FIX When this indicator is on, this vendor
will be the preferred source of supply,
during the validity period
O Indicator button on/off Only one vendor
can be identified as
fixed during each
validity period.
BLK When this indicator is on, this vendor
will be unavailable (blocked) as a
source for this material
O Indicator button on/off
MRP Source list usage in Materials
Planning & Control
C Choose from the pull-down menu.
MRP Area MRP Area for which material
requirements planning should be
carried out separately
C Choose from the pull-down menu.
( * R=Required; O=Optional; C=Conditional )
1.5. <<< Provide explanation for any special conditions, scenarios or cases. >>>

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME1L_ List Display Info Records Per Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
The need for detailed information from Purchasing Info Records sorted Per Vendor
Purchasing Info record serves as a source of Information for Purchasing. The info record contains information on a specific
Material and vendor supplying the material. The info record allows the buyers to quickly determine which materials have been
previously offered or supplied by a specific vendor or which vendors have offered or supplied a specific material.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Vendor
Material
Material Group
Vendors Material Group
Purchasing Organization
Info Category
Plant
Purchasing group
Output - Results
Display Info Record per Vendor Detailed information can be retrieved about info record
Tips and Tricks
Price simulation can be run after record selection. This simulation will highlight the “best fit” supplier
per the simulation criteria.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
.Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics> Materials Management> Purchasing> Master Data> Info Record> List Displays>
By Vendor
b) Information Systems> Logistics> Purchasing> Vendor> Info records
c) Logistics> Environment> Environment> Master Data> Subsequent Settlement> Customer
Reb. Arrangements> Environment> Condition/Arrangement> Environment> Material>
Environment> Material Groups> Environment> Information System> Environment> Info
records> By vendor
d) Logistics> Logistics Controlling> Purchasing Information System> Environment> Master
data> Info record> By vendor
e) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Agreements> Environment> Sales and Distribution>
Master Data> Products> Assortments> Environment> Material> Environment> Material
Groups> Environment> Information System> Environment> Info records> By vendor
f) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing> Master Data> Subsequent
Settlement> Customer Rebate Arrangements> Environment> Condition/Arrangement>
Rebate Arrangements> Info Record> List Displays> By Vendor
g) Logistics> Sales and Distribution> Foreign Trade/Customs> General Foreign Trade
Processing> Environment> Purchase - Import> Purchasing> Master Data> Info Record>
List Displays> By Vendor
Via Transaction Code ME1l
1.2. On screen “Info Records Per Vendor”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Vendor Vendor number R Vendor number known or via matchcode
Material Material number O Material number known or via matchcode
Material Group Key used to group materials with
similar attributes together
O Material group number known or via
matchcode
Vendors Material
Number
Material number which belongs to
the vendor.
O Vendor’s material number known or via
matchcode
Vendor sub-
range
Subdivision of a vendor’s product
range.
O Vendor sub-range known or via matchcode

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Vendor’s
material group
Material group to which the
material at the vendor belongs.
O Vendor’s material group known or via
matchcode
Purchasing
Organization
Organizational unit that negotiates
the general conditions of purchase
for one or more plants
O Purchasing organization known or via
matchcode
Info Category The category in which the info
record was created (i.e. normal
procurement, subcontracting,
consignment, or pipeline)
O Info category known or via matchcode
Plant An organizational unit where either
materials are produced and/or
stored or goods or services are
provided
O Plant is known or via match code
Purchasing
Group
Key for a buyer or group of buyers
responsible for certain purchasing
activities.
O Purchasing group known or via matchcode
Price
Computation
Additional selection criteria O Check if applicable
• Include cash discount
• Include delivery cost
• Determine effective price
Options:
(follow)
Additional selection criteria O Check if applicable
• Only those that are relevant
• Only plant specific
• Only those flagged for deletion
• Only with purchasing org data
Option:
From Date
O • Complete if applicable
Option:
Display all
records
O • Check if applicable
Option:
Sorted by
organization
O • Check if applicable
All fields are optional, as this transaction is search based. It is possible with this transaction
to display Purchasing info records by vendor, to do price simulation or view general data,
conditions and text.
Click on ‘Execute’ icon.
1.3 Once program is executed in step 1.2, the system returns a list of relevant purchasing info
records per selected vendors

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
• This screen allows the user to view: the info record number, vendor, material, purchasing
organization, purchasing group, net price, and currency (along with a few other items).
• The user may gather more information by clicking in box in the left-hand column. The
user can press the “Display” button to display the info record. To change the info record,
press the “Change” button. If the user wishes to simulate the price, press the “Price
Simulation” button. To view how the system calculates the price, press the “Simulation
List” button.
1.4. Exit Purchasing Info Records per Vendor screen. (Click on yellow up-facing arrow
icon, or Shift-F3)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME1M_Info Records per Material
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Need to view/monitor info records per material.
This process demonstrates a function that allows the user to view/monitor the status of info records when
the user searches by the material.
None are required The user should know the material else ALL materials will display
View info record
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Information Systems> General Report Selection> Materials Management>
Purchasing> Purchasing Info Records> Info Records per Material
b) Information Systems> Logistics> Purchasing> Material/service> Material>
Info records
c) Logistics> Environment> Environment> Master Data> Vendor> Purchasing
info rec> List displays> By material
d) Logistics> Logistics Controlling> Purchasing Information System>
Environment> Master data> Info record> By material
e) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Processing> Environment> Sales and
Distribution> Master Data> Products> Assortments> Environment> Material>
Environment> Material Groups> Environment> Information System>
Environment> Info records> By material
f) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing> Master Data>
Info Record> List Displays> By Material
g) Logistics> Sales and Distribution> Foreign Trade/Customs> General Foreign
Trade Processing> Environment> Purchase - Import> Purchasing> Master
Data> Info Record
h) Logistics> Materials Management> Foreign Trade/Customs> General
Foreign Trade Processing> Environment> Purchase - Import> Purchasing>
Master Data> Info Record> List Displays> By Material
Via Transaction Code ME1M
1.2. On screen “Info Records per Material”; enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Material Material master number R Conduct match-code search if
necessary
Vendor Vendor number O Use to narrow search if necessary
Material Group Material group code O Choose from pull-down menu
Vendor’s
Material Number
Material number used by the vendor O
Vendor sub-
range
A division of the materials that the
vendor provides.
O Choose from pull-down menu
Vendor’s
material group
Material group that the material
belongs at the vendor
O
Purchasing
organization
Purchasing organization code O
Info Category Type of info record (i.e. standard,
consignment, etc…)
Plant Plant number for the info record. O Choose from pull-down menu

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing group code O Use to narrow search if necessary
Include cash
discount
Check the box if the user want to make t
computation.
O
Include delivery
cost
computation.
O
Determine
effective price
computation.
O
Only those that
are relevant
restriction.
O
Only plant-
specific
restriction.
O
Only those
flagged f.
deletion
restriction.
O
Only with
purchasing org.
data
restriction.
O Default setting is checked
Press the “Execute” key.
1.3. Please view the “Purchasing Info Records for Material” screen:
organization, purchasing group, net price, and currency (along with a few other items).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
• The user may gather more information by clicking in box in the left-hand column. The user
can press the “Display” button to display the info record. To change the info record, press
the “Change” button. If the user wish to simulate the price, press the “Price Simulation”
button. To view how the system calculates the price, press the “Simulation List” button.
1.4 to exit from this area, press the Yellow “Exit” button or Shift + F3.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME1P_Purchase Order Price History
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Need to view/monitor purchase order price history.
This process demonstrates a function that allows the user to view/monitor the purchase order price
history.
At least one field must be filled-in, but the
more information the user provide will result
in a more efficient search.
View purchase order price history
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics> Logistics Controlling> Purchasing Information System>
Environment> Master data> Info record> Order price history
b) Logistics> Environment> Environment> Master Data> Vendor> Purchasing
info rec> List displays> Purchase Order Price History
c) Logistics> Materials Management> Purchasing> Master Data> Info Record>
List Displays> Order Price History
d) Logistics> Sales and Distribution> Foreign Trade/Customs> General Foreign
Data> Info Record> List Displays> Order Price History
e) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing> Master Data>
Info Record> List Displays> Order Price History
f) Information Systems> General Report Selection> Materials Management>
Purchasing> Purchasing Info Records> Purchase Order Price History
g) Information Systems> Logistics> Purchasing> Vendor> Order price history
Via Transaction Code ME1P
1.2. On screen “Purchase Order Price History”; enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Material Material number O Use to narrow search if necessary
Material Group Material group number O Choose from pull-down menu
Vendor’s
Material Number
Material number used by the vendor O
Vendor sub-
range
A division of the materials that the
vendor provides.
Vendor’s
material group
Material group that the material
belongs at the vendor
O
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing organization number O Choose from pull-down menu
Info Category Type of info record (i.e. standard,
consignment, etc…)
Plant Plant number for the info record. O Choose from pull-down menu

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Purchasing
Group
From Date Enter the date from which the user wan
analyze order price history.
O
Display all
records
Check the box if the user want to displ
all records.
O
Sorted by
organization
Check the box if the user want to sort t
records by purchasing organization.
O Default setting is checked
Press the “Execute” key
1.3. Please view the “Purchase Order Price History” screen:
organization, date of the purchase order, net price, currency, and purchase order number.
• The user may gather more information by clicking in box in the left-hand column. The user
can press the “Display PO” button to display the purchase order or the user the “Display Info
Record” to view the info record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.4 to exit from this area, press the Yellow “Exit” button or Shift + F3.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME2K_ Purchasing Documents by Account Assignment
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Purchasing Managers, Buyers and Management have a need to run on-line reports with an
Account Assignment as the main sort criteria. Purchasing is often requested to prepare reports
for cost centers (Departments). These can be done by List Displays for Account Assignment.
Trigger:
Requirement to display Purchasing orders by an Account assignment category
This procedure outlines the process of displaying Purchasing orders that have been created for an account
assignment category.
At least one of the account
assignment objects is required
Account assignment objects include cost center, WBS element, Order,
or Asset.
Purchase Orders per account
assignment
Display of Purchase Orders for an account assignment category
Tips and Tricks
It should be noted that in the initial screen of the transaction, the user could restrict the output list by
including more criteria.
Example: Should the user choose to restrict the input criteria to the Account assignment category and a
particular plant, the system will display all the purchasing documents that exist for only the Account
assignment category and plant that are required, rather than for all the plants.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing> Purchase Order>List
Display>for Account Assignment>General or, type transaction code ME2K at
the command field and press enter. This will take you to “Purchasing
Documents per Account Assignment” screen.
1.1. On screen “Purchasing Documents per Account assignment” selection screen, enter
information in the fields as specified in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Cost Center Code R Number of the Cost Center Cost Center
WBS Element Key identifying a WBS element C Select from pull-down menu At least one account assignme
must be specified
Order Order number O Select from pull-down menu At least one account assignme
must be specified
Asset Asset number C Select from pull-down menu At least one account assignme
must be specified
Sales Document Number of sales document O Document number known or via
matchcode search
See tips & tricks
Network O Select from pull-down menu See tips & tricks
Purchasing
Organization
Organization number R Akrimax Purchasing Org - 0020 Purchasing Organization
Scope of list Code name R Use drop down list to choose which
documents you want to see. “BEST is
the default code for Purchase Orders.
Selection
parameters
Code O Further refines the listing criteria. Ex.
Use ‘WE101’ if you only want to see
PO’s with Open Receipts
Selection parameters
Document Type Code O Selecting a criteria here from the drop
down box, you can see PO’s that are
supported by various other documents
types like all the PO’s written for a
Contract or Scheduling Agreement
Document Type
Purchasing Group Code O If you only want to see PO’s for a
specific Buyer, a range of Buyers or a
list of Buyers
Purchasing Group
Plant Plant code O You can enter a single plant, a range
of plants or a list
Item category Code O Leave this field blank for ‘Standard’
Account Assignment
Category
Code O 1 = taxable expense; 2 = non-taxable
expense; 3 = taxable asset; and 4 =
non-taxable asset 8 = taxable asset; 9
= non-taxable asset
At least one account assignme
must be specified
Delivery date Date O Limits the dates that the system will
use to list on the report
Validity key date Date O Will show you only agreements that
are valid as of the date entered
Range of coverage
to
Date O If a date is entered, the system will
calculate from historical data, which
outline agreements it expects to be
fulfilled by this date
Range of coverage to
Document number Number O If you only want to see PO’s with
outline agreements with a specific
number range, enter the numbers in
this field
Vendor Vendor number O Number known or by matchcode
Supplying plant Code for supplying plant O Valid for finished goods reports only
Material Material code O You can enter a single material
number, a range, or a list
Material group Code O Enter valid material group code

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
1.2. Click on the Execute button
1.3. After the information is entered and executed, the resulting screen “Purchasing
documents for cost center” will be displayed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
1.4. In the output screen as shown above, the following user actions can be performed to
display further details. Place the cursor on a line item (example material number) and use
the following radio buttons in the menu to display further details of the line item of the PO.
(a) There is a list of Variants created for specific output results. Follow menu path
Go to>Variants>Get. A Variant catalog will appear. Double Click on the variant needed.
Pre-defined field values will populate the table.
(b) Note: For any of the selection criteria on the List Display screens, if there is an ‘arrow
button’ next to the selection criteria, by pressing on that button you can enter a
specific list of codes for that criterion. Example, for the Cost Center you can enter a single
Cost Center, enter a range of Cost Centers, or by clicking the arrow, you can enter a
list of specific Cost Centers. By use of the Document Type field, you can define which
Purchase Orders can be seen, i.e. RFQ’s, Contracts, Scheduling Agreements, etc.
(c) When you have all of the fields defined for your selection and output results, Press the
Execute button to generate the list.
(d) By using the Action Buttons on the list screen, first select a line item from a PO, click on
any of the buttons, which are located on the Application Toolbar, and the following
information can be displayed. Green Arrow Back to return to the List Display.
Button Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values
Overview Button Looks like a magnifying glass O Will show you the Header, Line items and Item
details for the PO
Print Preview Preview of list display for a
document
O You will then be able to Print the Purchase
order selected.
PO History PO History button O Will show any associated documents for the
PO including goods receipt and invoicing
Changes Changes button O Will show any changes made to the orders
including the changed values and the person
who made the changes
Deliv. Schedule Delivery schedule button O Will show the total receipts made for the line
item
Services N/A
(e) By using the Action Buttons on the list screen, first select a line item from a PO, click on
any of the buttons, which are located on the Application Toolbar, and the following
information can be displayed. Green Arrow Back to return to the List Display.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
(f) In order to Print the List Display, follow the menu path List>Print make sure your correct
Printer is in the Output Device field. Press Continue. The list will print.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME2L_Manual Review of Pending Credits
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 9
Overview
Trigger:
Need to view existing purchasing documents by vendor.
This procedure outlines the process of displaying Purchasing documents that have been created for a vendor.
Scope of list Distinguishes the different types of purchase documents
Purchase documents per vendor Display of Purchase documents for a vendor
Tips and Tricks
It should be noted that in the initial screen of the transaction, that the user can restrict the output list by
including more criteria.
Example: Should the user choose to restrict the input criteria to the vendor and a particular plant, the
system will display all the purchasing documents that exist for only the vendor and plant that is required,
rather than for all the plants.
You can also limit the types of documents displayed by clicking the “Choose….” button on the initial
selection screen and selecting only those documents that you wish to display.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 9
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Purchase Order  List
Displays → By vendor
b) Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Purchase Order 
Reporting  Purchasing Information System  Environment  Document
Information  Purchase Orders  By Vendor
Via Transaction Code ME2L
1.2. On screen “Purchase Documents per Vendor” selection screen, enter the information in
the fields as specified in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 9

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 9
Vendor Alphanumeric key that uniquely
identifies a vendor
O Vendor known or via matchcode
search
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing Organization number O Select using the drop down menu.
Scope of List Determines format of search report R Select using the drop down menu “BEST” is typically used)
Selection
parameters
Categories that may be chosen to
limit the search
O Select using the drop down menu
Document Type Type of purchasing document O Select using the drop down menu
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing group code O Select using the drop down menu
Plant Plant to which delivery is to be made O Select using the drop down menu
Item category Type of purchase order O Select using the drop down menu
Acct. assignment
category
Account where costs are allocated O Select using the drop down menu
Delivery Date Date that the items are scheduled to
be delivered
Validity key date Only items that are relevant for this dat
shown
Range of
coverage to
Date that the outline agreement will be
fulfilled
Document
Number
identifies a document
O Document # known or via matchcode
search
Material Material master number O Material known or via matchcode
search
Material Group Material group code O Select using the drop down menu
Document Date Date that the document was
originally created
Internat. article
number (UPC)
If material number is not known, but
EAC or UPC is known
O Enter if known
Vendor’s
material number
Material number for the vendor O Enter if known
Vendor sub-
range
Subdivision of a vendor's total
product range according to various
criteria.
Promotion Number identifying a promotion for
which procurement is to take place.
Season Key that identifies season type O Select using the drop down menu
Season Year Indicates the first season year when
the material will be sold
Short text Short description of the material O Enter a description
Vendor Name Name of the vendor O Enter if known

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 9
1.4. On the “Purchasing Documents per Vendor” Screen:
1.4.1. The following information is displayed: document number, document type, material number,
material short text, material group, vendor number, vendor name, purchasing group, order
date, plant, storage location, order quantity, unit of measure, net price and currency.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 9

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 9
1.4.2. If you wish to view the purchase order, click on the purchase order number then click the
“Display document” button (magnifying glass) on the toolbar or F2. This will bring you to
the display purchase order screen from which you can view the details.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 9
1.4.3. To view the layout of the document output, click on the document number then click the
“Print preview” button on the toolbar or Shift + F8.
1.4.4. To view the PO History select a PO number by clicking it and then click on the “PO history”
button on the toolbar or F5.
1.4.5. To view any changes that have been made to the document header, click on the document
number then click on the “Changes” button on the toolbar or F6.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 9
1.4.6. To display the delivery date, time, scheduled qty, qty delivered, and the creation indicator
click on the document number or line item then click the “Delivery schedule” button on the
toolbar or F8.
1.4.7. To display the details of a service item, click on the line item and then click the “Services”
button on the toolbar or Shift + F5.
1.5. To exit from this area, click on the Exit button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME2N_Purchase orders by PO Number
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Requirement to display Purchasing documents using the Purchase Order Number
This procedure outlines the process of displaying Purchasing documents using the purchase order number.
Scope of list Distinguishes the different types of purchase documents
Purchase documents per PO number Display of Purchase documents for a PO number
Tips and Tricks
It should be noted that by including more criteria in the initial screen of the transaction, the user can
restrict the output list.
Example: Should the user choose to restrict the input criteria to a material and a plant combination, the
system will display all the purchasing documents that exist for only the material and plant that is required
for the user, rather than for all the plants.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Purchase Order  List
Displays → By purchase order number
b) Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Purchase Order  Reporting
→ Purchasing Information System  Environment  Purchase Order  By
Purchase Order Number
Via Transaction Code ME2N
1.2. On screen “Purchasing Document per document number” selection screen, enter the
information in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Purchasing
Document
search
See tips & tricks
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing Organization number O Select using the drop down menu. See tips & tricks
Selection
parameters
limit the search
O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
Document Type Type of purchasing document O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing group code O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
Plant Plant to which delivery is to be made O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
Item category Type of purchase order O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
Acct. assignment
category
Account where costs are allocated O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
be delivered
shown
Range of
coverage to
fulfilled
Vendor Vendor name O Vendor known or via matchcode
search
See tips & tricks
Supplying Plant Describes plant from which material
is supplied.
O Select using the drop down menu. Used for Stock Transport O
search
See tips & tricks
Material Group Material group code O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
originally created
Intern. article
number
(EAN/UPC)
EAC or UPC is known
O Enter if known See tips & tricks
Vendor’s
material number
Material number for the vendor O Enter if known See tips & tricks
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.
Season Key that identifies season type O Select using the drop down menu See tips & tricks
Press the <Execute> button

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
1.3. After the information is entered and executed, the resulting screen “Purchasing
documents for document number” appears as shown below
.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
1.4 In the output screen as shown above, the following user actions can be performed to
display further details. Place the cursor on a line item (example material number) and use
the following radio buttons in the menu to display further details of the line item of the
PO.
Radio Button Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Display Icon Display the PO O Display details of the purchase order
PO History History of the Purchase order O Displays history of the purchase order
Changes Changes to the document header O Displays any changes to the header of
the PO
Deliv.
Schedule
Delivery schedule O Displays the delivery date, time,
scheduled qty, qty delivered, and the
creation indicator
Services Service Item O Displays details of a service item
Press the <green back arrow> or <exit> button to exit the screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME2O_Subcontracting Stock Monitoring for Vendor
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
Requirement to monitor stock that is held at a Sub Contract vendor location for inventory
management.
Create a list of stocks of materials provided to a vendor, with the current stock situation, planned issues and planned receipts
None are required, but to make the search
reasonable, the user should specify the
vendor and purchasing organization.
Display of stock at sub contractor location.
Tips and Tricks
The list is initially aggregated, i.e. show as totals lines. You can also show the individual purchase orders,
deliveries, etc.
The following are NOT taken into account in the selection of the dependent requirements:
Phantom Assemblies
Co-products (components with negative input quantities)
Bulk material items
Components withdrawn not from SC stock but from a different special stock (project stock)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Purchase Order  Reporting
→ SC stocks per vendor
Via Transaction Code ME2O
1.2. On the screen “SC Stock Monitoring for vendor”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the table below:
Selection
Criteria
Vendor Vendor number O Vendor known or via matchcode
search if the
Narrow the search
parameters by
furnishing the vendor
number.
Components Material master number O Via matchcode search

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
provided
Assembly Material master number Via matchcode search
Plant Plant to which delivery is to be made O Select from drop down menu
Date Required Date that the items are scheduled to
be delivered
With reqts from
SC requisitions
Includes requirements from sub
contract requisitions
O Check on or off
W. ext. receipts
from requisitions
Includes external receipts form
requisitions
O Check on or off
List Output
Only SC Stocks
with Shortage
If this indicator is set, only those
subcontracting stocks are listed in
respect of which planned issues
exceed the available qty.
O Check on or off
Display zero
rows
If set, totals lines with the quantity of
0 are also displayed.
O Check on or off
1.4. Review the “SC Stock Monitoring per Vendor” screen:
1.4.1. This screen allows the user to view the following: PO number, vendor, material, quantity,
subcontracting stock, available subcontracting stock, and plant.
1.4.2. Gather more information by clicking on the Expand and Collapse buttons for more detail of
the purchase order or receipt documents
1.4.3. Enter into more functionality by clicking on the Post Goods Issue, Create Delivery, Delete
Reservation, Stock overview, or Stock/rqmts buttons.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME03_Display Source List
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
Supply source information is required for a material.
There are two methods for Displaying Source Lists - Display and List Display. Display allow only one material number to be used
where as, list display allows a range of material numbers to be selected. These display functions do not allow any creation or
changing of Source Lists
Plant Plant Number
Source List Displays
Tips and Tricks
1) List display is a more comprehensive method of displaying Source Lists. This allows for a range of
materials and plants to be used in selecting multiple material source lists.
2) Go to Extras -> Simulation -> Source Lists to display a list of all the valid suppliers for a
particular date.
3) Go to Extras -> Simulation -> Source of Supply to display a list of all the valid suppliers,
agreements and info records for a particular date. From this display the user can also simulate a
price including all of the applicable pricing conditions.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
1.1. On Access Display Function by:
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master data>Source
List>Display (or List Display)
1.2. Display Source List: Initial Screen: enter information in table below:
Material Material Number R Number known or via match-code
Plant Plant number R Number known or via match-code
( Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=Required; O-Optional; C=Conditional )
1.3. On screen, Display Source List : Overview Screen: check information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
The following fields will be displayed:
Material Material Master R Defaults from Initial Screen
Plant Receiving Plant R Defaults from Initial Screen
Valid From Date vendor starts being a valid
source
R Displays the date
Valid to Dates vendor stops being a valid
source
R Displays date
Pur. Org Purchasing Organization R Displays Purchasing Organization
code
PPI. Shipping Plant O Displays if appropriate cannot be the
same as Receiving
Plant
OUN Order unit O Displays unit of measure for ordering
Agreement Contract/Scheduling agreement O Displays Outline agreement number
Item Item number O Displays Agreement item number
FIX When this indicator is on, this vendor
will be the preferred source of supply,
during the validity period
Displays if Indicator button on/off
BLK When this indicator is on, this vendor
will be unavailable (blocked) as a
source for this material
O Displays if Indicator button on/off
MRP When this indicator is on, the source
list record is used in materials
requirement planning (MRP)
C Displays if Indicator button on/off
MPN material Manufacturer Part Number O Display only

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME4B_ RFQ’s by Tracking Number
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Need to view/monitor request for quotations (RFQ’s) by RFQ number.
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of RFQ’s when you search by the Tracking number.
None are required.
View status of RFQ
Tips and Tricks
When doing any kind of search, it is advisable to enter as many search criteria as possible in order to
minimize both the run time of the report, and the unnecessary information.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  RFQ/Quotation  RFQ 
List Displays → By Tracking number
Via Transaction Code ME4B

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
1.2. On screen “Purchasing Documents per Requirement Tracking Number”; enter information
in the fields as specified in the table below:
Requirement
tracking number
Requirement tracking number O Conduct a matchcode search if
unknown
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing Organization number O Choose relevant purchasing
organization

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Scope of List Determines format of search report R You may choose from list of drop-down
items
“ANFR” is used for
RFQ’s
Selection
parameters
limit the search
O You may choose from list of drop-down
items. Use to narrow search if
necessary.
Document Type Type of purchasing document O Use to narrow search if necessary
Purchasing
Group
Plant Plant to which delivery is to be made O To narrow search, select plant from
drop down menu
Item category Type of RFQ O Use to narrow search if necessary
be delivered
Deadline subm.
of quotations
Date by which the vendor is to
submit the quotation
Document
Number
Identifies a document
O Use the narrow search if necessary
is supplied.
O Used for Stock Transport Orders.
Material Material master number O Use to narrow search if necessary
originally created
Intern. Article
number
(EAN/UPC)
EAN or UPC is known
Vendor’s
material number
Material number for the vendor O Use to narrow search if necessary
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.
Season Key that identifies season type O Use to narrow search if necessary
Short Text Short description of the material O Use to narrow search if necessary
Vendor name Name of vendor O Use to narrow search if necessary
1.4. View the “Purchasing Documents per Document Number” screen:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.4.1 This screen allows the user to view: the Tracking number, vendor, material, RFQ
quantity, quotation net price, and plant (along with a few other items)
1.4.2 More information may be gathered by clicking on the purchase order or line item
number and then clicking on one of the following radio buttons: “Magnifying glass
(Display Document)”, “Changes”, “Delivery Schedule”, or “Services.”
1.5. To exit from this area, click on the yellow Exit button or use the <Shift + F3> keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME4C_RFQ’s by Materials Group
Materials Management >
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Need arises to view/monitor Request for Quotes (RFQ’s) by the material group.
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of RFQ’s when you search by the material group.
Material group Key that you use to group together several materials or services with the same
attributes, and to assign them to a particular material group.
Scope of list Key that determines which information is to be displayed in the list.
View and monitor status of RFQ’s for a
material group
Tips and Tricks
 As with other SAP List Display transactions, the more information that is entered on the initial
selection screen, the more focused the list of RFQs will be that is returned.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Purchasing > RFQ/Quotation > RFQ >
List Displays > By Material Group
(b) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing >
RFQ/Quotation > Request for Quotation > Reporting > Purchasing
Information System > Environment > Document Information > Inquires > By
Material Group
(c) Information Systems > Logistics > Purchasing > Purchasing Documents >
Inquiries > By Material Group
Via Transaction Code ME4C
1.2. On screen “Purchasing Documents per Material Group”; enter information in the fields as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Material Group Material group code R Choose from pull-down menu

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Purchasing
Organization
organization
Without material
number
R An “X” should default into this field.
items
RFQ’s
Selection
parameters
limit the search
items.
Use to narrow search if necessary.
Purchasing
Group
drop down menu
be delivered
Deadline subm.
of Quotations
Date that the bids are scheduled to
be delivered
Document
Number
Supplying Plant Plant supplying materials for stock
transport orders
O Only use for stock transport orders
originally created
European Article
Number (EAN)
EAC or UPC is known
Vendor’s
material number
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.3. Click on the Execute icon.
1.4. The “Purchasing Documents per Material Group” screen will be displayed. This screen
will contain the RFQ’s that met the criteria entered on the initial screen.
1.4.1. This screen allows the user to view the RFQ number, vendor, material, RFQ
quantity, quotation net price, and plant as well as other items.
1.4.2. Next, you may gather more information by clicking on the purchase order or line
item number and then clicking on one of the following radio buttons: “Magnifying
glass (Display Document)”, “Changes”, “Delivery Schedule”, or “Services.”
1.5. To exit, click on the green Back arrow, the yellow Exit arrow, or depress the <Shift + F3>
keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
RFQ’s by Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Need arises to view/monitor Request for Quotes (RFQ’s) for a particular vendor(s).
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of RFQ’s when you search by the vendor.
Scope of list Key that determines which information is to be displayed in the list.
View status of RFQ’s for a vendor(s)
Tips and Tricks
 As with other SAP List Display transactions, the more information the user is able to enter on the
initial selection screen the more focused the list of RFQs will be that is returned.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
RFQ’s by Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Purchasing > RFQ/Quotation > RFQ >
List Displays > By Vendor
RFQ/Quotation > Request for Quotation > Reporting > Purchasing
Information System > Environment > Document Information > Inquires > By
Vendor
(c) Information Systems > Logistics > Purchasing > Purchasing Documents >
Inquiries > By Vendor
Via Transaction Code ME4L
1.2. On screen “Purchasing Documents per Vendor”, enter information in the fields as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
RFQ’s by Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Vendor Vendor number O Conduct a matchcode search if the
vendor number is unknown.
Purchasing
Organization
organization
Scope of List Determines format of search report R You may choose from list of drop-down “ANFR” is used for

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
RFQ’s by Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
items RFQ’s
Selection
parameters
limit the search
items.
Purchasing
Group
drop down menu
be delivered
Deadline subm.
of Quotations
Date that the bid for the quote is
due.
Document
number
originally created
European Article
Number (EAN)
EAN or UPC is known
Vendor’s
material number
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
RFQ’s by Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
1.4. The “Purchasing Documents per Vendor” screen will be displayed. It will contain the
RFQ’s that met the criteria entered by the user.
1.4.1. This screen allows the uer to view: the RFQ number, vendor, material, RFQ
quantity, quotation net price, and plant (along with a few other items).
1.4.2. More information may be displayed by clicking on the purchase order or line item
number and then clicking on one of the following radio buttons: “Magnifying glass
(Display Document)”, “Changes”, “Delivery Schedule”, or “Services.”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
RFQ’s by Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
RFQ’s by Vendor
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
1.5. To exit, click on the green Back arrow, the yellow Exit arrow, or depress the <Shift + F3>
keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME4M_RFQ’s by Material
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
Purchasing needs to view/monitor request for quotations (RFQ’s) by material.
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of RFQ’s when you search by the material.
None are required, but if you are searching
per material, you should know the material.
View status of RFQ
Tips and Tricks
Whenever a search is performed, the more fields that are filled in on the initial screen, the faster the
report will run and the less un-needed information will be displayed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
1.1 Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  RFQ/Quotation RFQ →
List displays → By material
Via Transaction Code ME4M

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
1.2 On screen “Purchasing Documents per Material”; enter information in the fields as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
drop down menu
Purchasing
Organization
organization
items
RFQ’s
Selection
parameters
limit the search
items.
Purchasing
Group
be delivered
Deadline subm.
of quotation
Document
Number
is supplied.
originally created
Intern. Article No.
(EAN/UPC)
EAN or UPC is known
Vendor’s
material number
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
1.4. View the “Purchasing Documents per Material” screen:
1.4.1. This screen allows the viewer to view the RFQ number, vendor, material, RFQ quantity,
quotation net price, and plant (along with a few other items).
1.4.2. More information may be gathered by clicking on the purchase order or line item number,
then clicking on one of the following radio buttons: “Magnifying glass (Display Document)”,
“Changes”, “Delivery Schedule”, or “Services.”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
1.5. To exit from this area, press the yellow Exit button or use the <Shift + F3> keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME4N_ RFQ’s by RFQ Number
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Need to view/monitor request for quotations (RFQ’s) by RFQ number.
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of RFQ’s when you search by the RFQ number.
None are required.
View status of RFQ
Tips and Tricks
When doing any kind of search, it is advisable to enter as many search criteria as possible in order to
minimize both the run time of the report, and the unnecessary information.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
List Displays → By RFQ number

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
1.2. On screen “Purchasing Documents per Document Number”; enter information in the fields
as specified in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Purchasing
Document
O Conduct a matchcode search if
unknown
Purchasing
Organization
organization
items
RFQ’s
Selection
parameters
limit the search
items. Use to narrow search if
necessary.
Purchasing
Group
drop down menu
be delivered
Deadline subm.
of quotations
Document
Number
Identifies a document
O Use the narrow search if necessary
is supplied.
originally created
Intern. Article
number
(EAN/UPC)
EAN or UPC is known
Vendor’s
material number
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
1.4. View the “Purchasing Documents per Document Number” screen:
1.4.1. This screen allows the user to view: the RFQ number, vendor, material, RFQ quantity,
1.4.2. More information may be gathered by clicking on the purchase order or line item number
and then clicking on one of the following radio buttons: “Magnifying glass (Display
Document)”, “Changes”, “Delivery Schedule”, or “Services.”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
1.5. To exit from this area, click on the yellow Exit button or use the <Shift + F3> keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME4S_List Request for Quotations
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger:
Need to view/monitor request for quotations (RFQ’s) by the collective number.
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of RFQ’s when you search by the collective
number.
The collective number is a number or code facilitating the collective management of a number of individual RFQ’s (or inquiries) in a
competitive bidding procedure. May also be termed the "call for bids number" or (collective) "bid invitation number".
If the standard settings are used, the collective number is a required field when an RFQ is created.
None are required.
View status of RFQ
Tips and Tricks
When running any reporting function, it is advisable to fill in as many fields as possible on the initial
screen. This will minimize the run time of the report and any unnecessary information that will result.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Procedural Steps
List Displays → By collective number
Via Transaction Code ME4S

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
1.2. On screen “RFQ’s per Collective Number”; enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
Collective
number
The collective number is a number
or code facilitating the collective
management of a number of
individual RFQ’s (or inquiries) in a
competitive bidding procedure. May
also be termed the "call for bids
number" or (collective) "bid invitation
number".
O Use the collective number that you
have assigned to the RFQ since you
are searching in this manner.
Purchasing
Organization
organization
items
RFQ’s
Selection
parameters
limit the search
items.
Purchasing
Group
drop down menu
Delivery Date Date that the items being purchased
are scheduled to be delivered.
Deadline subm.
of quotation
Document
number
Document number O Use to narrow search if necessary
is supplied.
Material group Material group code O Choose from pull-down menu
originally created
Intern. Article
no.(EAN/UPC)
EAN or UPC is known
Vendor’s
material number
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
Press the <Execute> key
1.4. View the “RFQ’s per Collective Number” screen.
1.4.1. This screen allows the user to view: the RFQ number, vendor, material, RFQ quantity,
1.4.2. More information may be gathered by clicking on the purchase order or line item number
and then clicking on one of the following radio buttons, such as “Magnifying glass (Display
Document)”, “Changes”, “Delivery Schedule”, or “Services.”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
1.5. To exit from this screen, click on the yellow Exit button or use the <Shift + F3> keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME05_Generate Source List
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 11
Overview
Trigger:
Source lists can be mass generated for a range of materials and for a range of plants without having to
generate each one individually.
When generating source lists this feature can be used to reduce the steps needed in creating source lists for multiple materials
and/or multiple plants. You can also specify how the system should treat the existing source lists (Options: do not change existing
records ; delete existing records; existing records become invalid).
Material Material number ( or a range of numbers)
Plant Plant Location ( or a range of numbers)
Source list for material at a plant
Tips and Tricks
Initial screen of this transaction has a field that can be checked to indicate that this is a test run. If this
field is activated, the system will show you a list of all of the new records that will be created as well as a
list of existing records that are either being changed or deleted. However, the save button will be
inactivated to ensure against accidental changes.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 11
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management> Purchasing>Master Data>Source
List>follow-on functions>Generate
b) Logistics> Materials Management> Foreign Trade/Customs> General
Foreign Trade Processing> Environment> Purchase – Import> Purchasing>
Master Data> Source List> Follow-On Functions> Generate
c) Logistics> Sales and Distribution> Foreign Trade/Customs> General Foreign
Trade Processing> Purchase – Import>Environment> Purchasing> Master
Data> Source List> Follow-On Functions> Generate
d) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing> Master Data>
Source List> Follow-On Functions> Generate
1.2. On the “Generate Source List” Screen, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 11
Material from The beginning of a range of material
numbers for limiting the search
R Enter number
Material To The end of a range of material O Enter number

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 11
Plant from The beginning of a range of Plant
O Enter Plant
Plant To The end of a range of Plant numbers
for limiting the search
O Enter Plant
Valid from The beginning validity date for
limiting the search
O Enter beginning validity date
Valid to The end validity date for limiting the
search
O Enter ending validity date
Do not change
existing
records
If this flag is on, old source lists for
the specified material will not be
changed when the new source list is
created
O Turn flag on if required
Delete existing
records
If this flag is on, existing source list
records will be deleted
O Turn flag on if required Note: you can only
choose one of the
three option for
existing records
Existing
records
become
invalid
If this flag is on, conflicting validity
dates of existing records will change
to avoid conflicts with material in the
source list being created
MRP Indicator This allows certain MRP functions to
be performed
Test run When this flag is set, the source list
will be simulated and no data change
will occur. When it is off the source
list will be created
Execute
Button
Will review selections and generate
source list
R Execute button
Item Choose item or source record item R Indicate item number by checking the
box next to the item you wish to select
Material Click on Material button after
selecting a line item
O Will display Purchasing view of
material master
Note: you can also
double click on the
items to get details
Vendor Click on Vendor button after selecting
a line item
O Will display the vendors address
screen

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 11
1.3. Choose ‘Execute’ or F8.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 11
1.4. Select a record and Click on Material button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 11
Select F3 or green check mark to come back.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 11
1.5. Select a record and Click on Vendor button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME5A_Purchase Requisitions List Display
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger:
User needs to view information regarding purchase requisitions, including item information and status of
requisitions.
User may not have the authority to change, so they can only look in display mode.
There are two methods for Displaying requisitions - Display and List Display.
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of requisitions from a list.
Scope of list (input fields may vary)
Sort indicator
View status of Requisition
Tips and Tricks
This BPP will focus on List Display of Purchase Requisitions.
Individual display of Purchase Requisitions are addressed in BPP “eme53c46c.doc”.
There are six functional menu paths for transaction code ME5A:
1. MM: Logistics > MM > Purchasing > Purchase Requisition > List Displays > General (this
menu path will be used in this BPP)
2. Foreign Trade/MM: Logistics > MM > Foreign Trade/Customs > General Foreign Trade
Processing > Environment > Purchase-Import > Purchasing > Purchase Requisition > List
Displays > General
3. Foreign Trade/SD: Logistics > SD > Foreign Trade/Customs > General Foreign Trade
Processing > Environment > Purchase-Import > Purchasing > Purchase Requisition > List
Displays > General
4. Production: Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing > Purchase
Requisition List Displays > General

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
5. Information Systems/Logistics: Information Systems > Logistics > Inventory Management
> Material > Document Display > Purchase Requisitions
6. Information Systems/General Report Selection: Information Systems > General Report
Selection > MM > Purchasing > Purchase Requisition > List Display of Purchase Requisitions

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Requisition  List
Displays → General
Via Transaction Code ME5A
1.2. On screen “List Display of Purchase Requisitions”; enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
Purchase
Requisition
Requisition number O Conduct match-code search if
desired.
Purchasing
Group
Requirement
Tracking Number
Number that facilitates the tracking
of the procurement document
items
“A” is the default for
requisitions
drop down menu
Item category Type of Requisition O Use to narrow search if necessary
Acct. assignment
category
Account where costs are allocated O Use to narrow search if necessary
be delivered
Release Date Date that the ordering should be
processed based on parameters set
in material master.
Materials/Planner
Controller
Number of the MRP controller who
is responsible for this material
O To narrow search, select MRP
controller from drop down menu
Processing
Status
Key specifying the current processing
status of the requisition
O To narrow search, select plant from drop
menu
Fixed Vendor Vendor number O Use to narrow search if necessary
Requisitioner Note on the requisition identifying
who the material is being purchased
for.
Short Text Short description of the material O May use to narrow search parameters
for consumable material.
Sort Indicator Specifies the way the list of
requisitions is sorted
R You may choose from list of drop-down
items
“1” is the default for
requisitions
Assigned
Requisitions
Specifies whether or not the list
display is also to include assigned
purchase requisitions.
O Check box to narrow search
Closed
Requisitions
Specifies whether or not the list display
to include closed purchase
requisitions.
“Partly Ordered”
requisitions
display is also to include partly
ordered purchase requisitions.
Released
Requisitions
Only
display is also to include released
purchase requisitions.
Requisitions for
overall release
display is also to include requisitions
for overall release.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
Requisitions for
item release
display is also to include requisitions
for item release.
Cost Center An organizational unit represents a
separate location of cost incurrence.
Order General term in APO for receipt
elements.
WBS Element Element representing a task in a
hierarchical organization of a
project.
Asset Describes a task which is to be
carried out within a company.
Asset sub-
number
Business object O Check box to narrow search
Network Number which identifies the asset O Check box to narrow search
Operation
Number
Contains instructions on how to
carry out a task, the order and time
period.
Sales Order Number that identifies an activity O Check box to narrow search
Sales order Item Number that identifies a sales order
item.
Check box to narrow search
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
<Execute>.
1.3. Please view the “List Display of Purchase Requisitions” screen:
• This screen allows you to view: the Requisition number, material, requested quantity, ordered
quantity, delivery date, material group, and plant (along with a few other items).
• You may gather more information by clicking on the purchase order or line item number and
then clicking on one of the following radio buttons: “Magnifying glass (Display Requisition)”,
“Detailed Data”, “Assignment Overview”, or “Services.”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
1.4. to exit from this area, press the Yellow “Exit” button or Shift + F3.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME6H_Standard Analysis_ Vendor Evaluation
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
Use to review and grade vendor performance on defined criteria. The initial evaluation information is
taken using the date the material master was created or from the part of the material master being
used was created.
Use this to define establish standard criteria for evaluation of vendor performance. You can evaluate for different purchasing
groups however you should set standard evaluation criteria. Examples of evaluating vendor performance criteria would be the use
of standard weighing keys such as Price, Quality, Delivery or Service. Information on the evaluation records printed is extracted
based on the date the material master was created or last section of the material master you last viewed.
Characteristics
Periods to Analyze
Perimeters
Output – Results
Evaluation lists will print based on set vendor
evaluation criteria
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics→Logistics Controlling →Purchasing Information Systems →Standard
Analyses
Via Transaction Code ME6H
1.2. On screen “Vendor Evaluation Analysis: Selection “, enter information in the fields as
Purchasing
Org
Field used to identify Purchasing
Organization
R Enter Purchasing Organization * Multiple
entries with
the field to
field option
Material Field used to identify material by
specific number
R Enter material number (s) *
Plant Field used to identify plant within
specific company code
R Enter plant (s) *
Purchasing
info Category
Field used to allow you to create
different info record types for different
document types
R Enter purchasing info record type *
Purchasing
info record
Field used to identify different types
on the info record
R Enter Purchasing info type (s) *

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
Month Field that allows monthly evaluation
to select
O Enter month for evaluation
Exception Field allows you to define and
exception situation Example:
Customer material or negative
trends
R Enter exception for evaluation Define drop
down

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME07_Reorganize Source List
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
Need to delete all sources of supply prior to a specific date.
It is possible to delete all source lists until a specified date. This enables the user to clean up expired source lists easily. This
transaction can be done on a range of materials and plants. The transaction will show all source of supply that have a “valid to”
date prior to the date specified.
Material number The material the user want to delete source lists from
Valid date The date that the source lists for deletion are valid to
Output – Results Comments
Deleted source lists
Tips and Tricks
The list of supply sources that will be deleted can be simulated by clicking on the “Test Run” field.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access delete Source Lists By:
Via Menus a) Logistics> Materials Management> Purchasing> Master Data> Source List>
Follow-On Functions> Delete
Foreign Trade Processing> Environment> Purchase - Import> Purchasing>
Master Data> Source List> Follow-On Functions> Delete
c) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing> Master Data>
Source List> Follow-On Functions> Delete
d) Logistics> Sales and Distribution> Foreign Trade/Customs> General Foreign
Data> Source List> Follow-On Functions> Delete
1.2. On screen, Reorganize Source Lists: enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
Material from The beginning of a range of material
O Enter number
Material To The end of a range of material
O Enter number
Plant from The beginning of a range of Plant
O Enter Plant
Plant To The end of a range of Plant numbers
for limiting the search
O Enter Plant
Delete all
records valid
until
Date until which the source list record
is valid
R Enter the date to be checked against
the source list, this is normally the
delivery date
Test Run Simulate the list of sources of supply
that will be impacted
O Click to insert check mark
Execute
Button
Will review selections and generate
source list
R Execute button
( Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=Required; O=Optional; C=Conditional )

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME9F_Message Output Purchase Order
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
A Purchase Order needs to be printed or transmitted
This procedure details how to print or transmit a purchase order created in R/3
Message Data Details the type of message to print or transmit.
A successfully printed or transmitted purchase
order
Tips and Tricks
The more search parameters that are entered the more efficient the search and the less unnecessary
information that is displayed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing >Purchase
Order>Messages>Print/Transmit
Via Transaction Code ME9F
1.2. On screen “Print/Transmit Messages: Purchasing Documents”, enter information in

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Purch. Doc.
Data
Document
Number
Scheduling Agreement Schedule # O Choose from drop down menu
Vendor Vendor # O Choose from drop down menu
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing Organization # O Choose from drop down menu
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing Group # O Choose from drop down menu
Document
Type
Identifier allowing differentiation
between the various kinds of
purchasing document in the SAP
system
O Choose from drop down menu
Document
Date
Date on which the purchasing
document was created.
O Enter Document date or choose from drop
down menu
Message
Data
Application Subdivides the usage of a condition
for the use in different application
areas
R EF defaults for Purchase Order
Message type Specifies the kind of output O Choose from drop down menu
Transmission
time-spot
You can process the message
immediately or at a later time. If
processing later you must use report
program RSNASST00
Processing
status
Indicates the status-
1 indicates the process was
successful.
2 indicates an error
0 indicates the process has not yet
started
C Default is 0
Creation date Date the message is create O Enter date or choose the drop down menu
Time created Displays the time the message was
created
C Defaults to time started

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
1.4. On screen “Message Output” select the appropriate purchasing document and
perform the following:
1.4.1. Click <Output Message> and/or
1.4.2. Click <Display Output> and/or
1.4.3. Click <Message Detail> and/or
1.4.4. Click <Trial Printout>

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME11_Create Purchasing Info Record
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 12
Overview
Trigger:
Info records are created automatically when the user order a material or update a price quotation from a
vendor, but can be also created, changed or deleted manually.
Purchasing Information Records (Info records) are maintained as Master data, just as Material and
Vendor master data is maintained. Info records may be created for materials that have a material master
record, and for materials that do not (Material Groups). An Info record links a material to a vendor. A
material may be supplied by more than one vendor. Therefore, there could be more than one Info record
linking a material to a number of vendors. The Info record contains information specific to the vendor and
material combination. For example, an Info record may contain the number of reminder letters to be sent
to a vendor for expediting purposes, and the unit of measure for ordering from the vendor. The Info
record also reflects price changes made by the vendor for the material. This information can be useful
when evaluating and selecting quotations.
Vendor Supplier of materials
Material Material number. Required for the material based info. records.
Purchasing org. Purchasing org. responsible for purchasing the material (see tips and tricks).
Standard When this indicator is on, it signifies this information record is for use only with
standard purchase orders
Short text Description of the material. Required when there is no material master record
Material group Material group to which the material is assigned. Required when there is no
material master
Order unit Units the material is ordered in
Sort string Used to subdivide purchasing info records. Required when there is no material
master record
Plnd dely time Days it will take the vendor to deliver the material
Purch. group Group responsible for purchasing the material for the plant that will receive it
Standard qty. Quantity of the material usually ordered from the vendor
Net price Vendor’s price (see tips and tricks).
Qty. conversion Defaults to 1

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 12
Current information record Current Info record indicating, price, lead time, delivery terms, conditions etc.
Tips and Tricks
Purchase organization on the initial screen is normally filled in and required in most companies. It should
be left blank if the info record will be for all purchasing organizations and information from Purchase org
screens will not be used.
On the Purchase org 1 data screen or condition screen, the net price should only be filled in if the user
plan on maintaining the price manually. Otherwise the last PO document will maintain the pricing for all
subsequent PO’s. Once the net price is filled in, the system will not allow the user to blank this field out
and switch to the last PO pricing method. The user can also use conditions to fill in net price.
Procedural Steps

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 12
1.1. Access Create Purchasing Info Record: Initial Screen by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Materials management>Purchasing>Master data>Info
record>Create
Trade Processing>Import/Export>Master Data>Purchasing Info Record
(c) Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing>Master Data>Info
Record>Create
1.2. Create Purchasing Info Record: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as specified
in the table below:
Vendor Vendor number R Enter vendor number
Material Material master O Enter material master number if the user This BPP is

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 12
are creating a material based info record. creating a
material group
info record
Purchasing
org.
Company’s purchasing Organization O Enter Purchasing org. See tips and
tricks
Plant Plant receiving the material O Enter the plant that will receive the material
Info record Number assigned to Info record C Enter if external number assignment is enab
Info Category The type of PO or withdrawal to be used
in connection with the info. record
R Pick from the radio buttons
Choose ‘Enter’.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 12
1.3. Create Purchasing Info Record: General Data, enter information in the fields as specified
in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 12
Info Record Info record number This number will be provided when the
Info record is saved.
Short text Short text description of the
material
C/R Must be entered if the material does
not have a material master record
For material group
info record only
Material group Material group to which the
material is assigned
C/R Must be entered if the material does
not have a material master record
For material group
info record only
Vendor Data Section Header
Reminder 1,2,3 Reminder letters O Indicate when letters should be sent
Vendor mat. no. Vendor material number O Enter vendors material number that
relates to company’s material master
Sub-range Vendors sub division of total
product line
O Enter if available
VSR sort no. Sort criteria O Sort in Vendors sub-range
Vendor mat.
group
Material group at the vendor to
which the material belongs
O Enter or leave blank
Points Vendor points O Points awarded by vendor depending
on pricing conditions and discounts
Salesperson Vendor contact O Defaults from vendor master
Telephone Vendors telephone number O Defaults from vendor master
Return
Agreement
Two-character key, indicating
whether a return agreement has
been concluded with this vendor
O Enter key or leave blank
Prior vendor Key that uniquely identifies the
prior vendor
O Enter prior vendor or leave blank
Order Unit
(Purchasing)
Section Header
Order unit Unit of measure in which the
material is ordered
R Defaults to base unit of measure.
Equal to Denominator O/C Conversion to base unit of measure Will only show for
material based info
records
Var. order unit Qty ordered at a time O/C Defaults from material master Will only show for
material based info
records
Sorting Section Header
Sort string Sort String C/R Required if creating material group info
records. Enter character.
Will only show for
material group
based info records
Origin Data Section Header
Certificate Cat. Certificate category C Category of certificates used
Certificate Number of certificate issued C Number issued by Vendor
Valid to Date until which the certificate of
origin is valid
Ctry. of origin Country of origin O Defaults from vendor master
Region District O Defaults from vendor master
Number Classifying number O Enter or leave blank
Manufacturer Name of manufacturer of material,
shown as import data in PO

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 12
Supply Option Section Header
Avail. from Vendor can supply material from
date
O Enter Date
Available until Vendor can supply material to
Date
O Enter date
Regular Vendor Regular vendor O Leave blank - if the user’s turn
indicator Button on, it identifies this
vendor as the sole source of this
material at client level.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 12
1.4. Create Purchasing Info Record: Purch. Organization Data 1 & 2, enter information in the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 12
Purchasing
Organization Data
1
Will only show for
purch. org. based
info. records
Control Section Header
Plnd dely time No of days it takes vendor to
deliver material
R Enter lead time
Purch. group Group responsible for purchasing
the material for the receiving plant
R Is proposed from the material master
if the plant is specified on the initial
screen
Standard qty. Quantity of material that is usually
ordered from this vendor
R Enter quantity, e.g., 100 PC
Minimum quantity Vendors minimum quantity O Vendor will not sell less than this
minimum
Rem. shelf life Enter if shelf life on item O Enter shelf life days
Shipping instr. Key denoting the packaging and
shipping instructions issued to the
vendor
O Select the appropriate shipping
instructions or leave blank
Maximum Qty. Maximum Quantity O/C Enter or Leave Blank Will only show for
material based
info records
Overdeliv. tol. Over delivery tolerance O Default from material master
Underdel. Tol. Under delivery tolerance O Default from material master
No mat.txt Flag that indicates whether the text O Set this flag to use the text in the Info

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 12
in the Info record is to be used
instead of the text in the material
master record
record instead of the text in the
Material master
Akn.reqd. Flag that indicates whether the
receipt of a purchasing document is
to be acknowledged by the vendor
O Set this flag if the user want the
vendor to acknowledge receipt of the
purchasing document
ConfContrK Confirmation control key.
Determines which confirmation
categories are expected
O Select the appropriate confirmation
category
Tax code Category of item reporting to
government tax department
O Includes federal, state, municipal tax
etc.
Unlimited indicator indicates unlimited over delivery
can be accepted on this item
O default from material master
GR-based IV Indicator that provision has been
made for GR-based invoice
verification
O Select for GR-based invoice
verification
No ERS Indicator that ERS is not possible O Set or leave blank
Exp/imp proced. Identifies an export/import
procedure
O Select the appropriate procedure or
leave blank
Rounding Profile Method of rounding quantity O/C Enter or Leave Blank Will only show for
material based
info records
Unit Group Key used to group several units of
measure
O/C Enter or Leave Blank Will only show for
material based
info records
Conditions Section Header
Net price Net price of material O Enter price of material See tips and tricks
Valid to Time until which the current price is
valid
O Enter or Leave Blank
No cash disc. Discounts disallowed O Indicator button on if applicable
Effective Price The effective price for the material
taking into account all conditions
O Determined automatically by the
system
Qty. conversion Denominator of order price to order
quantity
R Enter denominator for conversion
Condition group Condition group to which the
material belongs with the vendor
Price control Price control O Indicator button on if applicable
Incoterms transfer of ownership of material O defaults from vendor master
Purchasing
Organization Data
2
Will only show for
purch. org. based
info. records
Quotation Quotation number O Enter if in reference to a quotation
Quotation from Quotation date O Enter Quotation date
1.5. Create Purchasing Info Record: Text Overview, enter information in the fields as specified
in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 12
Info record note Extra notes or information O Select and enter note to appear on
Info record
Purchase order text Purchase order text O Select and enter text to appear on
PO

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 12 of 12
1.6. Save, then system will generate a message saying..
Purchasing info record 5300000140 1000 1000 created

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME12_Change Purchasing Info Record
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Vendor Price Change or change in vendor data
The purchasing info record (also referred to in abbreviated form as the "info record") contains information on a specific material and
a vendor supplying the material. For example, the vendor's current pricing is stored in the info record.
Some information will be automatically updated from Purchasing documents (purchase orders, contracts, etc.)
Material Material number is material based info record
Info Category Select Category (standard, pipeline, subcontracting, or consignment)
OR
Info record Number of purchasing info record
(Info Record Changed) To verify info record change refer to info record display
Tips and Tricks
If you do not know exactly which organizational levels to be changed, do not specify the purchasing
organization and plant on the initial screen. Press 'Enter' to display the existing organizational levels
for the desired vendor/ material. Choose Edit /Org levels and enter the desired purchasing
organization or plant.
When creating or changing quotations, scheduling agreements, contracts, and purchase orders, you
can use the Info Update field to specify that the info record is to be created or updated.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data > Info record
> Change
(b) Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Foreign Trade/Customs > General
Foreign Trade Processing > Import/Export > Master Data > Purchasing Info
Record > Change
(c) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing > Master
Data > Info Record > Change
1.2. On screen “Change Info Record: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Vendor Vendor number O/R Required together with Material number if
the Info Record number is not specified
Material Material number O/R Required together with Vendor number if
the Info Record number is not specified
Purchase Org Purchase organization O Needs to be entered if there is more then
One purchase org. that was created for this
info record number.
Plant Plant O Needs to be entered if there is more then
One plant was created for this info record
number.
Info Record Info record number O/R Required if Vendor and Material are not
specified
1.3. On screen “Change Info Record: General Data, Purchasing Organization Data, Condition or
Text data” change the field values accordingly.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
1.4. On screen “Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization 1 Data, change the field values

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
accordingly.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
1.4. On screen “Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2, change the field values
accordingly.
1.5. On screen “Change Info Record: “Text Overview” change the field values accordingly.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
1.6. Save the data and click green check mark or ‘F3’ to go back.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME13_Display Purchasing Info Record
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger:
Requirement for purchasing information on material and vendors
There are two methods of displaying Purchasing Info records: Display and List displays. List displays include lists of Info records
by vendor, material, material group, archived info records, order price history and quotation price history.
Info record Info record number
OR
Vendor and Material May be entered instead of info record number
Purchase Org and/or Plant May need to be entered if there are multiple purchase org/plants per info record
The Info record is displayed for Display and
lists of Info records are displayed for List
displays
Tips and Tricks
List displays is a more comprehensive method of displaying Info records (transaction ME1L, ME1M,
ME1W)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data > Info record
> Display
Foreign Trade Processing > Environment > Purchasing info record > Display
(c) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing > Master
Data > Info Record > Display
1.2. On the screen “Display Purchasing Info Record: Initial Screen”, enter information in the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
Info record Purchasing Information Record
number
O/R Enter info record number See Purchase org
and plant actions
OR
Vendor Vendor number O/R Alternatively, you may enter the vendor
and material numbers.
Material Material number O/R Alternatively, you may enter the vendor
and material numbers.
Purchasing
Org.
Purchase Organization O Enter purchasing org if info record was
created with a purchase org.
Plant Plant O Enter plant if info record was created
with a plant.
1.3. Info record information is displayed on the following screens, depending on whether or
not information is available:
a. Display Purchasing Info Record: General Data

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
b. Display Purchasing Info Record: Purch. Organization Data 1

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
c. Display Purchasing Info Record: Purch. Organization Data 2
d. Display Purchasing Info Record: Text Overview

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
e. Display ______ Price Condition (____): Condition Supplements

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME15_Delete Purchasing Info Record
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Info records are created automatically when the user orders a material or update a price quotation from a
vendor, but can be also created, changed or deleted manually.
Purchasing Information Records (Info records) are maintained as Master data, just as Material and
Vendor master data is maintained. Info records may be created for materials that have a material master
record, and for materials that do not (Material Groups). An Info record links a material to a vendor. A
material may be supplied by more than one vendor. Therefore, there could be more than one Info record
linking a material to a number of vendors. The Info record contains information specific to the vendor and
material combination. For example, an Info record may contain the number of reminder letters to be sent
to a vendor for expediting purposes, and the unit of measure for ordering from the vendor. The Info
record also reflects price changes made by the vendor for the material. This information can be useful
when evaluating and selecting quotations.
Material Material number. Required for the material based info. records.
Purchasing org. Purchasing org. responsible for purchasing the material (see tips and tricks).
Standard When this indicator is on, it signifies this information record is for use only with
standard purchase orders
Short text Description of the material. Required when there is no material master record
Material group Material group to which the material is assigned. Required when there is no
material master
Order unit Units the material is ordered in
Sort string Used to subdivide purchasing info records. Required when there is no material
master record
Plnd dely time Days it will take the vendor to deliver the material
Purch. group Group responsible for purchasing the material for the plant that will receive it
Standard qty. Quantity of the material usually ordered from the vendor
Net price Vendor’s price (see tips and tricks).
Qty. conversion Defaults to 1

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Current information record Current Info record indicating, price, lead time, delivery terms, conditions etc.
Tips and Tricks
Purchase organization on the initial screen is normally filled in and required in most companies. It should
be left blank if the info record will be for all purchasing organizations and information from Purchase org
screens will not be used.
On the Purchase org 1 data screen or condition screen, the net price should only be filled in if the user
plans on maintaining the price manually. Otherwise the last PO document will maintain the pricing for all
subsequent PO’s. Once the net price is filled in, the system will not allow the user to blank this field out
and switch to the last PO pricing method. The user can also use conditions to fill in net price.
Procedural Steps

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
1.1. Access “Flag Info Record for Deletion: Initial Screen” by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Materials management>Purchasing>Master data>Info record>Flag
for Deletion
Trade Processing>Import/Export>Master Data>Purchasing Info Record
(c) Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing>Master Data>Info
Record>Flag for Deletion

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Vendor Vendor number R Enter vendor number
Material Material master R Enter material master number if the user is
creating a material based info record.
Purchasing
org.
Company’s purchasing Organization C (R) Enter Purchasing org.
Plant Plant receiving the material C (R) Enter the plant that will receive the material
Info record Number assigned to Info record O Enter if external number assignment is enabled
Info
Category
The type of PO or withdrawal to be
used in used in connection with the
info. record
R Pick from the radio buttons Select ‘Standard’ for
most entries.
Hit Enter to continue.
1.2. After entering desired PIR to delete populate the fields required in the following screen:
Complete
info record
If the indicator is set, the data will
be deleted in the course of the next
reorganization run.
R *

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
Purch. Org.
data
Indicates whether the purchasing
organization data of the info record
is to be deleted.
If the indicator has been set, the
data will be deleted in the course of
the next reorganization run.
R *
Hit the Save to enable the deletion.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME21N_Create Purchase Order
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
A purchase order needs to be created, and the vendor is known.
A purchase order is a legal document used to record an individual purchase (negotiated terms, conditions and pricing) with the
vendor or arrange for a delivery based on prior agreement. It also provides the vendor with a reference document to link to shipping
(goods receipt) and invoicing (invoice verification) processes. The purchase order is a commitment to a vendor for a given material,
in a specified quantity at a predetermined price and delivery date.
Vendor Vendor number
Purchasing Organization Purchasing Organization code
Purchasing Group Purchasing Group code
Date Purchase order date
Account assignment category Where costs will be allocated
Material Material which is being purchased
Delivery Date Anticipated Delivery Date
Plant Company facility
Material Group Grouping materials with similar attributes
Order Type “NB” Standard Purchase Order
Purchase Order Date System Date will default
Purchase order document Can be changed, displayed or printed which can then be mailed, faxed or sent via
EDI to vendor
Tips and Tricks
The steps you must perform to copy a document or convert it into a purchase order are identical.
To create a requisition or purchase order by adopting an existing document, you can either select the
desired document in the document overview and adopt it in the current purchase order in the right-hand
area of the screen using the ADOPT button. In addition you can drag it onto the shopping basket symbol
with the left-hand mouse button. A prerequisite is that the relevant documents can be displayed in
the document overview. How to set up the document overview display is described in “How do
you create a variant within the Help files.”
Click the Personal Settings button on the tool bar, this function is for default information for purchase
order header data and also purchase order item data. This will reduce the amount of redundancy in the
data entry, i.e. plant, company code.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
One Purchase Order may be created for several purchase requisitions.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Purchase Order>
Create>Vendor/Supplying Plant Known
b) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Foreign Trade/Customs>General Foreign
Trade Processing>Environment>Purchase-Import>Purchasing>Purchase
Order>Create
c) Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing>Purchase
Order>Create
1.2. On screen “Create Purchase Order”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Shopping Cart
Symbol
Order type R System defaults in Standard PO. Use
pull down to change if necessary
Purchasing
document
number
Number can be internally or externally
assigned
O Leave blank if internally
assigned; fill in if external assignment
Vendor Vendor number R Vendor number known or via match
code search
Doc. date Purchase order date R Date PO created (defaults to today’s
date)
Header Section Header
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing organization code R Purchasing Organization known or via
match code search
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing group code R
Company Code Company code for purchase R Enter if not defaulted in from
purchasing org or group
Item Overview Item Overview
Item number Item number within document R Will default by system
Acct. assignment
category
Account where costs are allocated
For a consumable material. For a
stock material it is not required
C Leave blank for stock item, enter if a
consumable material
Choose either Project
(P), Order (F), or Cost
Center (K) to charge
costs Projects, orders
and cost centers will
have assigned
numbers
Item category Type of purchase C Leave blank for standard purchase
Material Material number R Use match code search if needed External numbering
may be used.
Short text Text from the material master record R Default from master record
PO Quantity Required units / quantity R Enter quantity
Unit of measure Unit that good or service is
purchased
R Enter unit of measure
Category of
delivery date
Indicates whether the delivery date
is to be entered and displayed as a
calendar day, week or month.
R default
Delivery Date Date material is required R Enter delivery date
Net Price Vendor selling price for good or
service
R Enter price
Currency Currency used for plant R Default
Per Price per unit R Default
Order unit The unit of measure for which
material is purchased
R Default
Material group Grouping together of materials by
characteristics
R Enter material group
Plant Facility where goods or services are
produced or sold.
R Enter plant
Storage Location Location where stock is stored R Enter storage location Required for stock
item

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
tracking number Number that facilitates monitoring of
the procurement of required
materials
O Enter if known Can be used in List
display to list all PO’s
created by a certain
buyer. Potential entry
is employee number.
Requisitioner To whom material or service is
ordered
O
Info Record Purchasing information record
informal price agreement that may
be updated with each purchase
O Default if good or service was
purchase from vendor previously or
info record created manually
Returns Item Specifies if good or service are
returns
C
Free Free goods C
Texts Texts exist if checked C
Purchase req Reference document number C Use tool bar button to
reference other
purchasing documents
Outline
Agreement
Reference document number C Use tool bar button to
reference other
Agreement Item Item number C Item number within
purchasing document
RFQ Reference document number C Use tool bar button to
reference other
RFQ item Item number C Item number within
purchasing document
Purchasing doc Reference document number C Use tool bar button to
reference other
item Item number C Item number within
purchasing document
Higher level item Item number of higher-level item to
which this item belongs (in a
hierarchical arrangement).
C
Sub-item
category
Indicates the nature of the sub-item
(for example, discount in kind).
C

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
1.4. On the ‘Item Details’ screen, click the Account Assignment tab for Item. Enter information
in table below:
Quantity Enter quantity that will be expensed
to cost center
C
Unloading point Location for delivery C
G/L Account General Ledger Account C
Business area A business area is an organizational
unit that represents a separate area
of operations.
C
Controlling area May include one or more company
codes
C

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
Cost Center Represents a separate location of
cost incidence. The definition can be
based on functional requirements,
allocation criteria, activities or
services provided, physical location,
and/or area of responsibility.
C
Recipient Individual to receive delivery C
1.6. The Purchase Order may be posted by clicking on the Save button.
1.7. A message will be displayed stating that the purchase order was saved, with the purchase
order number.
Standard PO created under the number 4500000027

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME22N_Change Purchase Order
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
A purchase order needs to be changed, and the vendor is known.
A purchase order is a legal document used to record an individual purchase (negotiated terms, conditions and pricing) with the
vendor or arrange for a delivery based on prior agreement. It also provides the vendor with a reference document to link to shipping
(goods receipt) and invoicing (invoice verification) processes. The purchase order is a commitment to a vendor for a given material,
in a specified quantity at a predetermined price and delivery date.
Purchase Order Number Document number to be changed
Purchase order document Can be changed, displayed or printed which can then be mailed, faxed or sent via
EDI to vendor
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Purchase Order> Change
1.2. On screen “Change Purchase order: Initial Screen”: enter information in the fields as specified
in the table below:
To change delivery address for
subcontract direct ship
Delivery Address Click on delivery address tab and
enter destination vendor number in
vendor field on tab.
Press Enter – Delivery address is
changed

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
If multiple lines on PO, pop-up
window will ask if all lines on PO
should be changed. User should
respond as needed.
To reschedule purchase order
line item
Delivery Date Click on delivery schedule tab and
enter new delivery date in Delivery
Date field. Press Enter. Statistical
delivery date is updated as well to
new date. If there’s a pop-up
window for updating statistical
delivery date, user should respond
as needed
To enter order acknowledgement
receipt
Order Acknowl. Click on Confirmations tab.
Enter date of receipt of order
acknowledgement in this field.
If the order acknowledgement is
received for multiple line items on
the PO, each line item must be
updated.
To enter price changes
Amount Click on Conditions Tab
Change price in “amount” column
Press enter.
To change quantity
Click on Quantities/Weights tab.
Change quantity in order quantity
field.
Press Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
1.2.1 Click on delivery address tab and enter destination vendor number in vendor field on tab.
Press Enter.
1.2.2 Delivery Address changed.
1.2.3 Click on delivery schedule tab and enter new delivery date in Delivery Date field. Press
Enter.
1.2.4 Statistical delivery date is updated as well to new date. If there’s a pop-up window for
updating statistical delivery date, user should respond as needed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
1.2.5 Click on ‘Confirmations’ tab.
Enter date of receipt of order acknowledgement in this field.
1.2.6 Click on Conditions Tab, Change price in “amount” column
Press enter.
1.2.7 Click on Quantities/Weights tab, Change quantity in order quantity field.
Press Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
1.2.8 Click on Save, the system will generate a message saying that

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME23N_Display Purchase Order
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger:
Requirement for information and the status of Purchase Orders.
There are two methods for Displaying Purchase Orders - Display and list Display.
Purchase Order number
Purchase Order displays
Tips and Tricks
List display is a more comprehensive method of displaying Purchase Orders, because it will allow for
detailed searches on various criteria.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Procedural Steps
1.1. On Access Display Function by:
Via Menus a) Logistics> Materials Management> Inventory Management> Environment>
Information> Purchase Order
Foreign Trade Processing> Environment> Purchase - Import> Inventory
management> Environment> Information> Purchase Order
c) Logistics> Environment> Environment> Master Data> Subsequent
Settlement> Customer Reb. Arrangements> Environment>
Condition/Arrangement> Environment> Pricing> Environment> Value
assignment> Inventory management> Environment> Information> Purchase
order
d) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Inventory Management>
Environment> Information> Purchase Order
e) Logistics> Production> DRP> Execution> Purchase orde> Display
f) Logistics> Sales and Distribution> Foreign Trade/Customs> General Foreign
Trade Processing> Environment> Purchase - Import> Inventory
management> Environment> Information> Purchase Order

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
1.2 Display Purchase Order: Initial Screen: enter information specified in the fields in the table
below: (ME23N will show last PO created. To change the PO number to display, access by
clicking on the “Other purch. Order” icon located on the Application Toolbar, or by
[shift] + [F5]. A pop up box appears to enter in the new purchase order or purchase
requisition number to view)
Choose ‘Enter’.
Purchase
Order number
Purchase Order number R Number known or via purchase Order
1.3 On ‘Standard PO Created By User Screen:’ view information as specified in the Document
definition:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8
2.1 Access Purchasing Documents per Document number (alternate method to select
purchase orders)
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Purchase Order>List Display
Via Transaction Code ME2N.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
2.2 Enter information as specified in the fields in the table below

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8
Vendor Alphanumeric key that uniquely
identifies a vendor
O Vendor known or via matchcode
search
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing Organization number O Select using the drop down menu.
Selection
parameters
limit the search
Document Type Type of purchasing document O Select using the drop down menu
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing group code O Select using the drop down menu
Plant Plant to which delivery is to be made O Select using the drop down menu
Item category Type of purchase order O Select using the drop down menu
Acct. assignment
category
Account where costs are allocated O Select using the drop down menu
be delivered
shown
Range of
coverage to
fulfilled
Document
Number
search
search
Material Group Material group code O Select using the drop down menu
originally created
Internat. article
number (UPC)
EAC or UPC is known
O Enter if known
Vendor’s
material number
Material number for the vendor O Enter if known
Vendor sub-
range
criteria.
Season Key that identifies season type O Select using the drop down menu
Click the Execute [F8] icon to display what you have selected.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
You can double click anywhere on this screen to drill for further information to display..

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME28_Approval of Purchase Order
Materials Management Here >
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
Purchase Order that is subject to a release procedure needs to be released by the required releasing authority.
The process of setting up release procedures consists of three activities. First, in the IMG, configuration
Must be maintained. Second, characteristics must be created. And, third, a class must be created
Incorporating the characteristics that were earlier created.
All personnel who are release points in the release procedure must be cognizant of the daily requirements
That their position entails.
Release Code The applicable Release Code that the user is releasing the requisition with.
Purchase Order released Releasing the PO results in a changed PO.
Tips and Tricks
Depending on the purchasing group, the material group, the value of the requisition, or some other proscribed
procedure, the purchase order will proceed through a proscribed release procedure that will ensure that a proper
level of authority will approve the purchase order before it will be released to the vendor. The release procedure
will be automated and it will be necessary for all persons responsible for approving requisitions to understand how
to release them in a timely manner so that goods and services can be procured efficiently.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Purchase Order  Release
1.2. On screen “Release Purchasing Documents with Release Code 99”; enter information in
Release Code Code with which the items of a
purchase order may be released
R Enter the user’s release code

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
(approved).
Cancel Release Determines whether or not the
suggested purchase requisition
items or purchasing documents
must fulfill the release prerequisite
for the specified release code.
O Set the indicator if the user only wish
to see the purchase requisition items
or purchasing documents that the
user can release (approve)
immediately.
Do not set the indicator if the user
also wish to see the purchase
requisition items or purchasing
documents that the user cannot yet
release (approve).
Check the box to view all
canceled releases.
Release strategy Define the release code R The user may specify a certain
release strategy whose value exceeds
a certain figure
Release Group Contains one or more release
strategies.
O Select Release buyer code from drop
down menu
Release + Save Determines whether or not the
suggested purchase requisition
items or purchasing documents
must fulfill the release prerequisite
for the specified release code.
O Set the indicator if the user only wish
to see the purchase requisition items
or purchasing documents that the
user can release (approve)
immediately.
Do not set the indicator if the user
also wish to see the purchase
requisition items or purchasing
documents that the user cannot yet
release (approve).
Check the box to view all
PO’s that depend on the
user’s approval at this
time.
Print Preview Preview release before printing C
List with Items Key that determines which
information is to be displayed in the
list.
O
Scope of List Determines format of search report R The user may choose from list of drop-do
items
“BEST” (Purchase Orders
standard default
Purchasing
Document
Category
Identifier that allows the user to
differentiate different purchasing
document types
R The user may choose from list of drop-do
items
“F” (Purchase Order) is
the standard default
Purchasing
Organization
organization
Document
Number
PO Number O Use to narrow search
Purchasing
Group
Type Vendor Vendor number O Use to narrow search if necessary
Release indicator Description of release indicator R
Name Name of a customer/vendor address R
Release option Release indicator R Indicates whether or not the
processing release point is entitled to
release the purchase requisition

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Purchasing
group order date
Date that the document was
originally created

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
1.4. View the “Release of Purchase Orders” screen:
1.4.1. This screen displays what is being bought, how much is being bought, the purchase price,
the release strategy, release indicator, and release option.
1.4.2. To view the release procedure for each requisition, select the check box in the left-hand
margin and click on the Release Start radio button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
1.4.2.1. The Release Strategy informs the user of the top level of approval that will be required.
1.4.2.2. The Release Code depicts the necessary level of approval that the purchase order requires
before moving on to the next release point.
1.4.2.3. The Release Indicator depicts the status of the purchase order.
1.4.3. The release can be simulated, or this screen can be exited from.
1.4.4. To view the purchase order, select the box to the left of the item and click on the Details
button.
1.4.5. To view some detailed data for each purchase order, click on the Detailed Data button.
1.4.6. To release the PO, select the checkbox for the PO and click on the Save button. The PO will
proceed to the next release point. In effect, the PO has been changed.
1.4 To exit from purchase order releases, click on the Exit button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME29N_Release (Approve) Purchasing Document
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Purchase Order that is subject to a release procedure needs to be released by the required releasing authority.
The process of setting up release procedures consists of three activities. First, in the IMG, configuration
Must be maintained. Second, characteristics must be created. And, third, a class must be created
Incorporating the characteristics that were earlier created.
All personnel who are release points in the release procedure must be cognizant of the daily requirements
That their position entails.
Purchase Order The purchase order which is relevant for Release to be done.
Purchase Order released Releasing the PO results in a changed PO.
Tips and Tricks
Depending on the purchasing group, the material group, the value of the requisition, or some other proscribed
procedure, the purchase order will proceed through a prescribed release procedure that will ensure that a proper
level of authority will approve the purchase order before it will be released to the vendor. The release procedure
will be automated and it will be necessary for all persons responsible for approving requisitions to understand how
to release them in a timely manner so that goods and services can be procured efficiently.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus SAP Menu  Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Purchase Order 
Release
1.2. On screen “Release Standard PO xxxxxxxx”; enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:
1.3 Check the Purchase Order displayed, if another Purchase Order to be selected, go to
‘Other Document’ from the menu bar, it will give you the following window

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Select the purchase order and click on Continue.
1.3. Go to Header tab , and select ‘Release strategy’ tab
1.4.
Header
Release
Strategy
Code Release code with which you can
process a purchase requisition item
O Default
Description Description O Default
Status
Status of release
O Default
Release Options
Release Options
R Click on the ‘Release’ icon

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
1.5 After click on release we can find the release option will change from to
and a tick mark in the status column
1.6 Now select the ‘Combi. final Release’ icon in the header tab
Observe the change as
1.7 Now select ‘Save’, you will receive a message saying that ‘Standard PO
XXXXXchanged’.
1.8 To exit from purchase order releases, click on the Exit button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME31K_Create Contract
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 13
Trigger:
• Business needs should be defined through a requisition. If the requisitioner is requesting a contract,
they will use a requisition type “RV”. A contract establishes a long-term agreement with a vendor to
supply a material or service. Contracts may either be value contracts or quality contracts. Value
contracts have a ceiling that is a monetary amount that should not be exceeded. A quantity contact
specifies a ceiling of goods or services that the vendor will provide to us. Contracts do not specify
delivery dates, this is determined when “release orders” are issued against the contract.
This procedure outlines the steps involved in creating a standard quantity or value contract in R/3 for stock material.
Agreement Type “MK” for quantity contracts, “WK” for value contracts, and “DC” for distributed
contracts
Plant Plant for which the material is procured for. If the contract is to be used by more
than one plant, leave this field blank.
Validity end Date on which the contract will expire
Quantity Quantity for which the contract is valid for (if this is a value contract, this is
optional)
Target Value Total amount of the contract (if this is a quantity contract this is optional)
Material Material number for the item to be purchased
Price Unit price valid for the contract item
Contract document
Tips and Tricks
By providing as much input information as possible when creating contracts, the user can save time by
minimizing the inputs at the time of the order release.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 13
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access Create Contract by;
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Outline agreement>Contract
>Create
Trade Processing>Environment>Purchase – Import>Purchasing>Outline
Agreement>Contract>Create
(c) Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing>Outline
Agreement>Contract>Create
Via Transaction Code ME31K
1.2 In the “Create Contract: Initial Screen”, enter information as specified in the fields in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 13
Vendor Vendor for which the contract is for R Vendor number known or via
matchcode search
Agreement
type
Specify what kind of outline
agreement
R For quantity contract this will be “WK”.
For value contract this will be “VK”
For distributed contract this will be
“DC”
Agreement
Date
Date of the contract R Defaults today’s date into this field
Agreement Agreement number C Leave blank, if the system is
configured to assign numbers internally
or enter desired number
This number will be
determined
internally
Purch.
Organization
Organization for which the contract
is valid
R Select from drop-down menu
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing Group for which the
contract is valid.
R Select from drop-down menu
Item category Key defining how the procurement of
the material or service is handled.
O Select from drop-down menu if
contract is for subcontracting,
consignment or other type.
Account
Assignment
Category
Key to determine who will be paying
for the consumable material or
service.
O Select from drop-down menu
Plant Plant number O Enter plant here if the user wish for the
plant number to be defaulted into all
line items for the contract. Also, the
user only specify the plant if the
contract is plant-specific.
Storage
Location
Storage location number O Will default from material master if it
has been maintained.
Material Group Material group O Will default from material master.
Req. tracking
number
Tracking number assigned on
requisition.
O
Vendor sub-
range
Subdivision of vendor’s product
range.
O
Acknowledge
ment required
Check box if document is to be
acknowledged by the vendor
O
Press <Enter>
1.3. On the “Create Contract: Header Data” screen, enter information as specified in the fields
in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 13
Agreement
date
Date the agreement was created R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
Item number
interval
The way the line items are
numbered.
O
Sub-item inter. Not used O Currently not used. Do not use
Validity start Beginning date of contract period. R Defaults today’s date into the field.
Change if necessary
Validity end Date that the contract expires. R Enter the date until the contract will be
valid
Language Language key. Designates the
display, text entry and print language.
R Defaults from vendor master. Change
if necessary.
GR message Goods receipt message. Indicates if
the buyer will receive a message
following each goods receipt in
respect of this purchase order.
O
Payment
terms
Terms stipulated by vendor O Defaults from vendor master. Change
if necessary
Payment in X amount of days O Defaults from vendor master. Change

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 13
if necessary
if necessary
if necessary
Target val Target value of the contract. O/R Required for value contracts
Exch. rate Exchange rate of the currency O Change if necessary
Ex. Rate fx. Fixing of exchange rate. Indicates the
purchase order currency and the
exchange rate cannot be changed
during invoice verification.
O
Incoterms Freight terms stipulated by vendor O Defaults from vendor master. Change
if necessary
Quotation date Date of the quotation O
Quotation Quotation number O
The user
reference
The internal reference number of the
vendor
O
Salesperson Name of vendor’s salesperson O Defaults from vendor master. Change
if necessary
Our reference The user company's internal
reference number or code.
O
Telephone Vendor’s phone number O For info only. Not copied to purchasing
documents.
Suppl. vendor Key identifying the vendor O
Invoicing Party Number of the invoicing vendor O
Press <Enter>
1.4. On the “Create Contract: Item Overview” screen, enter information as specified in the
fields in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 13
Item Number that uniquely identifies an
item within the contract.
R Defaults - Line items are defined by the
system in increments of 10.
No User Action
I Item category. Key defining how the
procurement of the material or
service is handled.
O Select from drop-down menu if
contract is for subcontracting,
consignment or other type. Will default
from original screen if information has
been entered.
A Account Assignment Category. Key
to determine who will be paying for
the consumable material or service.
O Will default from original screen if
information has been entered.
Material Material master number R
Short Text Description of the material or service
to be procured
C Defaults from material master. Enter
a text for material not maintained in the
material master (ex. Non stock
materials)
Targ. qty. The quantity for which the contract is
valid
O for
“WK”
R for
“MK”
Enter the number of pieces or amount
of service for the contract.
Oun Order Unit C Defaults from material master.
Net price The price for which the material is to
be bought at
R Enter the contract price here
Per How the material/service is priced C Per 1, 10, 100, 1000, etc…
Defaults from material master or info
record.
OPun Order price unit (purchasing) C Can default from the purchasing info
record
The conversion
factor needs to be
entered in the
"details" data of the
purchase order
item if different
from Oun
Material Group Material group that the item most
closely belongs to
C Defaults from material master.
Plant Plant number O The user only specify the plant if the
contract is plant-specific. Will default
from initial screen if it has been
maintained.
Storage
Location
Storage location number O Will default from material master if it
has been maintained.
Press <Enter>
1.4.1 Upon entering all of this information, the user have the option to use the radio buttons / icons on
the menubar to update or view more information that pertains to the contract.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 13
Button Name View Maintain/
Change
Header details X X
Vendor address X
Partners X
Release strategy X
Messages X X
Item details X X
Additional details X X
Pricing conditions X X
Text overview X X
Delivery address X X
Release documents X
Account assignments X X
Services X X
1.5. On screen “Create Contract: Item Details”: enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:
Access Create Contract: Item Details by:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 13
Via Menus Select the line item by clicking on the box in front of the item number.
Item>Details
Target quantity Defaults from header R Defaults from header
Release order Qty. Defaults from header R Defaults from header
Net Order price Defaults from header R Defaults from header
Price per unit Defaults from header R will default from material Master
price date Effective date of price R will default from material Master
Quantity conversion Denominator of order price to order
quantity
R Enter denominator for conversion
InfoUpdate Update info record. Determines
which prices and conditions are
suggested in future PO items.
O Select from the drop-down menu.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 13
Reminders Letters or reminders in regards to
shipments
O Enter number of days between
reminders
Confirmation
Control key
displays only indicates if type of
confirmation required
O Default from vendor master
Acknowl. Reqd Acknowledgement Required Check
box
O Check if Acknowledgement is
required
Acknowledgment
number
Vendor’s Acknowledgement
number can be displayed
O
TrackingNo Requirement tracking number.
Groups together the purchasing
documents that exist for a certain
material requirement.
O
Estimated Price Check box if price is an estimate O
Vendors material
number
External number to SAP O Vendors internal material number
Print Price Indicates whether price is to be
printed on PO
O Set print price indicator to “on” if price
is to be printed
Under delivery % Under delivery tolerance O default from material master
Over delivery % Over delivery tolerance O default from material master
Stock type Specifies the stock to which the
material is posted upon goods
receipt or goods issue (e.g Quality
inspection)
Unlimited indicator indicates unlimited over delivery
can be accepted on this item
Tax Code Category of item reporting to
government tax department
R Includes federal, state, municipal tax
etc.
Invoice receipt Invoice indicator O Indicates if invoice receipt is
necessary
GR/IR indicator Indicates if invoice verification is
based on goods receipt
O
Shipping
instructions
Indicates packing and shipping
instructions to be issued to vendor
O Indicator should be turned on if
required

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 13
1.6. On screen Create Contract: Additional data for Item; enter information in the fields as
Access Create Contract: Additional Data for Item by:
Via Menus Click on Additional Data Button (magnifying glass)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 13
Planned delivery
time
Time in days in which delivery can
be achieved unless entered
differently in this screen
O Defaults from Material Master
GR processing time Lag time in days in which goods
receipt is expected after physical
receipt
Revision level Identifies a version of a material or
document
O Select from the drop-down list
Prior vendor Indicates the conditions are
negotiated with this prior vendor
O Select from the drop-down list Price in purchase
orders will be
calculated if the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 12 of 13
price
determination is
configured
properly
Season category Season category O Select from the drop-down list
Season year The season year in which the
material is sold first
C/R Type in the related year Required if season
category is
entered
Kanban indicat. Kanban Indicator C/R Select from the drop-down list Required if a
scheduling
agreement is to be
used for the
replenishment of a
material controlled
using Kanban
techniques
Ext. planning Indicates the scheduling lines are
planned in the APO system
O Select from the drop-down list If the user set this
indicator, the user
can’t plan schedul.
lines in R/3
Net Weight Net weight per order unit O Defaults from Material Master
Gross weight Gross weight of unit O Defaults from Material Master
Volume O Defaults from Material Master
Volume unit Volume unit C/R Defaults from Material Master Required if volume
Is specified
Points Number of points awarded by the
vendor
O
Exclusion Excludes an outline agreement
item as the source of supply for the
materials entered
O
Condition group Used to create master conditions
between a certain material and a
certain vendor
O
No cash discount
indicator
The indicator would be set if no
cash discount were offered.
O Set indicator if required
Sub-range Vendors sub range conditions O Defaults from Vendor master
Promotion Promotion identifier O Use if special
conditions
maintained in
retail system
Pr. Date cat Indicates price control O Defaults from Vendor master
Incoterms Point of transfer of ownership O Defaults from Vendor Master
Rem. Shelf life Minimum amount of time for which
the material must keep upon goods
receipt for the goods receipt to be
accepted by the system
QM control key Indicates which conditions are valid
for quality management in
procurement

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 13 of 13
1.7 Press Save icon, contract will be created and contract number will be displayed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME32K_Change Contract
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 9
Overview
Trigger:
A contract for stock material needs to be changed. This can either be a standard quantity contract or a
value contract.
This procedure outlines the steps involved in changing a standard quantity or value contract in R/3 for stock material.
Business needs should be defined through a requisition. If the requisitioner is requesting a contract, they will use a requisition type
“RV”. A contract establishes a long-term agreement with a vendor to supply a material or service. Contracts may either be value
contracts or quality contracts. Value contracts have a ceiling, which is a monetary amount that should not be exceeded. A quantity
contact specifies a ceiling of goods or services that the vendor will provide to us. Contracts do not specify delivery dates, as this is
determined when “release orders” are issued against the contract. If an existing contract requires a change, this procedure should
be used.
contracts
Plant Plant for which the material is procured for. If the contract is to be used by more
than one plant, leave this field blank.
optional)
Changed Contract
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 9

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 9
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Purchasing > Outline agreement >
Contract > Change
Foreign Trade Processing > Environment > Purchase – Import > Purchasing
> Outline Agreement > Contract > Change
(c) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing > Outline
Agreement > Contract > Change
1.2. In the “Change Contract: Initial Screen”, enter information as specified in the fields in the
table below:
Agreement Number of Agreement requiring
change
R You must input the number of the
agreement to be changed.
1.4. In the Change Contract: Item Overview Screen” the following fields will default and some
can be changed as noted:
Short Text Description of Material O Change if required
Target Qty Quantity to be procured O Change if required
SLOC Storage Location O Change if required
Vendor Name/Number of Vendor R Vendor for agreement will default
Agreement
type
agreement
“DC”. This value will default per

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 9
agreement to be changed
Agreement
Date
Date of the contract R Defaults date of agreement into this
field
Agreement Agreement number C Number of agreement to be changed
will default.
This number will be
determined
internally
C Will default in per agreement to be
changed
Account
Assignment
Category
service.
O Select from drop-down menu, this
value can be changed if required
Plant Plant number O Enter plant here if you wish for the
plant number to be defaulted into all
line items for the contract. Also, you
only specify the plant if the contract is
plant-specific.
Material Group Material group O Will default from agreement to be
changed
1.5. Click on the Header button.
1.6. On the “Change Contract: Header Data” screen, change information as specified in the
fields in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 9
Administrative
Fields
Agreement date Date the agreement was created R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
Item number
interval
numbered.
O
Change if necessary
Validity end Date that the contract expires. R Enter the date until the contract will be
valid
display, text entry and print
language.
R Defaults from vendor master. Cannot
be changed here.
O Check if this action is desired
Terms of
Delivery and
Payment
Payment terms Terms stipulated by vendor O Defaults from vendor master. Change

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 9
if necessary
if necessary
if necessary
if necessary
Target val Target value of the contract. O/R Required for value contracts
Exch. Rate Exchange rate of the currency O Change if necessary
Ex. Rate fx. Fixing of exchange rate. Indicates
the purchase order currency and
the exchange rate cannot be
changed during invoice verification.
O Check as necessary
Incoterms Freight terms stipulated by vendor O Defaults from vendor master. Change
if necessary
Reference
Data
Quotation date Date of the quotation O Enter Date
Quotation Quotation number O Enter Number
Your reference The internal reference number of
the vendor
O Enter as desired
Salesperson Name of vendor’s salesperson O Defaults from vendor master. Change
if necessary
Our reference Your company's internal reference
number or code.
O Populate as necessary
Telephone Vendor’s phone number O For info only. Not copied to purchasing
documents.
Suppl. vendor Key identifying the vendor O Vendor Name/Number
Invoicing Party Number of the invoicing vendor O
1.7. Upon entering all of this information, you have the option to use the radio buttons / icons
on the menu bar to update or view more information that pertains to the contract.
Change
Header details X X
Vendor address X
Partners X
Release strategy X
Messages X X
Item details X X
Text overview X X
Release documents X
Services X X

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 9
1.8. Select and item, and click on the Additional Data button.
1.9. On screen Change Contract: Additional data for Item; modify information in the fields as
Planned delivery
time
O Defaults from Material Master but
can be changed here
receipt
document
O Select from the drop-down list
O Select from the drop-down list Price in purchase
orders will be
calculated if the
price
determination is

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 9
configured
properly
Season category Season category O Select from the drop-down list
C/R Type in the related year Required if season
category is
entered
KanBan indicat. KanBan Indicator C/R Select from the drop-down list Required if a
scheduling
agreement is to be
used for the
replenishment of a
material controlled
using KanBan
techniques
O Select from the drop-down list If you set this
indicator, you can’t
plan schedule.
lines in R/3
Is specified
vendor
O
materials entered
O
certain vendor
O
No cash discount
indicator
O Set indicator if required
Promotion Promotion identifier O Use if special
conditions
maintained in
retail system
procurement

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 9
1.10. Click on the Save button.
1.11. A message will be displayed stating that the contract has been changed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME33K_Display Contract
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
User wishes to display an existing Contract
This procedure outlines the steps involved in displaying a standard quantity or value contract in R/3 for stock material.
Business needs should be defined through a requisition. If the requisitioner is requesting a contract, they will use a requisition
type “RV”. A contract establishes a long-term agreement with a vendor to supply a material or service. Contracts may either
be value contracts or quality contracts. Value contracts have a ceiling, which is a monetary amount that should not be
exceeded. A quantity contact specifies a ceiling of goods or services that the vendor will provide to us. Contracts do not
specify delivery dates, as this is determined when “release orders” are issued against the contract. If an existing contract
requires a change, this procedure should be used.
contracts
Plant Plant for which the material is procured for. If the contract is to be used by
more than one plant, leave this field blank.
optional)
Displayed Contract
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Purchasing > Outline agreement >
Contract > Display
> Outline Agreement > Contract > Display
(c) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing > Outline
Agreement > Contract > Display
1.2. In the “Display Contract: Initial Screen”, enter information as specified in the fields in the
table below:
Agreement Number of Agreement requiring
change
R You must input the number of the
agreement to be displayed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
1.4. In the Display Contract: Item Overview Screen” the following fields will be displayed. In a
‘Display’ format, fields can not be changed.
Short Text Description of Material O Field will display a name
Target Qty Quantity to be procured O Field will display a quantity
SLOC Storage Location O Field will display an SLOC
Vendor Name/Number of Vendor R Vendor for agreement will default
Agreement
type
agreement
“DC”. This value will default per
agreement to be changed
Agreement
Date
Date of the contract R Defaults date of agreement into this
field
Agreement Agreement number C Number of agreement to be displayed
will default.
This number will be
determined
internally
C Will default in per agreement to be
changed
Account
Assignment
Category
service.
O Field will display
Plant Plant number O Field will display
Material Group Material group O Will default from agreement to be
changed
1.5. Click on the Header button.
1.6. On the “Display Contract: Header Data” screen, view information as explained in the table
below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Administrative
Fields
Agreement date Date the agreement was created R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
Item number
interval
numbered.
Change if necessary
Validity end Date that the contract expires. R Field will display
display, text entry and print
language.
R Defaults from vendor master. Cannot
be changed here.
Terms of
Delivery and
Payment

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
Payment terms Terms stipulated by vendor O Field will display
Payment in X amount of days O Field will display
Target val Target value of the contract. O/R Field will display
Exch. Rate Exchange rate of the currency O Field will display
Ex. Rate fx. Fixing of exchange rate. Indicates
the purchase order currency and
the exchange rate cannot be
changed during invoice verification.
Incoterms Freight terms stipulated by vendor O Field will display
Reference
Data
Quotation date Date of the quotation O Field will display
Quotation Quotation number O Field will display
Your reference The internal reference number of
the vendor
Salesperson Name of vendor’s salesperson O Field will display
Our reference Your company's internal reference
number or code.
Telephone Vendor’s phone number O Field will display
Suppl. vendor Key identifying the vendor O Field will display
Invoicing Party Number of the invoicing vendor O Field will display
1.7. Upon viewing all of this information, there is the option to use the radio buttons / icons on
the menu bar to view more information that pertains to the contract.
Change
Header details X X
Vendor address X
Partners X
Release strategy X
Messages X X
Item details X X
Text overview X X
Release documents X
Services X X
1.8. Select an item and click on the Additional Data button.
1.9. On screen Display Contract: Additional data for Item; display information in the fields as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
Planned delivery
time
receipt
document
O Field will display Price in purchase
orders will be
calculated if the
price
determination is
configured
properly
Season category Season category O Field will display
C/R Field will display Required if season
category is
entered

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
KanBan indicat. KanBan Indicator C/R Field will display Required if a
scheduling
agreement is to be
used for the
replenishment of a
material controlled
using KanBan
techniques
O Field will display If you set this
indicator, you can’t
plan schedule.
lines in R/3
Is specified
vendor
materials entered
certain vendor
No cash discount
indicator
Promotion Promotion identifier O Field will display Use if special
conditions
maintained in
retail system
procurement
1.10. To exit, click on the Exit button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME41_Create Request for Quotation
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 10
Overview
Trigger:
• Purchasing determines a quotation is required from vendors
SAP provides the capability of creating and issuing single or multiple items Request for Quotes (RFQ’s). Options include
the ability to insert standard clauses and other stored text. Vendors must have master records created or be categorized as
‘one time’ vendors.
RFQ Type Default is ‘AN’ for standard RFQ
Language Default is ‘EN’ for English
RFQ Date Default is creation date
Quotation Deadline Must be prior to required delivery date specified
Purchasing Org Enter Purchasing Organization identifier
Purchasing group Enter Purchasing group (buyer) number
Saved RFQ Each RFQ per vendor will receive a separate document number.
Tips and Tricks
The collective number in the header screen of the RFQ is an important method to link the copies of the RFQ
issued to the different vendors. SAP treats each issuance to a different vendor as a separate RFQ
document and this collective number can be used to search as a matchcode and to provide comparison
reporting.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 10
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access Transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Material Management > Purchasing > RFQ/quotation > Request
for Quotation> Create
RFQ/Quotation > Request for Quotation > Create
(c) Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Foreign Trade/Customs > General
> RFQ/Quotation > Request for Quotation > Create

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 10
1.2. On screen “Create RFQ: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:
RFQ Type Default is ‘AN’ - standard RFQ R Enter RFQ type
Language Default is ‘EN’ - English R Language may be changed if other
languages are maintained in system
RFQ Date Default is creation date R May be changed if required The RFQ can be

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 10
created for future
issuance. Note that
SAP will release it
on that date without
notification.
Quotation
Deadline
The due date for vendor quotations R Enter the due date in the date format
assigned in the system
If the deadline is
stated as a date
after the required
delivery date, the
user will be given
an error message
when the delivery
date is entered.
RFQ Externally numbered RFQ numbers C If allowed, user can assign RFQ
number. Note: each vendor’s RFQ is
assigned a separate number.
Not recommended.
“Collective number”
of subsequent
screen is an
effective means to
capture and track
RFQ’s.
Purchasing
Org.
Purchasing Organization responsible
for RFQ
R Enter or select Purchasing Org. from
table
Purchasing
group
Buyer or Buying group Identifier R Enter or select Purchasing group
number from table
Item Category Key defining how the procurement of
a material or service item is
controlled.
R Enter Item Category or use matchcode
Delivery Date Date on which the goods are to be
delivered or the service is to be
performed.
O Enter delivery date
Plant Key for a production facility or branch
office within the company (that is,
company code).
O Enter Plant
Storage
Location
Number of the storage location
where the material is stored. A plant
may contain one or more storage
locations.
O Enter Storage Location
Material Group Key that you use to group together
several materials or services with the
same attributes, and to assign them
to a particular material group.
O Enter material group or use matchcode
Requisition
Tracking #
Number that facilitates monitoring of
the procurement process for required
materials or services. This number
can relate to an external "need note"
(notice of requirements) that was not
generated in the system.
O Enter requisition tracking #
Note: The ‘Default Data for Items’ fields will carry these values against all items on the RFQ. Although carried onto the Item screens,
these values may be changed within the transaction. Useful if the majority of the items have common data (delivery date, plant, etc.).
Enter the appropriate data if desired. (Optional)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 10
Enter.
1.3. On screen” Create RFQ: Header Data”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:
RFQ RFQ number R System will display saved document
number unless externally assigned
Grayed out
Company
code
Company code R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
Purchasing
group
Purchasing group R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
RFQ type RFQ type R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
Purch. Org Purchase organization R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
Vendor Vendor number C Will be displayed if vendor number was
added before this step.
Grayed out
RFQ date RFQ date R Supplied from initial screen Grayed out
Item interval Item interval R Supplied by system
Coll. No. Collective number O Enter a number to track vendors of the
same RFQ
Language Language R Supplied from initial screen
Sub-item
inter.
Item interval for sub items C Currently not used by SAP. For future
enhancments.
Qout. Dead. Quotation deadline R Supplied from initial screen
Validity start Validity start O Enter date quotation will start
Validity end Validity end O Enter date quotation will end.
Applic. By Application date O Enter closing date of Bids
Warranty Warranty O Enter warranty information
Bindg. Per. Binding period O Enter date period is binding
Target val Target Value O Enter total value of all materials that
can be released.
Your
reference
Your reference O Enter Vendors reference number/name
Salesperson Salesperson O Enter Salesperson name
Our
reference
Our reference O Enter your reference number/name
Telephone Telephone O Enter telephone #
1.4. On screen “Create RFQ: Item Overview”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 10
item within the RFQ
R Defaults - Line items are defined by the
system in increments of 10.
No User Action
I Item Category - determines if standard
purchase or other such as 3rd
party
order, etc.
R Enter or select from table. Default is
blank - standard purchase
Material Material Number R Enter material number or use
matchcode to select
All stock material
must have

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 10
material
numbers
Short Text Short Description of Material N/A Defaulted in from material master
RFQ Quantity Quantity of Material requested for
quotation
R Must be numeric
C Category of delivery date (indicates
whether the date format is day, week
or month)
R Select from the drop-down list
Delivery Date Date required if ordered R Must be in correct date format
Material Group Group of material which this material
belongs
N/A Defaulted in from material master
Plant Plant where material is required O Enter or select Plant from table.
Note: the material master must exist
for that plant.
Plant may be left
blank to signify a
company-wide
requirement
Sloc Storage Location where material will
be delivered and stored if ordered
O Enter or select Storage Location from
table
Strictly optional.
Storage Location
may be entered
later at the time
of P.O. creation
1.4.1. If additional details are required for the items, select these items and click on
the <Details> button with a puzzle piece symbol.
1.4.2. To proceed to the screen to specify the vendors invited to quote, click on the
<Vendor Address> button (or F7).
1.5. On screen ‘Create RFQ: Vendor Address’, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 10

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 10
Vendor Vendor number R Enter valid vendor number If vendor master
does not exist,
use a one-time
vendor number
(if allowed)
Title Possible titles are stored in a check
table. They are language dependent.
O Enter title or use matchcode
Name Vendor Name C Up to 4 lines available Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Search Term 1
& 2
This field contains only upper-case
letters. All entries are automatically
converted to upper-case letters.
There are two of these fields for
search terms.
O Enter search terms
Street &
House #
Street address and/or House # C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Postal Code &
City
Postal code and city / town / village C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Country Name of country C Table validated / selection Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Region In some countries, the region forms
part of the address. The meaning
depends on the country.
C Table validated / selection Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
PO Box Post Office Box Number C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Postal Code Zip Code / Postal Code C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Company
Postal Code
Postal code which is assigned
directly to a company. This field is
C Only required if
One-time

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 10
used in countries in which large
companies can have their own postal
code.
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Language Language C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Telephone Telephone # C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Fax Fax # C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
E-mail E-Mail address C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Standard
Comm. Type
Communication type with which you
can exchange documents and
messages with a business partner.
C Only required if
One-time
vendor.
Defaulted from
vendor master.
Dataline Extension (only for data conversion)
(e.g. data line)
O
Telebox Extension (only for data conversion)
(e.g. telebox)
O
Comments Address notes O
1.6. Save the RFQ. (Select yellow file folder or F11). This will refresh the Create RFQ: Vendor
Address screen to allow creation of the same RFQ data to a new vendor by following the
steps outlined in 1.4 above. The system will display the message RFQ Created under the
number ___________.
RFQ created under the number 6000000007
1.7. Return to Main Purchasing Menu. (Select Yellow up Pointing Arrow, Shift F3)
Refer to Business Process Procedure “Display a RFQ” - to verify this result.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME42_Change Request for Quotation
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
A RFQ document requires changing and/or a need arises to add new items.
Purchasing may wish to change or add items to an existing RFQ.
RFQ Enter RFQ number or use matchcodes “C” to search by creation date or “S” to
search by collective number.
The RFQ us updated to reflect any changes.
Tips and Tricks
 By consistently using the collective number field on RFQ’s, the search for the required RFQ number
is much simpler.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Material Management > Purchasing > RFQ/quotation > RFQ > Change
(b) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing > RFQ/Quote > Request
for Quotation > Change
(c) Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Foreign Trade/Customs > General Foreign Trade
Processing > Environment > Purchase – Import > Purchasing > RFQ/Quotation >
Request for Quotation > Change
1.2. On screen “Change RFQ: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:
RFQ RFQ number R Enter the RFQ number. Matchcode “C” -
creation date or “S”
- collective number
can be used to
easily locate the
correct RFQ.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
1.3. Press the Enter button.
1.4. On screen “Change RFQ: Item Overview”, enter or change information in the fields as
I Item Category - determines if standard
purchase or other such as 3rd
party
order, etc.
O Enter or select from table. Default is
blank - standard purchase
Adding new items
only
Material Material Number R Enter material number or use
matchcode to select
All stock material
must have material
numbers
Note: the material
number for an
existing item may
not be changed.
The item may be
deleted only (use

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Edit > Delete)
Short Text Short Description of Material O Defaulted in from material master May be added to or
changed for RFQ
RFQ Quantity Quantity of Material requested for
quotation
O Must be numeric
Order Unit Specifies the unit in which the
material is to be ordered.
R Enter order unit. Value may default
from the material master record.
Matchcode (F4)
functionality can be
used to find the
appropriate UoM.
Delivery Date Date required if ordered R Must be in correct date format Can use (F4) to
pull up a calendar
help box
Material Group Group of material which this material
belongs
N/A Defaulted in from material master
Plant Plant where material is required O Enter or select Plant from table.
Note: the material master must exist
for that plant.
New items only
Sloc Storage Location where material will
be delivered and stored if ordered
O Enter or select Storage Location from
table
New items only
1.3.1. If additional details are to be changed on existing items or are required for
new items, select these items and click on the Details icon (puzzle piece
symbol).
1.3.2. To enter or change additional data at the header level (for all items), click on
the Details icon (hat symbol).
Note: You must access the Header Details screen to enter the collective
number for your RFQ’s. This will provide important selection and
comparison opportunities when quotations are received and reporting is
required.
1.3.3. To proceed to the screen to change vendor details, click on the Vendor
Address button.
1.4. On screen “Change RFQ: Vendor Address”, change information in the fields as specified
in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
Name Vendor Name O Up to 4 lines available Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
Street Street address of vendor O Enter Street address Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
Postal Code Zip Code / Postal Code of vendor C Enter Zip Code / Postal Code Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
City City, town, village name of vendor O Enter city, town, village name Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
District District, county, etc. of vendor O Enter district, county, etc. Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
Country Country Code of vendor O Table validated / selection Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
Region State, Province, etc. of vendor C Table validated / selection Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
PO Box Post Office Box Number of vendor O Enter Post Office Box number Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
PO Box
PCode
Zip code for PO Box if different from
Street Address code
O Enter a zip code Only accessible if
One-time vendor.
1.5. Save the RFQ changes by clicking on the Save icon (Diskette Symbol) or pressing the F11
key. System returns to the “Change RFQ: Initial Screen” to allow selection of another RFQ
document. The system will display the message “RFQ ____________ changed”.
RFQ 6000000007 Changed
Note: If changes were made and attempt to exit the transaction without saving it, the
system will return a pop-up window asking for verification of whether the changes should
be saved prior to exiting. Click on the ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ button to proceed.
1.6. Return to Main Purchasing Menu by selecting the yellow up-pointing arrow, or use Shift-
F3.
NOTE: Changes can be viewed using the display transaction ME43 – see reference BPP
eme43a46c.doc

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME43_Display Request for Quotation
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
Need arises to display/view an existing request for quotation (RFQ).
This BPP will outline the process of displaying a RFQ which has already been created in R/3.
RFQ number RFQ number, typically this will be a system generated number based on the
number ranges set-up in the IMG.
A specified RFQ data is returned to the user. Display Only format.
Tips and Tricks
 Changes can not be made in this mode. If changes are required, transaction ME42 can be used.
See BPP eme42a46c.doc as a reference.
 Only one RFQ can be viewed at a time using this transaction, however, list display transactions
(ME4B, ME4L) can be used to view multiple RFQ documents.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access “Display RFQ: Initial Screen” by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Purchasing > RFQ/Quotation > RFQ > Display
(b) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing > RFQ/Quotation >
Request for Quotation > Display
(c) Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Foreign Trade/Customs > General Foreign Trade
Processing > Environment > Purchase – Import > Purchasing > RFQ/Quotation >
Request for Quotation > Display
1.2. On screen “Display RFQ: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:
RFQ RFQ number R Enter RFQ number (typically a non-
intelligent system generated number).
Matchcode (F4)
search functions
can be used to find
an appropriate
RFQ in the system.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
1.4. On the “Display RFQ: Item Overview” screen, the following data will be returned:
Field Name Description
Item category Key defining how the procurement of the material or service is handled.
Material Material master number
Short Text Description of the material or service to be procured
RFQ quantity The quantity of material required

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
OUn Order Unit
Delivery Date Date that the material will be due
Material Group Material group that the item most closely belongs to
Plant Plant number
Storage
Location
Storage location number
D Deletion indicator
1.5. More detailed information can be viewed by clicking on any one of the following toolbar
icons:
Button Name Information Returned
Header details (F6) Administrative field values and Reference data.
Vendor address (F7) Vendor name, address, search terms, communication data, etc.
Partners (Ctrl-Shift-F5) Partner Schema (if applicable)
Release strategy (Ctrl-Shift-F6) Release procedure information (if applicable)
Messages (Shift-F1) Printing information
Item details (F2) Line item specific data (select line on RFQ and click on icon)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
Example: Header Data needs to be displayed. Use the menu path Header → Details (or
simply click on the Hat icon). On the “Display RFQ: Header Data” the following data will be
returned:
RFQ RFQ number
RFQ Type Type of RFQ. Standard RFQ is ‘AN’
Company Code Company code

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
Purchasing Group Purchasing group code
Purchasing Organization Purchasing organization number
RFQ date Date of RFQ creation.
Language Language of the RFQ
Validity start Start of the period in which the RFQ may be submitted
Item interval The way the line items are numbered.
Sub-item inter. Sub Item interval
Validity end End of the period in which the RFQ may be submitted
Warranty Date defining the warranty period
Collective number Number used to collectively group RFQ’s
Quot. dead. Date by which the vendor is to submit the quotation
Applic. by Date by which the bidder is to express an interest in submitting a bid.
Bindg. per. Date for which the quotation is valid and binding
Your reference The internal reference number of the vendor
Our reference Reference number or code
Salesperson Name of vendor’s salesperson. Defaults from vendor master
Telephone Phone number for salesperson
1.6. To return to the main R/3 menu, click on the yellow Exit button or use <Shift + F3>.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME47_Maintain Quotation
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Vendor communicates price for material and as a result the RFQ (Request for Quotation) needs to
be updated.
In Purchasing, the RFQ and the quotation form a single document. Prices and conditions quoted by vendors are
entered in the original RFQ. If you have issued an RFQ to several vendors, you can have the system determine the
most favorable quotation submitted and automatically generates letters of rejection to the unsuccessful bidders. You
can also store the prices and terms of delivery from certain quotations in an info record for future accessing.
RFQs can be subject to a release procedure, see BPP eme45a46c.doc as a reference.
A quotation is legally binding on the vendor for a certain period. The quotation is the vendor’s response to a request.
for quotation issued by a purchasing organization. A quotation consists of items in which the total quantity and delivery date
of an offered material or service are specified.
RFQ Enter RFQ # for which a price or prices need to be entered.
Quotation entered Enter all relevant data received by vendor, price, date available, etc.
Tips and Tricks
 If you are simply entering a price against a RFQ, you can follow these easy steps:
1. Choose RFQ/quotation → Quotation → Maintain.
(The initial screen for maintaining quotations appears.)
2. Enter the number of the RFQ and press ENTER.
(The RFQ item overview screen appears.)
3. You can enter the vendor's price per item on the item detail screen (see steps 4 and 5) or
directly on the item overview screen.
4. Choose Item → Details to enter quotation data on the item detail screen.
5. Enter the vendor’s quotation.
6. Save your data.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Purchasing > RFQ/quotation >
Quotation > Maintain
> RFQ/Quotation > Quotation > Maintain
(c) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing >
RFQ/Quotation > Quotation > Maintain
1.2. On screen “Maintain Quotation: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified
in the table below:
RFQ RFQ Number R Enter RFQ Number for which price
entries are to be made.
Matchcode (F4)
search help can be
used to locate the
appropriate value.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
1.3. Press the Enter key, or click on the green Enter icon to proceed.
1.4. View the screen “Maintain Quotation: Header Data” by clicking on the Header data icon in
the toolbar.
1.5. Enter information in the fields as specified in the table below. Some fields will not be
available for input, as they are reference fields only.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Administrative
Fields:
Item interval Item interval R Supplied by system
Coll. No. Collective number O Enter a number to track vendors of
the same RFQ

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
Language Language R Supplied from initial screen
Sub-item inter. Item interval for sub items C Currently not used by SAP. For
future enhancements.
Qout. Dead. Quotation deadline R Supplied from initial screen
Validity start Validity start O Enter date quotation will start
Validity end Validity end O Enter date quotation will end.
Applic. By Application date O Enter closing date of Bids
Warranty Warranty O Enter warranty information
Bindg. Per. Binding period O Enter date period is binding
Terms of Payment
& Delivery:
Payment terms Key for defining payment
terms composed of cash
discount percentages and
payment periods.
O Enter appropriate value if necessary. Matchcode (F4) search
help can be used to
locate the appropriate
value.
Currency Currency key for amounts in
the system.
O Enter appropriate value if necessary Matchcode (F4) search
help can be used to
value.
Payment in / Days Number of days. In conjunction
with the baseline date for
payment, this number
represents a payment period
or period of qualification for
discount.
O Enter appropriate value if necessary
Exchange Rate Determines that the exchange
rate used for currency
translation purposes calculated
or entered in the purchasing
document is fixed.
O Enter appropriate value if necessary
Exchange Rate Fix Indicator: if you fix the
exchange rate, the PO
currency and exchange rate
cannot be changed during
Invoice Verification.
O Check to fix exchange rate if
appropriate.
Incoterms Commonly-used trading terms
that comply with the standards
established by the
International Chamber of
Commerce (ICC).
O Enter appropriate value if necessary. Matchcode (F4) search
help can be used to
value.
Target Value Total value of all materials to
be released against the
contract.
O Enter appropriate value if necessary. If the value entered is
exceeded, the user will
receive a system
message when creating a
contract release order.
Reference Data:
Quotation Date Date quotation submitted O Enter date if desired.
Quotation Number of vendor’s quotation O Enter number if desired.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
Your reference Your reference O Enter Vendors reference
number/name
Salesperson Salesperson O Enter Salesperson name
Our reference Our reference O Enter your reference number/name
Telephone Telephone O Enter telephone #
Hit (F5), or click on the “Overview”
icon (mountain symbol) on toolbar to
continue.
1.6. Once all necessary header data has been maintained, the user can then enter the price
information in one of two fashions:
1.6.1. Enter the price in the “Net Price” field on the “Maintain Quotation: Item Overview” screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
1.6.2. To enter more detailed information in addition to the net price, select the line item and click
on the Item Details icon. Click on the green Back arrow to return to the ‘Overview’ screen
once data has been maintained.
1.6.2.1 A vendor’s quoted price can be entered in one of two ways.
1.6.2.1.1. Enter the net price per unit in the Net price field. This price includes the vendor's normal
discounts and surcharges only. Cash discounts (for prompt payment) and taxes are calculated
separately.
1.6.2.1.2. Enter the gross price in the Net price field, and maintain the conditions for the item. Then the
system automatically replaces the entered gross price with the calculated net price. If the net
price for an item is entered for which pricing conditions have been maintained, the system
always replaces the price entered with the calculated net price.
1.6.2.2. If the quotation price is based on a different unit of measure than the one mormally used, enter the order
price unit next to the net price in the (OPU) field on the ‘item overview’ screen. On the item detail screen,
enter the factor for converting the order unit into the order price unit (if this has not already been defined in
the system).
Example:If the order price unit is "liter", but your order unit is "barrel", enter liter as the order price unit and
specify the conversion factor 4:1 (assuming that one barrel contains 4 liters).
1.6.2.3. Enter the code for any relevant taxes (for example, value-added tax - VAT) in the Tax code field. If a
purchase order is created by referencing an RFQ, this code facilitates the determination of the tax amount
when the invoice is entered in the system.
1.7. Once all quotation information has been successfully entered, save the data by clicking on
the Save button, or press the <Ctrl + S> keys. A message will be displayed that the data
has been saved.
Quotation for RFQ 6000000007 maintained

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME49_Compare,Select and Reject Quotations
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 11
Overview
Trigger:
Need arises to compare prices from all quotations received as a result of a competitive bidding
process.
This document outlines the procedure to compare the prices from all quotations received as a result of a competitive bidding
process using the price comparison list.
Purchase Organization Price comparison can be executed by entering one or more of the following data:
Quotation, Collective RFQ, Vendor or Material
Quotation The number associated with the quotation for which a comparison is desired.
Collective RFQ Key that links together quotes for a particular material, vendor, buyer, etc.
Price Comparison Price comparison report is returned to the user. Any error messages will also be
displayed, such as missing price information, etc.
Tips and Tricks
Each quotation should have pricing data for the same item. Only then is the correct interpretation of
the mean and total values possible. For example, if quotations 1 and 2 have pricing data for item 1,
but quotation 3 only has price information for item 2, then the system does not have enough
information to accurately compare the prices of all three quotations.
The comparison returned ranks vendors based on price only, from lowest to highest.
The comparison can be printed by following menu path: List  Print, or by typing Ctrl-P.
Quotations can be maintained directly from the comparison list, too. Clicking on the Maintain Quotes
button on the toolbar will call the ME47 transaction. See BPP eme47a46c.doc as a reference.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 11
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Materials Management > Purchasing > RFQ/Quotation >
Quotation > Price Comparison
> RFQ/Quotation > Quotation > Price Comparison
(c) Logistics > Production > KANBAN > Environment > Purchasing >
RFQ/Quotation > Quotation > Price Comparison
1.2. On screen “Price Comparison List”, enter information in the fields as specified in the table
below:
Purch Org. Organization unit that negotiates the
general conditions of purchase for
several plants or a single plant
R Enter Purchasing Org Matchcode
(F4) search
help can be

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 11
used to locate
the
appropriate
value.
Quotation Purchasing document number R Choose either quotation or collective RFQ
number in combination with Purchasing
Org
Matchcode
(F4) search
help can be
used to locate
the
appropriate
value.
Coll.RFQ Call for bid number or bid invitation
number
R Choose either quotation or collective RFQ
number in combination with Purchasing
Org
Matchcode
(F4) search
help can be
used to locate
the
appropriate
value.
Vendor Vendor Number O Enter vendor number if applicable Matchcode
(F4) search
help can be
used to locate
the
appropriate
value.
Material Material Number O Enter material # if applicable Matchcode
(F4) search
help can be
used to locate
the
appropriate
value.
Maximum # of
Quotations per
page
Shows the maximum amount of
quotations that are displayed next to
each other.
R Defaults to ‘12’, change if necessary.
1.2.1 Choose the comparison values to be used:
1.2.1.1 Reference quotation:
You can compare the quotations within the list with a sample quotation. The system
displays the percentage deviation between each quotation in the list and the sample
quotation.
1.2.1.2 Mean/minimum value quotation:
The price comparison list can also display a "fictitious" quotation reflecting the average or
minimum value of all quotations. Select either the "Mean value" or "Minimum value"
quotation field to choose the type of fictitious quotation.
1.2.1.3 Percentage basis:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 11
The price comparison list displays the percentage of each item in relation to the
maximum, minimum, or average price. To determine the display type, enter one of the
following:
+: The highest value for each item is the 100% value
-: The lowest value for each item is the 100% value
_: The mean value for each item is the 100% value
1.2.2 Select the desired price computations:
1.2.2.1 Select the appropriate field to determine which of the following should be included
in the determination of the comparison price:
– Cash discount
– Delivery costs
– Effective price
1.3. Once all entries have been made, click on the Execute button.
1.4. On screen “Price Comparison List in Currency $$$”, view the Price Comparison list.
1.5.To view any of the following information for a particular quote included in the comparison,
click on the RFQ number with the mouse to select it, then click on the appropriate
icon/button on the menu toolbar:
1.5.1. Maintain Quotation: Allows the user to modify quotation information if necessary.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 11
1.5.2. Display Material: Allows the user to view the purchasing data in the material
master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 11
1.5.3. Display Vendor: Allows the user to view the vendor master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 11
1.5.4. Additional Info: Allows the user to view payment terms, bid dates, currency
information for all the vendor quotations in the list.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 11
1.6. If any information has been modified through the comparison list, save the RFQ before
exiting. If changes have been made and the user attempts to exit without saving, the
system will return a message to verify action.
1.7. To exit the transaction, click on the green Back arrow, the yellow Exit arrow, or press the F3
button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME51N_Asset Purchase Requisition
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
1. Direct requirements from a project, cost center , sales order or work order
A requisition defines the need for a material or service. It is the primary instrument for identifying materials or services that must be
either procured outside the company or manufactured internally. It authorizes the Purchasing department to purchase materials in
specific quantities within a specified time frame. It is an internal document and is not used outside of the company.
Requisitions can be created for materials with or with out a material master. When creating the requisition with a material master,
The part number must be referenced, and a flag must be placed in the account assignment field. This will bring up a pop-up
window to assign the material to an account.
Requisitions do not need a material master. If processing a requisition for material that does not have a material master, the
account assignment must be flagged with the proper key to charge the item to a cost center, project, or an order.
Document Type Type of requisition (NB)
Delivery date date item is required
Plant Plant requiring material
Purchasing Group Buyer or group that will purchase material
Account assignment A flag that determines the account where financial transactions are charged.
Approved requisitions Authorization to Purchasing department to proceed with purchase
Tips and Tricks
• When you enter the item category, account assignment, delivery date, plant, storage location, Purchasing group, material
group on the initial overview screen, this information defaults to each item number on the item screen eliminating duplication of

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
typing effort. In the item screen, the requisition tracking number field will be used to indicate a requested put away bin. Entering
a requisitioner equal to the SAP network ID allows email notification upon receipt. If you specify an account assignment, do not
reference a storage location, because the item is being charged off and will not go into inventory.
• Set up the user defaults for each user to force the system to plug in default data, i.e. plant, purchasing organization.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) Logistics>Production>DRP>Execution>Purchase Requisition>Create
1.2. On screen “Create Purchase Requisition: Initial Screen”: enter information specified in
the table below:
Choose ‘Enter’.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Shopping Cart
Symbol-
Document type
Order type R System defaults in NB Purchase
Requisition. Use pull down to change
if necessary
Document
number
assigned
O Leave blank, system will fill in req
Number upon saving req entry
Source
Determination
If you set this indicator and just one
source of supply exists for an
entered material, the system will
suggest this source. If several
sources exist, you can select the
desired source from the existing
sources in the Item details section of
the Sources tab. The system does
not suggest any sources. In this
case, you can obtain a list of
possible sources via Edit -> Assign
source.
O Usually leave unchecked
Acct. assignment
category
for an asset type purchased
R * Enter A in Account Assignment
Category column.
Enter U for ‘unknown’, which now
becomes pending change to A once
asset number is assigned (preferred
method is pre-assignment of asset
number before req or PO)
This triggers all
required information
for this type of order
Item category Not generally used for assets, drop
down available
O Additional selections
enable requisition for
different things
Material Material number NA Not required for asset purchase
unless an item record is established
Short text Text to enter describing asset to be
purchased
R Free text entry
PO Quantity Required units / quantity R Enter quantity
purchased
R Enter unit of measure (drop down
available)
Delivery Date
Category
R Default
Delivery Date Date material is required R Enter delivery date requested- system
defaults to current date if not changed
characteristics
R Enter material group from drop down Usually 0020
(Equipment), or
possible 0080-IT
hardware or 9040-
MRO-Capital)
produced or sold.
R Enter plant (1010)
Storage Location Location where stock is stored O Enter storage location desired

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
Purchasing
Group
Enter buyer/group likely to handle
this requisition to order fulfillment
R Use drop down for list to select from
ordered
O User login identification
Req Tracking
Number
This number will be used by the
requestor to identify a suggested put
away bin.
O
Desired Vendor Requisitioner selects vendor source
for this requisition
O Use drop down and alpha lookup
feature to find vendor
If no vendor found,
leave blank and
describe vendor in
Req Header notes
Fixed Vendor Not used for Asset purchases,
applies to inventory materials
O
Supplying plant Not used for Asset purchases,
O
The supplying, or issuing, plant is only
entered in the case of stock transport
orders
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing org responsible for plant R Enter 1010
Agreement Purchasing functionality- will be
linked behind the scenes if
applicable
O Leave blank
Agreement item Line item on agreement O Leave blank
MPN Material Not used NA Grayed out, no entry possible
1.3. On screen “Create Purchase Requisition: Item Overview”: enter information specified in
the table below: enter Asset in the account Assignment tab

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
Tabs Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Item Overview Item Overview Expand Item Overview by clicking Scroll to the right
to see all tabs
indicated
Material Data O Enter Vendor material number
Quantities/dates Most information repeated from
previous line entry
O Usually no additional information
needed
Valuation Cost information for the item R Will prompt for entry if missed—enter
price of item
Account
Assignment
For asset tracking and costing R Will prompt for asset number entry
here if pre-assigned. Will not
prompt if U was selected for
account assignment on line entry
Source Of
Supply
Information on source of supply O Can enter Desired Vendor information
again here if missed at line entry
Status No information required
Contact Person Fills in requestor name identification,
and Purchasing Group name
C
Texts Understand that anything saying
‘text’ will transfer to print on a
purchase order unless changed by
Purchasing. Anything with ‘note’ is
internal info only
O Usually use ‘note type. Also can
provide in Header notes
Delivery Address Can select alternate ship-to address
O Recommend an internal note to alert
Purchasing
Spec 2000 Not used O Not applicable, do not use
Repeat above for each item in Purchase Requisition. Select Line as shown in screen print below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
1.4. Click on the save icon to produce a numbered requisition, or hit Control + S.
You will receive the message (bottom left of screen) similar to :

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME51N_Create Purchase Requisition
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
typing effort. In the item screen any of these fields can be changed using a requisition tracking number or entering a
requisitioner allows grouping for easy monitoring. If you specify an account assignment, do not reference a storage location,
because the item is being charged off and will not go into inventory.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Procedural Steps
1.2. On screen “Create Purchase Requisition”: enter information specified in the table below:
Fields Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Document Type Document Type R Purchase Requisition
Purchase
Requisition
Purchase Requisition O Purchase Requisition
Source
Determination
Source Determination O Source Determination

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Header
Header note Header note O Header note
Item Overview
item within a purchase requisition
R Defaults
I Denotes specific features of an item
(example - material is consignment)
O
A key specifying whether accounting
for an item is to be effected via an
auxiliary Account
O Choose either Project,(P), Order (F),
or Cost Center (K) to charge costs
Projects, orders
and cost centers
will have
assigned
numbers
Material Name or number that uniquely
identifies a material
R Enter name
Short Text Description of Material O Required for materials with no
material master
Qty requested Quantity to be ordered R Enter number of units required
UN Unit of measure in which the
requested material is to be ordered
R Defaults from material master
C Category of delivery date (indicates
whether the date format is day,
week or month)
R Select from the drop-down list
Delivery date Date on which the goods are to be
delivered. If delivery date is sooner
than the system calculated lead
time, a warning will be issued
R Enter date material is required date format may
vary by
configuration
PGr Purchasing Group R Defaults from material master
Matl Group Material Group O Enter material group
Plant Plant requiring material R Enter plant where material is to be
shipped to
Storage location Key for determining storage location
for a specific plant
O Do not enter a
location.
Requested by Requested by O Requested by
Req. Tracking
number
Req. Tracking number O Req. Tracking number
Desired Vendor Desired Vendor O Desired Vendor
SPlt Supplying Plant O
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing Organization O Purchasing Organization
Info Record Info Record Info Record
MPN Material MPN Material O MPN Material

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
1.3. On ‘Item Details’: enter information specified in the table below:
Choose ‘Enter’.
Fields Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Account
Assignment
Category
Account Assignment Category R Default
Distribution Distribution R Default
Company Code Company Code R Default
Unloading point Unloading point O
Recipient Recipient O
G/L Account G/L Account R Default
Controlling Area Controlling Area O
Cost center Cost center R
Order Order O
Network Network O
1.4.Click on the save folder to produce a numbered requisition, or hit Control + S.
System displays message saying that the Purchase Requisition number _________ created.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
Purchase requisition number 0010000081 created

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME51N_Service Purchase Requisition
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
typing effort. In the item screen, the requisition tracking number field will be used to indicate a requested put away bin. Entering
a requisitioner equal to the SAP network ID allows email notification upon receipt. If you specify an account assignment, do not
reference a storage location, because the item is being charged off and will not go into inventory.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Procedural Steps
1.2. On screen “Create Purchase Requisition: Initial Screen”: enter information specified in
the table below:
Shopping Cart
Symbol-
Document type
Order type R System defaults in NB Purchase
Requisition. Use pull down to change
if necessary
Document
number
assigned
O Leave blank, system will fill in req
Number upon saving req entry
Source
Determination
If you set this indicator and just one
source of supply exists for an
entered material, the system will
suggest this source. If several
sources exist, you can select the
desired source from the existing
sources in the Item details section of
the Sources tab. The system does
not suggest any sources. In this
O Usually leave unchecked

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
case, you can obtain a list of
possible sources via Edit -> Assign
source.
Acct. assignment
category
for an asset type purchased
R * Enter K in Account Assignment
Category column.
This triggers all
required information
for this type of order
Item category Drop down available, needs to be
entered for service orders
R * Enter D for service Additional selections
enable requisition for
different things
Material Material number NA Not required for service purchase
Short text Text to enter describing service to
be purchased
R Free text entry Describe overall
service to be
performed
PO Quantity Required units / quantity R Enter quantity Usually qty 1
purchased
R Enter unit of measure (drop down
available)- usually enter as AU (which
denotes ‘Activity Unit’
More info to follow
when Services screen
opens up after these
entries. See below
Delivery Date
Category
R Default
Delivery Date Date material is required R Enter delivery date requested- system
defaults to current date if not changed
characteristics
R Enter material group from drop down Usually 0070 (Service)
produced or sold.
R Enter plant (1010)
Storage Location Location where stock is stored O Enter storage location desired
Purchasing
Group
Enter buyer/group likely to handle
this requisition to order fulfillment
R Use drop down for list to select from
ordered
O User login identification
Req Tracking
Number
This number will be used by the
requestor to identify a suggested put
away bin.
O
Desired Vendor Requisitioner selects vendor source
O Use drop down and alpha lookup
feature to find vendor
If no vendor found,
leave blank and
describe vendor in
Req Header notes
Fixed Vendor Not used for Service purchases,
O
Supplying plant Not used for Asset purchases,
O
The supplying, or issuing, plant is only
entered in the case of stock transport
orders

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing org responsible for plant R Enter 1010
Agreement Purchasing functionality- will be
linked behind the scenes if
applicable
O Leave blank
Agreement item Line item on agreement O Leave blank
MPN Material Not used NA Grayed out, no entry possible
Once this information is entered, hit the [Enter] key to enable further processing requirements
from the system.
1.3. On screen “Create Purchase Requisition: Item Overview”: enter information specified in
the table below: (The Services tab will be the first to open)
Tabs Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Item Overview Item Overview Expand Item Overview by clicking Scroll to the right
to see all tabs
indicated
Services For input of the steps or
components that are part the overall
service to be performed
R For entry as short text, quantity,
un/meas, and price per line. When
done with entries, hit Enter and all line
components of service calculate into
See example
completed screen
shot below

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
the net value for the original service
entered on main entry screen.
After service component entry, a
pop up box appears to enter your
Account Assignment for Service for
each line component
R Enter your G/L account to charge, and
cost center. You have the option to
press the ‘Repeat AA’ icon if multiple
lines if you are using the same
account for each line.
Populate each box
for each line as it
appears
Limits Enter any limits you want to impose
for this service
O Open Limits tab, enter an Overall
Limit (‘not to exceed’) dollar value. Hit
Enter to have the Accounts
Assignment popup again for G/L and
cost center entry
Material Data O Enter Vendor material number if
applicable
Quantities/dates Most information repeated from
previous line entry
O Usually no additional information
needed
Valuation Cost information for the item R * Will be auto-calculated based on
Services tab information entered
above.
Account
Assignment
R * Already enabled at Services tab
Source Of
Supply
Information on source of supply O Can enter Desired Vendor information
again here if missed at line entry
Status No information required
Contact Person Fills in requestor name identification,
and Purchasing Group name
C
Texts Understand that anything saying
‘text’ will transfer to print on a
purchase order unless changed by
Purchasing. Anything with ‘note’ is
internal info only
O Usually use ‘note type. Also can
provide in Header notes
Delivery Address Can select alternate ship-to address
O Recommend an internal note to alert
Purchasing
Spec 2000 Not used O Not applicable, do not use
Repeat above for each item in Purchase Requisition.
1.4. Click on the save icon to produce a numbered requisition, or hit Control + S.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME52N_Change Purchase Requisition
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
A purchase requisition needs to be changed. Changes in quantity and/or required date are the primary
triggers for this transaction.
Prior to changing or deleting a requisition, the requisitioner needs to know the status of the requisition. If the requisition has
been processed into a purchase order, any changes will not be reflected on the purchase order. The requisitioner needs
to contact the buyer directly. If someone else has deleted the requisition, a new requisition will have to be created, as it is not
possible to change a deleted requisition.
Purchase requisition number Can be found using Display function or List display function
Item Details Identifies what can be changed or deleted
Requisition changed or deleted
Tips and Tricks
If a requisition has been deleted, you can still use that requisition and create a new one using the
canceled requisition as a reference.
To save the document, you can click on the save folder, or hit the F11 key.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics>Production>DRP>Execution>Purchase Requisition>Change
1.2. On screen “Display Purchase Requisition: Initial Screen” Initially no Purchase Requisition
will be displayed, click on ‘Other document’ , a pop up to select a document will be
displayed, enter information in the fields as specified in the table below:
Purchase
Requisition
Requisition Number R Enter a unique requisition number that
requires change
Requisition can be
found using the
Display or List
Display function.
The field is at the
top of the screen
display, next to the
shopping cart.
Purch.Requisit
ion
Purchase Requisition R Select Purchase Requisition radio
button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
1.3. Click on the Enter button. Then click on ‘Display/Change’ icon
1.3.1. On screen “Change Purchase Requisition: Requisition number” screen, to delete requisition
or item:
1.3.1.1. Click on the line of the item to be deleted
1.3.1.2. Click on the Delete (trash can) icon, or use menu path Edit>Delete
1.3.1.3. Select “Yes” on the pop up box to delete the item
1.3.1.4. The item is now flagged for deletion (see the column labeled “D”; there will be a
checkmark).
1.3.2. On screen “Change Purchase Requisition: Requisition number” screen”, to change
quantity, price, date required, text etc., and enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
Item Number Item number R Selects the item number that needs to
be changed
“Details”
button
Item Details R Expands the item details to display
what can be changed and status of
requisition
Not all information
can be changed
Val. Price Price change O Change price if required
Date Date Change O Change date if required
Quantity Quantity Change O Change quantity if required
Text Text change O Change or add text if required
1.4. Click on Save button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME53N_Display Purchase Requisition
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
User needs to view information regarding purchase requisitions, including item information and status of
requisitions.
User may not have the authority to change, so they can only look in display mode.
This BPP demonstrates a function that allows you to view/monitor the status of individual purchase requisitions.
Requisition number Can be found using Display function or List display function
View status of Requisition
Tips and Tricks
There are two methods for Displaying requisitions - Display and List Display.
List display is a more comprehensive method of displaying requisitions, and is addressed in BPP
“eme5ac46c.doc”.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics > Production > DRP > Execution > Purchase Requisition > Display
1.2. On screen “Display Purchase Requisition: Initial Screen” Initially no Purchase Requisition
will be displayed, click on ‘Other document’ , a pop up to select a document will be
displayed, enter information in the fields as specified in the table below:
Purchase
Requisition
Requisition Number R Enter a unique requisition number that
requires change
Requisition can be
found using the
Display or List
Display function.
The field is at the
top of the screen
display, next to the
shopping cart.
Purch.Requisit
ion
Purchase Requisition R Select Purchase Requisition radio
button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
1.3. On screen “Display Purchase Requisition: Requisition number” Screen; select the item(s)
by clicking on the box to the left of the item, and choose a display mode from the following
toolbar icons:
Menu Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Details Item Details O Displays every detail from the item
overview screen such as material, qty,
material master data, plant etc.
Text Overview Text Overview O Displays any text fields in the
Purchaser requisition
Delivery
address
Delivery address for items O Displays the address to which the
purchase requisition is to be delivered
once it becomes a purchase order
Release Purchase requisition approval O Displays strategy for purchase

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
strategy approval
General
Statistics
Item statistics O Displays statistics on status of PR and
also the changes made to the
requisition
Account
Assignments
Account assignments for items O Displays the G/L account to which the
items are charged
Components Item components C This is only possible for subcontracting
items
Services Service items C This is only possible in the case of
service items
Value Limits C This is only possible in the case of
service items
Configuration CTO (configured-to-order) items O Indicates whether or not the item
contains configured material
1.4. To exit, click on the Exit button or depress the <Shift + F3> keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME56_Assign Source to Purchase
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
Purchase requisitions require sources of supply assigned to each item
Once purchase requisitions have been released to the buyer for further processing, the next step in the procurement cycle is to
determine a vendor source for the required material or service and to allocate the requisition to the source. Sources are maintained
in the system via Outline agreements, Schedule agreements, Source lists and Purchasing information records. The two components
of this procedure are Assign and Process. Requisitions are allocated to a source of supply or selected for RFQ if no source exists.
When sources are assigned to purchase requisitions the second step is to generate Purchase orders, Delivery schedules or RFQ’s.
Scope of list Distinguishes the different types of requisitions
Source of supply assigned to each item If no source available item should be flagged for RFQ
Tips and Tricks
As in all display screens, it should be noted that the more criteria that is entered on the initial screen, the
fewer entries that will need to be reviewed in the display screen.
Example: Should the user choose by Purchasing group without the plant number, the system will display
all Purchase requisitions for all plants, rather than for one plant only.
There are four functional menu paths that lead to transaction code ME56:
1. MM (this example will be used in this BPP): Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing 
Requisition  Follow-on functions  Assign
2. Foreign Trade/SD: Logistics  Sales and Distribution Foreign Trade/Customs  General Foreign
Trade Processing  Environment  Purchase - Import  Purchasing  Requisition  Follow-on
functions  Assign
3. Foreign Trade/MM: Logistics  Materials Management  Foreign Trade/Customs  General
Foreign Trade Processing  Environment  Purchase - Import  Purchasing  Requisition 
Follow-on functions  Assign
4. Production: Logistics  Production  KANBAN  Environment  Purchasing  Requisition 
Follow-on functions  Assign

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Requisition>Follow-on
Functions>Assign
1.2. On screen “Assign Source of Supply to Requisitions: Selection Screen”, enter information
in the fields as specified in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Purchase
requisition
Requisition number O Enter numbers if known
Purchase group Purchasing group code O Use to narrow search if necessary
Material group Material group code O Choose from pull-down menu
Requirement
tracking number
Number that facilitates the
monitoring of the procurement of
required materials or services.
This number can relate to a

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
requisition note (or requirement
notice/slip) that was not generated
in the system.
Scope of list Determines format of search report R You may choose from list of drop-
down
items
“F” (Collective
Release)
is the standard default
Plant Plant to which delivery is to be
made
O To narrow search, select plant from
drop down menu
Document type Type of purchasing document O Use to narrow search if necessary
Item category Type of Requisition O Use to narrow search if necessary
Account
assignment
category
Account where costs are allocated O Use to narrow search if necessary
Delivery date Date that the items are scheduled
to be delivered
Release date Date that the ordering should be
processed based on parameters
set in material master.
Materials
planner/controller
Number of the MRP controller who
is responsible for this material
O To narrow search, select MRP
controller from drop down menu
Processing status Key specifying the current
processing
status of the requisition
O To narrow search, select plant from
drop down menu
Fixed vendor Vendor number O Use to narrow search if necessary
Requisitioner Note on the requisition identifying
who the material is being
purchased for.
Short text Short description of the material O May use to narrow search parameters
for consumable material.
Sort indicator Specifies the way the list of
requisitions is sorted
R You may choose from list of drop-
down
items
“1” is the default for
requisitions
Cost center Organizational unit within a
controlling area that represents a
defined location of cost incurrence.
WBS element Individual structural element in a
work breakdown structure (WBS)
representing the hierarchical
organization of an R/3 project.
Describes either a concrete task or
a partial one that can be further
subdivided.
Order General term in APO for receipt
elements.
Asset This is the number which, together
with the asset sub-number,
identifies a fixed asset in Asset
Accounting.
Asset sub-number This is the number which, together
with the main asset number,
uniquely identifies a fixed asset in
Asset Accounting.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
Network Key identifying the network used
for account assignment.
Operation number (in project systems) Number that
identifies an activity.
Sales order The number that uniquely
identifies the sales, delivery, or
billing document.
Sales order item The number that uniquely
identifies the item in the sales
document.
1.4. On screen “Assign Source of Supply to Purchase Requisitions” (results screen), enter
Assign
Automatically
Assign Supply Source key R (if
assign
manually
is not
chosen)
Select item (place a checkmark next to
it) and use assign supply source key
and supply source will default from
source lists. Information records or
existing contracts
Assignment Overview of display O Review the assignments
Assign
manually
Assign the source of supply manually
vs. automatically
R (if
assign
automati
cally is
not
chosen)
Select item (place a checkmark next to
it) and hit Assign manually key, to bring
up pop-up window. Fixed Vendor and
Purchasing Org. are required fields
within this pop-up window.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
1.5. Save the transaction by clicking on the Save button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME61_Maintain Vendor Evaluation
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
The need to review a vendor’s performance triggers this transaction.
The manner in which the system calculates the Vendor Score is depend on the configuration for vendor
evaluation in the IMG.
Review of a vendor’s performance is used in making future purchasing decisions from that vendor. The evaluation allows for a
means of tracking a vendor’s performance over a time period. Scores can be maintained for a variety of criteria such as price,
quality, delivery and service for each purchasing organization. Each of these criteria can contain sub criteria.
Input – Required Fields Comments
Purchasing Organization Relevant purchasing organization number
Vendor Number Vendor number of vendor to be evaluated
Weighting Key Enter weighting key (Weighting can be equal or unequal)
Overall vendor evaluation score.
Tips and Tricks
In order to perform a complete evaluation for the vendor all manual scores must be gathered before
entering them in to the system and performing the vendor evaluation.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Master Data  Vendor
Evaluation  Maintain
(b) Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Foreign Trade/Customs → General
Foreign Trade Processing → Environment → Purchase – Import → Purchasing
→ Master Data → Vendor Evaluation Maintain
(c) Logistics → Production → KANBAN → Environment → Purchasing → Master
Data → Vendor Evaluation  Maintain
1.2. On screen “Maintain Vendor Evaluation: Initial Screen”, enter the information below:
Purch.
Organization
Purchasing Organization number R Enter the appropriate purchasing
organization code.
Vendor Vendor Number R Enter vendor number of vendor to be
evaluated
Press “ENTER”
( Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=Required; O=Optional; C=Conditional )
1.3. On screen “Maintain Vendor Evaluation: Overview of Main Criteria” screen enter the
information below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Purch.
Organization
Purchasing Organization number Display Defaults from initial screen.
Vendor Vendor Number Display Defaults from initial screen.
Weighting Key Indicator that determines the
weighting of the main criteria.
R Choose from drop down menu.
System comes with two keys: Equal
Weighting and Unequal Weighting.
Additional keys can be added via
configuration in the IMG
Overall Score Overall vendor score based on the
individual scores and weighting
factors assigned to the scores.
C Will be blank until evaluation has been
run at least once.
Deletion
Indicator
Indicator to determine whether the
evaluation should be deleted.
O
Created by Name of person who created the
object
C Will be blank until evaluation has been
run at least once.
Created on Date the object was created C Will be blank until evaluation has been
run once.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Evaluation
Criteria
Main criteria used in determining the
overall score.
O Valid criteria will automatically be listed A list of criteria is
maintained for
each purchasing
org in
configuration
Score Score for criterion O If it is grayed out, the score is
automatically calculated by the system.
If you need to manually enter a score,
enter it for the main criteria or highlight
the criterion and hit the “Details” button
to view and maintain any relevant
subcriteria
Press <<ENTER>>
• View Sub criteria: click on the box in the left-hand column next to the evaluation criteria
and click on the “Display” button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
• Weighting for the criteria and sub criteria is assigned in Configuration. It can also be
configured such that it is manually maintained. In the event that you are maintaining
manual scoring sub-criteria, maintain them and click on the “Auto new eval./Mcrit”
button twice. The automatic scores will be calculated and the appropriate weighting
percentages will be applied.
• Click on the “Back” icon to return to the main criteria score.
• Scores for each main criterion and the OVERALL SCORE will be displayed.
• Click on the “Save” icon (yellow folder) to save the evaluation.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
1.4. PRINTING OF EVALUATION
From screen “Maintain Vendor Evaluation: Initial Screen” enter the following:
Purch.
Organization
Purchasing Organization R Enter the appropriate purchasing
organization code.
Vendor Vendor Number R Enter vendor number
From the menu path follow Vendor Evaluation ∏ Print evaln. Sheet (or Shift-F1)
Enter the following:
Purch.
Organization
Purchasing Organization C Will default from initial screen but can be
changed
Vendor Vendor Number C Will default from initial screen but can be
changed
Form (layout
set)
Layout set to use in printing the
document
R Defaults to MELDRUCK.
NO USER ACTION REQUIRED.
Printer Printer Identifier R Enter code for applicable printer from the
drop-down menu.
Number of
copies
Number of copies to print R Defaults to one (1), change if applicable
Print
immediately
Print immediately indicator O Check box if you want the vendor
evaluation to print immediately.
Otherwise the output is held in the spool.
• Click on the “Execute” icon
• On the screen that appears, click on the “Print” button to print the evaluation. You will
be returned to the “Maintain Vendor Evaluation: Overview of Main Criteria” screen.
• Click on the “Cancel” icon to exit the vendor evaluation.
1.5. To exit from this area, press the “Exit” button (or Shift + F3).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME80_ Purchasing Reporting
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Trigger:
Need to view purchasing documents.
This process demonstrates a function that allows you to view purchasing documents.
At least one field must be filled-in, but the
more information you provide will result in a
more efficient search.
View purchasing documents
Tips and Tricks
At least one main selection criterion should be entered on the first screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Purchase Order →
Reporting  Purchasing Information System → Environment → Reporting →
General Analyses
(b) Logistics  Materials Management Purchasing  Outline Agreement →
Reporting  Purchasing Information System → Environment → Reporting →
General Analyses
(c) Logistics  Production  KANBAN  Environment  Purchasing 
Outline Agreement → Reporting  Purchasing Information System →
Environment → Reporting → General Analyses
(d) Logistics → Logistics Controlling → Purchasing Information System →
Environment → Reporting → General Analyses
(e) Information Systems → Logistics → Purchasing → Purchasing Documents
→ Reporting → General Analyses

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
1.2. On screen “Purchasing Documents”; enter information in table below:
Material Material number O Use to narrow search if necessary
Material Group Material group number O Choose from pull-down menu
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing organization number O Choose from pull-down menu
Purchase Orders Check indicator to view this type of
document
O One indicator must be selected
Contracts Check indicator to view this type of
document

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Sched. Agmts. Check indicator to view this type of
document
RFQs Check indicator to view this type of
document
Doc. date from Date on which the document was
created.
R Date defaults into this field
Doc. date to Date on which the document was
created.
R Date defaults into this field
W/o material Indicator specifying that only those item
contain no material number are to be
selected.
O Select if searching for non-stock
materials.
Press the “Enter”
Note: On this screen, you may use the features that accompany the following keys: “Choose”, “List
Begins With”, and/or “Display Variant”. These keys will facilitate repetitive searches.
1.3. Please view the “Purchasing Documents” screen:
• As you can see, this screen allows you to view: the purchasing document number, item number,
quantity, unit of measure, net value, currency, plant, and purchasing group.
• Next, you may view the actual purchasing document by clicking on the purchasing document number
and pressing the “Choose” button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.4 To exit from this area, press the Yellow “Exit” button or Shift + F3.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME80AN_ General Analysis
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
To analyze the RFQ’s created for vendors.
All the RFQ’s can be monitored and reviewed .
None
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Quotation  Request for Quotation  Reporting  General Analyses
Via Transaction Code ME80AN
1.2. On the screen “General Evaluations”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:
Selection
Criteria
Max. No. of Hits Number of records to be displayed O .
Material Number Material Number O Via matchcode search
Purchasing
Document
Purchasing document number Via matchcode search
Vendor Vendor Number O Select from drop down menu
Materials Group Materials Group O Use to narrow search if necessary
Plant Plant O Via matchcode search

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
Storage Location Storage Location O Via matchcode search
Document Date Document Date O Via matchcode search
Document Type Document Type O Via matchcode search Narrow the search
parameters by
number
Document
Category
Document Category O Via matchcode search
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing Group O Via matchcode search
Purchasing
Organization
1.4. Review the “Purchasing Documents” screen:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME80FN_ General Analysis
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
To analyze the Purchase Orders created for vendors.
All the Purchase Orders can be monitored and reviewed.
None
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus SAP Menu  Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Purchase
Order  Reporting  General Analyses
Via Transaction Code ME80FN
the table below:
Selection
Criteria
Purchasing
Document

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Document Date Document Date Via matchcode search
parameters by
number
Document
Category
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing
Organization
Document on
hold
Document on hold O Via matchcode search
Supplying Plant Supplying Plant O Via matchcode search

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME80RN_Monitor Contracts
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
To analyze the Contracts / Scheduling Agreements created for vendors.
All the Contracts / Scheduling Agreements can be monitored and reviewed.
None
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Via Menus SAP Menu  Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Outline
Agreement  Reporting  General Analyses
Via Transaction Code ME80RN
the table below:
Selection
Criteria
Purchasing
Document

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
Document Date Document Date Via matchcode search
parameters by
number
Document
Category
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing
Organization
Document on
hold
Document on hold O Via matchcode search
Supplying Plant Supplying Plant O Via matchcode search

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ME81N_Analysis of Purchase Order Values
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
To analyze the Purchase Order values for each PO.
All the Purchase Order values can be monitored and reviewed.
Currency Enter the company code currency
Purchasing Org (Optional) Enter the relevant purchasing organization
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus SAP Menu  Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Purchase
Order  Reporting  Analysis of Order Values
1.2. On the screen “Analysis of Purchase Order Values”, enter information in the fields

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Selection
Criteria
Currency for
Analysis
Vendor known or via matchcode
search if the
Narrow the search
parameters by
number.
Currency Currency R Via matchcode search
Frequency
Analysis by
order value
Via matchcode search
Net value 1 Net Order Value in PO Currency O Via matchcode search
Net value 2 Net Order Value in PO Currency O Via matchcode search
Net value 3 Net Order Value in PO Currency O
Net value 4 Net Order Value in PO Currency O
Analysis
w.Comparision
Periods
Period 1 Purchasing Document Date O Via matchcode search
Period 2 Purchasing Document Date O Via matchcode search
Program
Selections
Document Date Document Date O Via matchcode search
Document Type Document Type R Via matchcode search
Purchasing
Document
Purchasing Document O Via matchcode search
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing
Organization
Vendor Vendor Number O Via matchcode search
Account
Assignment
Category
Account Assignment Category Via matchcode search
Materials Group Materials Group O Via matchcode search
Item Category Item Category O Via matchcode search
1.4. Review the “Analysis of Purchase Order Values” screen:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI01_Create Physical Inventory Document
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
A physical inventory document must be created.
Most companies carry out a physical inventory periodically. When a company does not have many material management items, it is
better to manually create single inventory documents. From these documents, a company can physically count material to enter into
the system.
Document Date Current date will default.
Planned Count Date Current system date will default, change if necessary.
Plant Key that identifies the plant for which the inventory document is being created.
Storage Location Key that identifies the Sloc for which the inventory document is being created.
Physical inventory document is manually
created in the system.
Tips and Tricks
 Once an item is added to the “Create Physical Inventory Document: New Items” the item is
no longer visible on the screen. To view all the entries, follow menu path: GoTo  Overview,
or use (F5). The New Items icon (Blank Sheet of paper symbol) on the menu toolbar will take
you back to the “Create Physical Inventory Document: New Items” screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedure Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Material Management > Physical Inventory > Phys. Inventory
doc. > Create
(b) Logistics > Logistics Execution > Internal Whse Processes > Physical
Inventory > In Inventory Management > Physical Inventory Document >
Create > Manually
Via Transaction Code MI01
1.2. On screen Create Physical Inventory Document: Initial Screen, enter information in
the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Document
Date
Date of the document R Defaults to Today’s date
Planned count
Date
Date that the physical inventory is
planned to take place
R Defaults to Today’s date
Plant Plant number R Enter or select Plant from the pull-
down file access.
Storage
location
Storage location R Enter or select a storage location from
the pull-down file access.
Special stock Special stock indicator O Used if special stock is to be handled
differently.
Posting block Blocks goods movements for the
specified materials during the
physical inventory
O Toggle on if desired.
Freeze book
inventory
Specifies that the book inventory
balances of those items in the
physical inventory document that
have not yet been counted are
frozen.
O Toggle on if desired.
Batches with
del flag
Indicates if batches of materials that
have been flagged for deletion are to
be included in the inventory count
O
Phys. Inv. No Used to group various documents so
that they can be managed more
effectively
O
Phys.
Inventory ref
Number of an external document
relating to physical inventory.
O Enter unique reference number if
desired.
You can use this
reference number
to select the
document for
printing later.
Grouping Type Documents can be created so that all
items have one common
characteristic
O Choose Material group or Storage Bin
for example
1.3. Press “Enter” or select the “New Items” button to proceed.
1.4. On screen ”Create Physical Inventory Document: New Items”, enter information in

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Material Material number R Enter material number or select by
using matchcodes.
System will return a
message if the
material is not
maintained for the
plant/Sloc.
Material
description
non-editable description that is
obtained from the material master
record
View
is assigned.
O Enter if applicable.
Sty Stock Type R Use the pull-down selection to fill in the
stock type (ex. Unrestricted-use)
Matchcode (F4)
search help is
available.
Aun Alternate unit of entry O Enter an alternate counting unit if
necessary.
Matchcode (F4)
search help is
available
BD Indicator for the automatic
determination of batches.
O
Del Item is deleted View

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.5. Once all the appropriate entries have been made, SAVE the document by using the Post
icon (Yellow file folder symbol) on menu toolbar. The system will return a message
“Physical Inventory Document ############# created”.
NOTE: This system will verify whether you would like to post the document if you
try to exit without saving.
1.6. Use the green back arrow (F3), or the yellow up arrow (Shift-F3) to return to the main R/3
Easy Access Menu.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI02_Change Physical Inventory Document
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Most companies carry out a physical inventory periodically. When a company wants to change the status of material and to restrict
the inventory transactions before the execution of physical inventory process, it is better to manually change single inventory
documents for setting posting block and freeze book inventory.
Physical Inventory Document Enter the PI document number for which the changes are required.
Fiscal year Enter the fiscal year.
Physical inventory document is manually
changed in the system.
Tips and Tricks
 Once the PI documents are created and items are planned for count, then those items need
to be blocked for the inventory transactions.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedure Steps
doc. > Change
Change > Manually
1.2. On screen Change Physical Inventory Document: Initial Screen, enter information
in the fields as specified in the below table and choose enter.
Phys.
Inventory Doc
Physical inventory document number R 100000000
Fiscal Year Fiscal year R 2011

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
1.3 On screen “Change Physical Inventory Document: Collect Processing”, choose
Header button
1.4 On screen “Change Physical Inventory Document: Header”, enter information in
the fields as specified in the below table and choose enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
down file access.
Storage
location
differently.
Date and Status
Planned count
Date
Count Date Date on which actual count carried
out
O Greyed out and will be defaulted from
PI count.
Posting Date Date on which actual posting carried
out
O Greyed out
Document
Date
Other fields

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
physical inventory
O Toggle on. Toggle on.
Freeze book
inventory
frozen.
O Toggle on. Toggle on.
Trans / Event
type
Trans / Event type O Defaulted to IB (Physical Inventory
Document)
effectively
O
Phys.
Inventory ref
desired.
You can use this
reference number
to select the
document for
printing later.
characteristic
for example
Press “Enter” or select the “New Items” button to proceed.
1.5. Once all the appropriate entries have been made, SAVE the document by using the Post
icon (Yellow file folder symbol) on menu toolbar. The system will return a message
“Physical Inventory Document ############# changed”.
Easy Access Menu.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI03_Display Physical Inventory Document
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
3
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Most companies carry out a physical inventory periodically. When a company wants to verify the details of physical inventory
document, it is possible to view the details.
Physical Inventory Document Enter the PI document number for which the changes are required.
Fiscal year Enter the fiscal year.
Physical inventory document is displayed in
the system.
Tips and Tricks
 Once the PI documents are created and items are planned for count, then the PI documents
needs to be verified for the status.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
3
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedure Steps
doc. > Display
Display
1.2. On screen “Display Physical Inventory Document: Initial Screen”, enter
information in the fields as specified in the below table and choose enter.
Phys.
Inventory Doc
Physical inventory document number R 100000000
Fiscal Year Fiscal year R 2011

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
3
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
1.3 On screen “Display Physical Inventory Document: Collect Processing”, choose
Header button
1.4 On screen “Display Physical Inventory Document: Header”, enter information in
the fields as specified in the below table and choose enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
3
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Fields data can be viewed.
down file access.
Storage
location
differently.
Date and Status
Planned count
Date
Count Date Date on which actual count carried
out
O Greyed out and will be defaulted from
PI count.
Posting Date Date on which actual posting carried
out
O Greyed out
Document
Date
Other fields

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
3
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
physical inventory
O Toggle on.
Freeze book
inventory
frozen.
O Toggle on.
Trans / Event
type
Trans / Event type O Defaulted to IB (Physical Inventory
Document)
effectively
O
Phys.
Inventory ref
desired.
You can use this
reference number
to select the
document for
printing later.
characteristic
for example
Press “Enter” or select the “New Items” button to proceed.
Easy Access Menu.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI04_Enter Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Need to record the physical inventory count for an item contained in a physical inventory
document arises.
This procedure outlines the steps involved in entering the physical inventory count with reference to a physical inventory document
Phys. Inventory doc Physical inventory document number
Count date Date on which the last physical inventory count took place
Updated physical inventory document
Tips and Tricks
 Once all items listed on a particular document have counts entered, the physical inventory
document is no longer accessible through the MI04 transaction. If count changes are
required, then the inventory document should be accessed through MI05. (See BPP
_MI05_Change Count).
 If the system will not allow you to enter a count against a particular inventory document, it
may be because the inventory document has already had a count entered. You can view the
status of an inventory document by going to the display transaction (see BPP_MI03_Display
Physical Inventory Document) and selecting the Statistics button from the Overview screen.
A pop-up box will display any count, recount, and difference clearing activities that have
taken place against the document.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI04_Enter Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access “Enter Inventory Count” transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Material Management > Physical Inventory > Inventory count >
Enter
Inventory > In Inventory Management > Count Results > Enter > Manually
1.2. On screen “ Enter Inventory Count: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields
Phys.
Inventory doc.
The number that uniquely identifies
the physical inventory document.
R Enter the physical inventory document. Matchcode (F4)
search help
available to locate
value.
Fiscal year Defines the period for which the
company is to create its inventory
and balance sheet.
O This date is picked up from the count
date. (See next field.)
Count date Date that the physical inventory
count is taken
R Current system date will default,
overwrite if necessary.
Variance in % Percentage variance that must be
met in order for the system to
generate an error message.
O Enter a variance tolerance percentage
if desired.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI04_Enter Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
1.3. Press “Enter” or the “Green Check Mark” to continue.
1.4. On screen “ Enter Inventory Count: Collect. Processing”, enter information in the
Plant Plant where inventory count took
place
C Display only.
Stor. Loc. Storage location of inventory C Display only.
Material Material number C Display only.
Material
description
Material description C Display only.
STy Stock type C Display only.
Quantity Stock quantity. R Enter the physical inventory count.
UnE Unit of measure. O Enter the unit of measure in which the
count was taken.
Matchcode (F4)
search help
available to locate
value.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI04_Enter Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
ZC Zero count. O If the inventory is zero, check this box.
1.5. Once all the appropriate count entries have been made, SAVE the document by using the
Post icon (Yellow file folder symbol) on menu toolbar. The system will return a message
“Count Entered for Physical Inventory Document #############”.
Easy Access Menu.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI05_Change Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Need to change the record of the physical inventory count for an item contained in a physical
inventory document arises.
This procedure outlines the steps involved in changing the physical inventory count with reference to a physical inventory document
Tips and Tricks
 Once any items listed on a particular document have counts changed, the physical inventory
document is accessible through the MI05 transaction. If count changes are required to be
verified, then the inventory document should be accessed through MI06. (See BPP
_MI06_Display Count).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI05_Change Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Change
Inventory > In Inventory Management > Count Results > Change
1.2. On screen “Change Inventory Count: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields
Phys.
Inventory doc.
search help
available to locate
value.
and balance sheet.
Variance in % Percentage variance that must be
met in order for the system to
generate an error message.
O Enter a variance tolerance percentage
if desired.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI05_Change Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
1.4. On screen “Change Inventory Count: Collect. Processing”, enter information in
place
C Display only.
Material
description

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI05_Change Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
count was taken.
Matchcode (F4)
search help
available to locate
value.
1.5. Once all the appropriate count entries have been made, SAVE the document by using the
Post icon (Yellow file folder symbol) on menu toolbar. The system will return a message
“Count Changed for Physical Inventory Document #############”.
Easy Access Menu.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI06_Display Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Need to verify the record of the physical inventory count for an item contained in a physical
inventory document arises.
This procedure outlines the steps involved in displaying the physical inventory count with reference to a physical inventory
document
Tips and Tricks
 Once any items listed on a particular document have counts to be verified, the physical
inventory document is accessible through the MI06 transaction. If count changes are
required, then the inventory document should be accessed through MI05. (See BPP
_MI05_Change Count).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI06_Display Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Display
Inventory > In Inventory Management > Count Results > Display
1.2. On screen “Display Inventory Count: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields
Phys.
Inventory doc.
search help
available to locate
value.
and balance sheet.
1.4. On screen “Display Inventory Count: Collect. Processing”, enter information in the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI06_Display Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
place
C Display only.
Material
description
count was taken.
Matchcode (F4)
search help
available to locate
value.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI06_Display Count
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
Easy Access Menu.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI11_Recount
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
A physical inventory recount must be taken if one suspects that an error was made during
counting. When one initiates a recount a new physical inventory document is created.
It may be necessary to do a recount for a material or a group of materials. SAP will create a new
Physical Inventory Count document in this case. The original document number is entered and the User
selects the stocks that are to be recounted. When posted, a new count document is created.
Physical inventory document Number of original inventory document that contains the material that needs to be
recounted.
Planned count date Date that the physical inventory is planned to take place.
Document Date Date of the document at creation.
New Physical Inventory Document Verify that” Physical inventory Document ########## Created” appears in the
status bar.
Tips and Tricks
In order to execute a recount, the count for the original inventory document number must have
been entered but NOT posted.
Note: After the new physical Inventory document is created, access “Enter inventory count” by
transaction code: MI04 (See BBP emi04e46c.doc as a reference) and enter the new inventory
count.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI11_Recount
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedure Steps
Via Menus Logistics > Material Management > Physical Inventory > Phys. Inventory doc. >
Recount
1.2. On screen “Enter Recount: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
Phys.
Inventory doc
Number of original inventory
document that contains the materials
that need to be recounted.
R Enter document number. Matchcode (F4)
search help
available.
Fiscal year Year that inventory is created. O Enter fiscal year only if different from
original document.
Planned count
Date
R Current system date will default.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI11_Recount
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Document
Date
Date of the document R Enter date of original document. The document date
is entered in order
to include the issue
date of the original
document.
physical inventory
O Toggle on if desired. Select this indicator
to restrict material
movement updates
until physical
inventory document
is posted.
Freeze book
inventory
physical inventory document that are
to be recounted are frozen.
O Toggle on if desired. Select this indicator
to allow material
movement updates
during physical
inventory. The
system compares
the counted stock
with the frozen
book inventory
balance to
determine any
inventory
differences at the
time of document
creation.
Phys.
Inventory ref
desired.
You can use this
reference number
to select the
document for
printing later.
Threshold
value
Threshold value for inventory
differences.
O Enter a value if you want to recount
only items with greater inventory
differences.
Maximum inventory
amount in the local
currency that will
be automatically
selected. Others
that should be
posted will need to
be manually
selected.
1.4. On screen “Enter Recount: Selection List”, select the items that need to be
counted by placing a check in the box proceeding each material line item.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI11_Recount
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
1.5. Once all necessary items have been selected, click on the Save button. A message
will be displayed stating “Physical Inventory Document XXXXXXXXXXXX was
created”.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI20_List Count Differences
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
User wishes to print the list of differences for inventoried items.
A physical inventory has been performed. There are discrepancies between the actual and book inventories. The user wishes to
print the list of differences.
Plant Plant number
Physical Inventory Document Key that uniquely identifies a physical inventory document.
Print list of differences.
Tips & Tricks
NOTE: This setting can be overridden if the need arises.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Material Management > Physical Inventory > Difference >
Difference List
(b) Information Systems > General Report Selection > Materials Management >
Physical Inventory > Print List of Inventory Differences
1.2. On screen, “List of Inventory Differences”, enter information in the fields as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Material Material number O Enter material number(s) to narrow
search criteria. Conduct match-code
search if document number is
unknown.
Plant Plant number O Enter plant(s) to narrow search criteria.
Conduct match-code search if
document number is unknown.
Storage
Location
Storage Location number O Enter storage location number
is assigned.
O Enter if applicable
Physical
inventory
document
Physical inventory document
number.
O Enter physical inv doc(s) to narrow
unknown.
Physical
inventory
number
Number or description that is
used to group various physical
inventory documents so that
they can be managed more
effectively.
Status
selection for
Phys.
inventory
documents
Check box to improve search results. O Enter to restrict list.
Status
selection for
Phys.
inventory
items
Special Stock Indicator specifying the special
stock type
O Enter to restrict list. Choose from
drop-down menu.
Fiscal Year Fiscal year in which the physical
inventory document is posted.
O Enter to restrict list.
Count Date Date on which the last physical
inventory took place
Planned count
date
Date on which the physical inventory
is planned to take place
Phys. Inv. Ref. Reference number for physical
inventory
Reason for
inv. difference
Specifies the reason for the
physical inventory differences
Threshold
value
Maximum difference amount, in local
currency, up to which the inventory
differences are posted in the
background.
Display variant Predefined display setting. O Chooses variant if necessary. Matchcode (F4)
search help
available.
Single list Manner in which the printout will
appear.
O This is the default setting.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
Group by plant
and storage
locations
Manner in which the printout will
appear.
O
Group by
phys. inv. doc.
appear.
O
NOTE: None of the above fields are “required”, but at least one entry must be made in
order to narrow the search. Use the material number (or range of material numbers)
and/or the number of a physical inventory document number if known.
1.4. On the “List of Inventory Differences” screen, multiple actions can be performed
including printing, posting differences, editing counts, entering new counts,
sorting physical inventory documents. These can all be accomplished by
selecting the check boxes for the desired inventory documents and clicking on the
appropriate toolbar button/icon.
1.5. To print the list, use menu path: List  Print. Enter the appropriate output device
and click on the Continue Button. A spool request will be sent to the printer.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI21_Print Physical Inventory Documents
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Need arises to print the Physical Inventory Document(s) for distribution.
The Physical Inventory Documents are used as “turn-around” documents. The physical inventory quantities are written on the
documents and then they are used to key in the data into the SAP system.
Physical Inventory document or Unique physical inventory document assigned by the system.
Plant or Key that uniquely identifies a plant where materials are inventoried
Planned count date Date of the physical inventory count
Fiscal year Fiscal year of the count
Physical Inventory document Document to record inventory balances
Tips and Tricks
In order to print, the output devices must have been defined in the system. If the documents are
always printing to the same device set the default output device (SU3) to be that printer. Every
time a job is spooled, it will automatically be directed to that device.
NOTE: This default can be overridden if the need arises.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics > Material Management > Physical Inventory > Phys. Inventory doc. >
Print
1.2. On screen “Print Physical Inventory Document”, enter information in the fields as
Physical
inventory
document
Unique physical inventory document
assigned by the system
R Enter a “From and To” document
number
Fiscal year Fiscal year of the inventory count O Enter a “From and To” year number

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Plant Plant Identifier R Enter a “From and To” plant number
Storage
Location
Storage location R Enter a “From and To” storage location
number
Planned count
date
Date of the physical inventory count O Enter a “From and To” count date
Physical
Inventory No.
Physical inventory number O Enter a “From and To” inventory
number
Physical
Inventory Ref.
External physical inventory document
number
O Enter a “From and To” external
document number
Material Group Key that you use to group together
several materials with the same
attributes, and to assign them to a
particular material group.
O Enter a “From and To” Material group
Storage bin Identifies the storage bin within a
storage location where the material is
stored.
O Enter a “From and To” Storage Bin
Physical
inventory
document
Select this to choose physical
inventory documents according
to physical inventory status
O Toggle on if applicable If the check is
activated, after
clicking execute
you will receive a
pop-up window in
which you can
choose the desired
physical inventory
statuses (for
example not yet
counted, partially
counted or
completely counted
Physical
inventory item
Select this to choose physical
inventory documents according
to physical inventory status
O Toggle on if applicable If the check is
activated, after
clicking execute
you will receive a
pop-up window in
which you can
choose the desired
physical inventory
statuses (for
example not yet
counted, partially
counted or
completely counted
or deleted
Sort by special
stock
Select this field to sort by special
stock
O Toggle on if applicable
Output device Output device to be used to print
the document
R Name of the output device.
New spool
request
Print parameters, new spool
request
O ‘X’ = Generate a new spool request
‘ ‘ = Find and add to an existing spool
request (if any)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
Break down
val-only mats
Indicator that can be used to
influence the output of the count
list for value-only materials.
O Toggle on if applicable
1.3. Click on the Execute button. This will print the documents.
NOTE: If there is no default printer set in the user master record, the system will return a
pop-up box in which to identify the output device that the inventory document(s)
should be spooled to. Enter the appropriate device (matchcode search help is
available) and click on the Print button to proceed. A “Print Preview” is also
available from the pop-up.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI24_Physical Inventory List
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
User wishes to print the list of physical inventory documents.
A physical inventory has been planned. The user wishes to print the physical inventory documents.
Plant Plant number
Physical Inventory Document Key that uniquely identifies a physical inventory document.
Print Physical Inventory List
Tips & Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus (a) Logistics > Material Management > Physical Inventory > Environment 
Physical Inventory List
1.2. On screen, “Physical Inventory List”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Material Material number O Enter material number(s) to narrow
unknown.
Plant Plant number O Enter plant(s) to narrow search criteria.
Conduct match-code search if
document number is unknown.
Storage
Location
Storage Location number O Enter storage location number
is assigned.
Physical
inventory
document
Physical inventory document
number.
O Enter physical inv doc(s) to narrow
unknown.
Physical
inventory
number
Number or description that is
used to group various physical
inventory documents so that
they can be managed more
effectively.
Status
selection for
Phys.
inventory
documents
Status
selection for
Phys.
inventory
items
Special Stock Indicator specifying the special
stock type
O Enter to restrict list. Choose from
drop-down menu.
Fiscal Year Fiscal year in which the physical
inventory document is posted.
Count Date Date on which the last physical
inventory took place
Planned count
date
Date on which the physical inventory
is planned to take place
Phys. Inv. Ref. Reference number for physical
inventory
Reason for
inv. difference
Specifies the reason for the
physical inventory differences
Threshold
value
Maximum difference amount, in local
currency, up to which the inventory
differences are posted in the
background.
Layout
(Display
variant)
Predefined display setting. O Chooses variant if necessary. Matchcode (F4)
search help
available.
Single list Manner in which the printout will
appear.
O This is the default setting.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
Group by plant
and storage
locations
appear.
O
Group by
phys. inv. doc.
appear.
O
ALV Tree
Display
To display the report in ALV O
1.4. On the “Physical Inventory List” screen, multiple actions can be performed
including posting differences, editing counts, entering new counts, sorting
physical inventory documents. These can all be accomplished by selecting the
check boxes for the desired inventory documents and clicking on the appropriate
toolbar button/icon.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MI31_Create Physical Inventory Documents
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger:
If an employee wants to create physical inventory documents for many materials, he/she can create
a session with required data and process the session automatically.
If you want to carry out a transaction for many objects (for example, create physical inventory documents for many
materials), the SAP System can automatically execute it according to your specifications. This process consists of
two parts:
1. You create a session for the objects in question.
2. The session is "processed". The session is "processed," meaning the system carries out the transaction for every
object
Material Enter single values, ranges or multiple selection for materials, plant or storage
locations.
Plant
Storage Location
Planned count date Enter the date on which the physical inventory is to be carried out.
The system proposes the planned date from table T159B. If no date has
been maintained there, the system default is the current day's date.
Stock types - Continuous inventory Select stock types (unrestricted, quality and blocked) you plan to count -
default can be maintained in configuration.
Batch input session - Select indicator to generate batch and/or log - defaults can be set up in
configuration. Enter a name to be used by the system for accessing the batch
input file, or use system default BI name, and determine the maximum number of
materials to include on each document.
Physical inventory document are created generates a batch input session which, when processed via the function
SystemServicesBatch input physical inventory documents for material which
fulfill the criteria specified on the selection screen.
Batch input session is generated A batch-input session is generated which you can process via the menu options
System  Services  Batch input Sessions.
Tips and Tricks
(Shortcuts and methods for accelerating the transaction.)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Physical inventory number - create you own user numbers or description to group various physical
inventory documents so that they can be identified and managed more effectively.
For testing purposes, the batch-input session should only be processed with the option Display errors
only selected.
Procedural Steps
Via Menus a) LogisticsMaterial ManagementPhysical InventorySessionsCreate
Physical Inventory DocsW/o special stock
1.2. On screen “Selected Data for Phys. Inventory Docmts W/o Special Stock”, enter

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comment
s
Database Selections
Material Alphanumeric key uniquely
identifying the material.
O Enter single value selections, range of
values or multiple selections.
Plant Key uniquely identifying a plant R Choose from drop down menu
Storage Location Number of the storage location
where the material is stored
Material Type Key that assigns the material O Choose from drop down menu

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8
to a group of materials such as
raw materials, operating
supplies, or trading goods
Material Group Key used to group together
several materials with the
same attributes, and to assign
them to a particular material
group.
Storage bin description Identifies the storage bin within
a storage location where the
material is stored.
O Enter a value in this field to narrow the
selection
Material marked for deletion Indicator: Flag material for
deletion at plant level
O If you set this indicator, materials with
delete flags are also take into account.
Control
Select data and issue log If you set this indicator, then
the program will be started in
test mode. In this mode, the
system does not make any
changes to the database or to
the archive but all checks are
carried out.
O Select or Deselect
Generate batch input Indicates that a batch input
session is generated
O NOTE: Do not set this indicator if you
first want to obtain a control list(log) of
the data to be processed
Create dcmts directly This will generate documents
directly
Hold Processed Indicate that the sessions
created by the report are not
deleted after they are
processed
O Set the indicator if you do not want the
session deleted
Issue Log Specifies that a log is issue
onscreen after processing
O Check this field to obtain a log
Max. no. items/doc Specify a maximum number of
materials the system creates
physical inventory documents
for these materials only
O Enter maximum number desired
No.matls to be included Specify the number of
materials to be included
O Enter quantity of materials to be
included
Selection acc. to stock
balance
Used to narrow selection O Click on button to access choices
Threshold value for stock Maximum stock level (in base
unit of measure) up to which
materials are selected.
O Enter here a maximum stock level if you
wish to carry out physical inventory only
for materials up to a specific stock level.
SP threshold value for VO
mat.
Maximum stock at sales
values at which value-only
materials are selected.
O Enter a maximum sales value if you
only want to carry out a physical
inventory for value-only materials up to
a certain sales value of the
stock.
Enter a minimum sales value and set
the indicator with which the system

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
excludes materials from the selection if
you only want to carry out a physical
inventory for value-only materials above
a certain sales value of the stock.
Only Material with zero stock Indicator used for selection of
materials with zero stock
balance.
O Set this indicator if you wish to carry out
the physical inventory only for stocks
with zero stock balance.
Exclude from selection Materials with a stock level (in
base unit of measure) below
the
threshold value entered is not
included in the selection.
O Set this indicator, and enter a minimum
stock level in the threshold
value field if physical inventory is only to
be carried out for materials above a
particular stock level.
Do not set this indicator and enter a
maximum stock level in the
threshold value field if physical
inventory is only to be carried out for
materials up to a particular stock level.
Only Material w/o zero stock Indicates that the system only
selects materials whose stock
level in base unit of measure or
at sales price in the relevant
stock type is not zero.
O Set this indicator if physical inventory is
to be carried out only for materials
without zero stock balance.
Exclude from selection Materials with a stock level (in
base unit of measure) below
the threshold value entered
are not included in the
selection.
O Set this indicator, and enter a minimum
stock level in the threshold
value field if physical inventory is only to
be carried out for materials above a
particular stock level.
Do not set this indicator and enter a
maximum stock level in the
threshold value field if physical
inventory is only to be carried out for
materials up to a particular stock level.
Only Material with negative
stock
Indicator, which specifies that
only materials are, selected
whose stock level (in base unit
of measure or at sales prices)
is negative.
O Set this indicator if physical inventory is
to be carried out only for
materials with negative stock balances.
Stock types
Unrestricted-use Indicates that the unrestricted-
use stock is affected by the
transaction physical inventory.
O Set indicator to include inventoried
materials
In quality inspection Indicates that the stock in
quality inspection is affected
by the physical inventory).
O Set indicator to include inventoried
materials
Blocked Indicator specifying that the
blocked stock is affected by the
transaction/event physical
inventory.
O
Value only materials Indicates that the valuated O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
stock of a value-only material
is affected by the transaction
physical inventory.
Data in phy. Inv. document
Header
Planned count date Date on which a physical
inventory is planned to take
place
R The system proposes the planned date
from table T159B.
If no date has been maintained there,
the system default is the current
day's date.
Physical Inventory number Number or description that is
used to group various phy. inv.
doc so that they can be
managed more effectively.
O User can choose their own number to
track phy inv documents.
Physical inventory
Reference
Reference number for physical
inventory
O Number of an external document
relating to a physical inventory
transaction/event.
Set Posting Block Indicator specifying that for the
duration of a physical inventory
no goods movements can be
posted.
O Check indicator to block goods
movements.
Freeze book inventory By setting the indicator, the
frozen book inventory balance
is recorded in the physical
inventory doc
O Change setting in customizing system
for each storage location of the plant if
freezing of book inventory balances is
allowed.
It is relevant
to calculating
inventory
differences
Sorting Click on button to view options
Plant-SLoc-material Default O Select or Deselect
Plant-Stor. bin description-
material
Indicates that the materials
chosen in the physical
inventory documents are
sorted according to their
storage bin description
O Select of Deselect
Stor bin>Docmt header Indicates that the grouping
criterion is flagged in the
header of the physical
inventory document
O Check if wanted
Plnt-matl group-StorLoc.-
Material
Indicate that the materials
chosen in the physical
inventory document are sorted
according to their material
group
Matl group>Docmt header Indicates that the grouping
criterion is flagged in the
header of the physical
inventory document
O Check if wanted
New document created
when group changed
Indicates that a new physical
inventory document is created
when the storage location
description or material group is
changed
O Check if wanted
Display options
Display variant Determines the list format O Enter variant

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C” ; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
1.3. To create session press "Execute".
1.3.1 Review Statistics
1.3.2 Generate Session
1.3.3 Create documents

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
Additional notes:
In physical inventory, you can work with sessions for the following functions:
• Creating a physical inventory document
• Blocking a material
• Entering the count*
• Freezing the book inventory balance
• Setting zero count automatically
• Posting differences
• Posting the count/differences*
• Posting document/the count/differences*
Functions marked with an asterisk* cannot be carried out with the R/3 System alone, as the
system does not know the count results. These functions are used for adopting physical
inventory data into the R/3 System if you carried out the count with a different system.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_ Stock Location Transfer
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger: Need to move materials from one storage location to another.
Goods can be transferred from one storage location to another, within the same plant.
Posting Date (MM/DD/YY)
Movement Type
Plant
Storage location
Material
Quantity
UnE
Date that the document is posted.
Movement type to be used.
The plant of manufacture.
Location from which material will be transferred from
Material to be transferred.
Quantity of material to be transferred
Unit of measure for material to be transferred.
The output is a material document.
No accounting document will be
generated.
No accounting impact
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps:
Via Menus LogisticsMaterials ManagementInventory ManagementGoods
MovementGoods Movement (MIGO)
Via Transaction Code MIGO
1.2. Choose the appropriate selection criteria:
Selection
Criteria
Transaction
box
Indicates the desired
transaction.
R One-step transfer:
Choose “A08 Transfer Posting”
Two-step transfer:
To initiate the storage location
transfer, choose:
To receive the storage location
transfer, choose:
One-step is
generally used
when both storage
locations share the
same warehouse
Reference
transaction box
Indicates the document type
referenced when you enter the
transaction
R
Select “R10 Others”
Movement
Type
Movement type
R Enter the desired movement type
and press ENTER.
One-step transfer:
311 – for transferring
unrestricted-use stock
325 – for transferring blocked
stock
Two-step transfer:
313 – Remove from storage
location
315 – Receive into storage
location

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Posting Date
Date on which the goods is
issued
O Enter the date on which the
goods is transferred.
1.3. If you would like to enter multiple lines together, then, click to collapse the Detail
section, the screen will be changed to the following:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
1.4. Enter part number/material number in the “Mat.Short Text” column.
Field Name Description R/O/
C
User Action and
Values
Comments
Material /
Mat. Short
Text
Part number of
material being issued
R Enter material
number
Quantity Quantity being issued R Enter the desired
quantity
Plant Plant code R
Stor. Loc. Identifies the storage
location that the part
will be issued from
R
SLoc.
Transfer
Pstg
Storage location which
the part will be
received into
R

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
C
User Action and
Values
Comments
Batch The batch number of
the material being
transfered
C
Batch Trfr
Pstg
The batch number of
the material being
transfered
C Batch Trfr Pstg will auto fill once
the batch has been entered.
Text Contains an
explanatory text on the
line item.
O
1.5. If you have issue multiple batches for the same line item, select the line item and click
to split it into multiple batches.
1.5.1. If the following screen appears, check the box “skip this in future” and click to proceed.
1.6. On the “Distribute Quantity” window as shown below, enter the Quantity and the
corresponding batch.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
1.7. Then, click to proceed. The system will then split the items into multiple lines to
allow multiple batches.
1.8. Verify and update the information accordingly and click for the item(s).
1.9. Click the Save icon to save
Note: SAP will navigate to LT06 for completing the warehouse portion of the transfer.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_ Cancel Previous Goods Movements
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Cancel previous internal goods movement that is not related to Distribution.
Cancelation of internal goods movement is performed in the event a user needs to correct information on
a previously received material.
Material document
Output – Results Comments
Previous goods movement canceled.
Tips and Tricks:
This transaction can only be performed as long as the previous month accounting window has not been closed of the
original Goods Receipt.
The user is required to cancel the full quantity of the original goods receipt quantity.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access the transaction by:
1.2. Select the appropriate selection criteria for Transaction box, Reference transaction box
and enter the original material document number from the Goods Receipt.
Fields Description User Action and Values Comments
Transaction box
transaction.
Select “A03 Cancellation”
If you make changes to the
Transaction box, the system
will default the previous
value the next time the user
logs onto this transaction.
Reference
transaction box
Indicates the document
type referenced when you
enter the transaction
The system defaults it to “R02
Material document”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Document
Number
Material document number
Enter the material document
number. If you are
immediately reversing a
receipt, the document number
will default.
You may find the material
document of the previous
goods receipt from the
purchase order “Purchase
order history” tab. You may
also use MB51 to find the
number
Click or press ENTER to continue. The system displays the content of the material document.
Check the “Item OK” checkbox for item for which you wish to reverse the goods movement.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
Upon completion of data entry, click icon to save the entry and post the cancellation of goods
movement.
Once completed, the user will see a new document number.
** Include information on materials which are just IM **
1.3. If material is Warehouse managed the system will then take the user to the screen for
creating a transfer order. Even if the material was not put away, complete LT06.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_ Goods Issue to Order
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
Goods issue to order may be performed to withdraw the stock that is specific to a particular process order
maintenance order and/or internal order.
Document Date (MM/DD/YY)
Movement Type
Plant
Storage location
Order
Material
Quantity
UnE
Date that the document is entered.
Location from which material will be issued.
Manufacturing order goods issue will reference.
Material to be issued to the manufacturing order.
Quantity of material to be issued.
Unit of measure for material to be issued.
The output is a material document which can
contain accounting, order, and other financial
postings.
Each time an inventory movement is posted a Material document is created by
the system. If the movement has a financial impact an Accounting document is
also created.
Tips and Tricks
Procedural Steps

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
1.1 Access Transaction by:
1.2 On ’ Goods Issue Order – User’: Screen, enter the information given in the table below:
Transaction box
transaction.
Select “A07 Goods Issue”
value.
Reference
transaction box
Select “R08 Order”
Enter the Order number in the
field on the right.
Movement Type Movement type Use ‘261’
At the top right of the
screen.
Posting Date
Date on which the goods
is issued
Enter the date on which the
goods is issued

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
1.3 If you would like to enter multiple lines together, then, click to collapse the Detail

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
1.4 Enter part number/material number in the “Mat.Short Text” column.
Fields Description User Action and Values
Material / Mat.
Short Text
Part number of material being issued Default from the order.
Quantity Quantity being issued Default from the order.
Plant Plant code Default from the order.
Stor. Loc. Identifies the storage location that the
part will be issued from
Default from the order, change if necessary.
Text Contains an explanatory text on the
line item.
(Optional) Enter if necessary.
1.5 Verify and update the information accordingly and click for the item(s).
Click the Save icon to save
1.6 Unplanned Goods Issue
1.6.1 For unplanned goods issue (i.e. to issue additional material / quantity which has not been
specified in the order), perform the following via transaction MIGO:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.6.2 Enter the material, quantity, order number, plant, storage location, batch (if applicable)
manually as shown below:
Note: Enter the material number in the “Mat. Short Text” field.
1.6.3 On completion of the data entry, press ENTER, the system will retrieve the material
description, unit of measure accordingly from the material master.
1.6.4 Click to save.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_ Goods Issue to Scrap
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Goods issue for scrapping may be performed to dispose the stock.
Movement Type
Plant
Storage location
Material
Quantity
UnE
Location from which material will be issued.
Material to be issued to the manufacturing order.
Quantity of material to be issued.
Unit of measure for material to be issued.
The output is a material document
which can contain accounting, cost
center, and other financial postings.
Each time an inventory movement is posted a Material document is
created by the system. If the movement has a financial impact an
Accounting document is also created.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
1.2 ‘On Goods Issue Other – User’ Screen : enter the information in the table given below

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Transaction box
transaction.
Select “A07 Goods Issue”
value.
Reference
transaction box
Movement Type Movement type
551 – Scrap from unrestricted-
use stock
555 – Scrap from blocked
stock
screen.
Posting Date
is issued
goods is issued

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
1.3 If you would like to enter multiple lines together, then, click to collapse the Detail
C
User Action and
Values
Comments
Material /
Mat. Short
Text
Part number of
R Enter material
number
quantity
Plant Plant code R
will be issued from
R
Cost center Departmental specific
number for application
of cost
R Enter the cost center
number
Batch C

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
C
User Action and
Values
Comments
Text Contains an
line item.
O
1.5 If you have issue multiple batches for the same line item, select the line item and click
to split it into multiple batches.
If the following screen appears, check the box “skip this in future” and click to proceed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
1.6 On the “Distribute Quantity” window as shown below, enter the Quantity and the
1.7 Then, click to proceed. The system will then split the items into multiple lines to

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
Click the Save icon to save.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_ Stock Type Transfer
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Transfer unrestricted-use stock to block stock, transfer block stock to unrestricted-use stock
The output is a material document. No
Accounting document will be generated
Tips and Tricks:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
1.2 On ‘Transfer Posting Other - User’ Screen: enter the information in the table given below
Transaction box
transaction.
Select “A08 Transfer Posting”
Reference
transaction box
Enter the desired movement
type
344 – Transfer Unrestricted-
use to Blocked stock
343 – Transfer Blocked
stock to Unrestricted-use
stock
screen.
Posting Date
is issued
stock type is changed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
If you would like to enter multiple lines together, then, click to collapse the Detail

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Fields Description User Action and Values
Material / Mat.
Short Text
Material number of item being
transferred
Enter material number
Quantity Quantity being transferred Enter the desired quantity
Plant Plant code BP01
Stor. Loc. Identifies the storage location where
the item resides.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
1.4 If you have multiple batches for the same line item, select the line item and click to
split it into multiple batches.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
1.5 On the “Distribute Quantity” window as shown below, enter the Quantity and the
Then, click to proceed. The system will then split the items into multiple lines to allow
multiple batches.
1.7 Click the Save icon to save

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_Display Material Document
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Trigger:
A material document needs to be displayed.
Usually, this transaction will occur when the user desires to view the material document and/or the accounting document to verify
that the proper accounts are credited/debited when goods are received or issued.
Material Document If the number is known, enter it. If not, conduct a match-code search for it.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics → Material Management → Inventory Management → Goods
Movement → → Goods Movement (MIGO)
1.2. On screen “Display Material Document”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Transaction Transaction for the material
movement
R Choose Display from drop down list
Ref
Document
Document reference relevant to the
transaction
R Choose Material Document from drop
down list
Material
Document
identifies the material document.
R If unknown, conduct a match-code
search
Material Calendar year of the material O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Document
Year
document
1.3. On screen “Display Material Document #####:” view, verify the data and Choose FI
Documents button.
1.4 On screen “Documents in Accounting”, view, Choose Accounting document and enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
1.5 On screen “Display Document: Data Entry View”, view, verify the account postings.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_GR / GO – Post Goods Receipt for Production/Process Order
Inventory Management – Goods Receipt
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 9
Overview
Trigger:
Deliveries from vendors resulting from purchase orders. This transaction is very specific to PO-related goods
receipts. This transaction looks almost exactly like the GR for a Purchase Order in the MIGO transaction
instructions above.
Delivery Note
*Vendor Batch
The purchase order associated with the movement
The Vendor’s Control Number (Invoice #, Sales Order #, or Packing List #)
Required on Inventory purchase orders only
The output is a material document, which can
financial postings.
Tips and Tricks
A Production/Process order has been created and has been maintained in the system. When a receipt is
entered in SAP, it must reference a Production/Process order to verify the 3 way match process (i.e.
Production/Process departments, warehouse, and accounting or A/P). The vendor typically provides a
packing slip for the material and/or a bill of lading for the carrier, which will contain information relating to
who the vendor is, the material, the Production/Process order number the material was ordered under
and quantity delivered.
If the Production/Process number is not printed on the bill of lading, the receiver will need to execute
transaction MB0A, Goods Receipt Production/Process Order Unknown. The menu path for this is
Logistics → Material Management → Production/Process → Master Data → Subsequent Settlement →

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 9
Vendor Rebate Arrangements → Environment → Condition/Arrangement → Environment → Pricing →
Environment → Value Assignment → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt →
For Production/Process order → Production/Process number unknown. On the Goods Receipt -
Production/Process Order Unknown: Initial Screen, be sure to fill in the Bill of Lading number and
the carrier in the Header Text field. The movement type is defaulted in. The receiver will need to enter
the vendor and/or material in the Find POs section and press enter key or green checkmark in the upper
left hand corner of the screen. The system will provide a list of all open Production/Process orders that
the receiver can choose to receive against. Once the Production/Process order and line item are
selected, the receiver will press the COPY button. Then proceed to step 1.4 Goods Receipt
Production/Process Order: Selection Screen.
In exception cases, a goods receipt has been entered for a Production/Process Order with an incorrect
quantity. The initial receipt needs to be reversed. For example, a Production/Process Order for 100
pieces of widgets have been ordered and received. Later, it is identified that one of the boxes is missing
10 pieces. It is now necessary to reverse the initial goods receipt for the 100 widgets and then post a
new goods receipt for the appropriate “short” quantity of 90. The document date for the corrected goods
receipt should be recorded for the initial goods receipt in the Document Date field. Then, when the
remaining 10 arrive, the respective dates will be entered to allow vendor evaluation to be scored
accurately.
specific especially if the users are not sure. A recommendation would be for the material, plant and
movement type as a minimum. Then press the execute button (the icon resembling a flower or stopwatch
or press F8). Select the material document item and press the “Adopt document” button. The material
document number will be copied into the screen. Now press enter. The heading of the screen should
read, “Cancel Material Document: Selection Screen”. Select the line and press the “Copy” button. Then
SAVE. If the material for that document is displayed, there will be offsetting entries to the previous receipt
by quantity AND value.
Goods receipt tolerances for quantity are set at different levels material master, Production/Process Order
information record, Production/Process order, and outline agreements. The order of precedence follows
the same order from least specific (lowest) to most specific (highest). For example, the over/under-
delivery tolerances are set at the material master level

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 9
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics → Material Management → Production/Process → Master Data →
Subsequent Settlement → Vendor Rebate Arrangements → Environment →
Via Transaction Code MIGO – Choose Goods Receipt, Order
1.2. On screen “Goods Receipt Production/Process Order XXXXXXXXXX - User Name”, enter
information on the initial screen in the fields as specified in the below table:
Document
Date
Default is current system date R No user input Today’s date defaults
in
Posting Date Default is current system date R Date of the actual vendor delivery
Today’s date defaults
in
the vendor
O Enter vendor’s control number
(Invoice, sales order or packing list
number).
by the sender.
available.
Doc. Header
text
explanations or notes, which apply
O
number, which uniquely identifies a
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 9
Movement
type
Goods movement type. Located on
the Where tab.
R Enter the number for the movement
type or choose a movement type
from the menu.
Movement type is 101
for goods receipt to
storage location.
Production/Pr
ocess Order
Production/Process order number R Enter the Production/Process order
number. The user can use match
codes to find it if necessary.
down menu.
If the plant is left blank,
it will be picked up from
the purchase order.
Storage
location
Storage location O Enter or select a storage location. If the plant is left blank,
the purchase order.
Reason for
Movement
for the movement
O
Suggest Zero
Lines
Production/Process orders or
Orders.
O
be printed.
radio buttons.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 9
Press the Enter button .
1.3. On screen “Goods Receipt Order XXXXXXXXXX – User Name”, some of the fields will be filled in
with information from the Order and the first screen and some of them will be open to change as
follows:
Material Section Tab
Material Material number R No user input, Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Material
desc.
Material description R No user input. Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Material Key that you use to group together R No user input, Display only. Defaults from the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 9
group several materials or services with
the same attributes, and to assign
them to a particular material group.
PO
Quantity Section Tab
Quantity Quantity received. R Enter quantity received if different
from the PO.
Unit of Entry Basic Unit of Measure in which
goods receipt is entered.
O May be changed to
alt. UOM, if
specified on
Material master
record.
Where Section Tab
Movement
Type
Goods movement type. R No user action necessary Defaults from the
first screen
R No user input. Display only. System calculated
Stock type Indicates the stock type to which the
quantity is posted.
O Specifies to which stock the specified
quantity is posted.
Default is blank
which means
unrestricted stock,
however, it can be
posted to quality,
blocked, etc.
Plant Plant key R No user input. Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Storage
location
Storage location R Enter storage location if different
from PO.
Goods
Recipient Goods Recipient/Ship-To Party
O
Unloading
Point
Unloading Point O Specifies the point at which the
material is to be unloaded
Text
Item Text
O
Item Text
Order Data Section Tab
Order Production/Process Order number R No user input. Display only. Defaults from the
PO
"Del.Complet
ed" Ind. "Delivery Completed" Indicator
R Default ‘value, ’Set automatically” Defaults from the
PO
Batch Section Tab
Batch Batch Number R Enter the Batch number
Date of
Manufacture
Date R Enter the Date of Production
SLED/BBD
Shelf Life Expiration or Best-Before
Date
O
1.3.1. On ‘Material’ tab.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 9
1.3.2. On ‘Quantity’ tab.
1.3.3. On ‘Where’ tab.
1.3.4. On ‘Order Data’ tab.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 9
1.3.5. On ‘Batch’ tab.
1.4. Select the relevant lines that have been received from the packing list. At this point, selections
can be reviewed by selecting the ‘Item OK’ box for each item that has been reviewed.
Then, click on the “Check” button . If all of the items being processed are OK, the
status bar should display the message “Document is O.K.” and the error
light should be green . Click on the Save/Post icon or the ‘Post’ button to create the
material document, the following message will be shown in the status bar upon successful
completion of document posting.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 9
*** Please note that the system will display a ‘Warning’ (yellow error light) message for deficit quantities
receipts and over delivery quantities. For example, if a PO line has an expected quantity of 100 pieces
and only 80 pieces were delivered, a deficit warning will appear. The same will happen with over delivery
quantities. In this case, a warning message will be displayed. Warning can be overridden by pressing
enter. Errors (red error light or “hard stop” errors), however, cannot be overridden. “Hard stop” errors
must be resolved.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_GR / GO – Post Goods Receipt for PO
Inventory Management – Goods Withdrawal
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 9
Overview
Trigger:
Deliveries from vendors resulting from purchase orders.
Delivery Note
*Vendor Batch
financial postings.
Tips and Tricks
bill of lading for the carrier, which will contain information relating to who the vendor is, the material, the
purchase order number the material was ordered under and quantity delivered.
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For purchase order → PO number unknown. On
the Goods Receipt - PO Unknown: Initial Screen, be sure to fill in the Bill of Lading number and the
carrier in the Header Text field. The movement type is defaulted in. The receiver will need to enter the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 9
vendor and/or material in the Find POs section and press the enter key or green checkmark in the upper
left hand corner of the screen. The system will provide a list of all open purchase orders that the receiver
can choose to receive against. Once the purchase order and line item are selected, the receiver will
press the COPY button. Then proceed to step 1.4 Goods Receipt PO: Selection Screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 9
Procedural Steps
Via Transaction Code MIGO – Choose Goods Receipt, Purchase Order
1.2. On screen “Goods Receipt Purchase Order - User Name”, enter information on the initial screen
in the fields as specified in the below table:
Document
Date
in
in
the vendor
number).
by the sender.
available.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 9
Doc. Header
text
O
O
Movement
type
the Where tab.
from the menu.
storage location.
Purchase
order
The user can use match codes to
find it if necessary.
down menu.
the purchase order.
Storage
location
the purchase order.
Reason for
Movement
for the movement
O
Suggest Zero
Lines
purchase orders or
Orders.
O
be printed.
radio buttons.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 9
Press the Execute/Enter button .
1.3. On screen “Goods Receipt Purchase Order XXXXXXXXXX – User Name”, some of the fields will
be filled in with information from the Purchase Order and the first screen and some of them will
be open to change as follows:
PO
Material
desc.
PO

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 9
PO
from the PO.
O May be changed to
alt. UOM, if
specified on
Material master
record.
Where Section Tab
first screen
quantity is posted.
quantity is posted.
Default is blank
which means
unrestricted stock,
however, it can be
posted to quality,
blocked, etc.
Plnt Plant key R No user input. Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Sloc Storage location R Enter storage location if different
from PO.
Purchase
Order Data
Section Tab
PO Purchase order number R No user input. Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Item Item number of purchasing doc. R No user input. Display only. Item
of 10
Defaults from the
PO
Item
Category
An identifier indicating the
characteristics of an item.
O No user input, Display only. Defaults from the
PO
is complete, set this switch. Normally
set to release automatically.
Used esp. in cases
where quantity
received is less
than PO, and PO is
considered to be
closed.
Partner Section Tab
Vendor Name of the vendor R No user input, Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Account
Assignment
Section Tab
Profit Center An organizational unit in Accounting
that reflects a management-oriented
structure of the organization for the
purpose of internal control.
R No user input, Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Serial
Numbers
Section Tab
**Note: Optional for
most materials in
Joerns
Serial
numbers
A number given to an item of material
in addition to the material number, to
differentiate that item from other
R Enter the unique material serial
number ID of the components that
have serial number profiles in the
Use the packing slip
or the ASN in order to
enter the unique serial

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 9
items of the material. The
combination of material and serial
number is unique.
material master and should have
serial numbers entered.
number given to the
component by the
vendor.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 9
1.3.2. On ‘Purchase Order Data’ tab.
1.3.2. On ‘Partner’ tab.
1.3.2. On ‘Account Assignment’ tab.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 9
status bar should display the message “Document is O.K.” and the error light should be green
. Click on the Save/Post icon or the ‘Post’ button to create the material document and
credit the stock inventory for those items.
must be resolved.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_GR – Post Goods Receipt for PO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 10
Overview
Trigger:
Deliveries from vendors resulting from purchase orders.
Delivery Note
*Vendor Batch
financial postings.
Tips and Tricks
bill of lading for the carrier, which will contain information relating to who the vendor is, the material, the
purchase order number the material was ordered under and quantity delivered.
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For purchase order → PO number unknown. On
the Goods Receipt - PO Unknown: Initial Screen, be sure to fill in the Bill of Lading number and the
carrier in the Header Text field. The movement type is defaulted in. The receiver will need to enter the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 10
vendor and/or material in the Find POs section and press the enter key or green checkmark in the upper
left hand corner of the screen. The system will provide a list of all open purchase orders that the receiver
can choose to receive against. Once the purchase order and line item are selected, the receiver will
press the COPY button. Then proceed to step 1.4 Goods Receipt PO: Selection Screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 10
Procedural Steps
Via Transaction Code MIGO – Choose Goods Receipt, Purchase Order
1.2. On screen “Goods Receipt Purchase Order - User Name”, enter information on the initial screen
Document
Date
in
in
the vendor
number).
by the sender.
available.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 10
Doc. Header
text
O
O
Movement
type
the Where tab.
from the menu.
storage location.
Purchase
order
The user can use match codes to
find it if necessary.
down menu.
the purchase order.
Storage
location
the purchase order.
Reason for
Movement
for the movement
O
Suggest Zero
Lines
purchase orders or
Orders.
O
be printed.
radio buttons.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 10
Press the Execute/Enter button .
1.3. On screen “Goods Receipt Purchase Order XXXXXXXXXX – User Name”, some of the fields will
be filled in with information from the Purchase Order and the first screen and some of them will
be open to change as follows:
PO
Material
desc.
PO

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 10
PO
from the PO.
O May be changed to
alt. UOM, if
specified on
Material master
record.
Where Section Tab
first screen
quantity is posted.
quantity is posted.
Default is blank
which means
unrestricted stock,
however, it can be
posted to quality,
blocked, etc.
Plnt Plant key R No user input. Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Sloc Storage location R Enter storage location if different
from PO.
Purchase
Order Data
Section Tab
PO Purchase order number R No user input. Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Item Item number of purchasing doc. R No user input. Display only. Item
of 10
Defaults from the
PO
Item
Category
An identifier indicating the
characteristics of an item.
O No user input, Display only. Defaults from the
PO
is complete, set this switch. Normally
set to release automatically.
Used esp. in cases
where quantity
received is less
than PO, and PO is
considered to be
closed.
Partner Section Tab
Vendor Name of the vendor R No user input, Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Account
Assignment
Section Tab
Profit Center An organizational unit in Accounting
that reflects a management-oriented
structure of the organization for the
purpose of internal control.
R No user input, Display only. Defaults from the
PO
Serial
Numbers
Section Tab
**Note: Optional for
most materials in
Joerns
Serial
numbers
A number given to an item of material
in addition to the material number, to
differentiate that item from other
R Enter the unique material serial
number ID of the components that
have serial number profiles in the
Use the packing slip
or the ASN in order to
enter the unique serial

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 10
items of the material. The
combination of material and serial
number is unique.
material master and should have
serial numbers entered.
number given to the
component by the
vendor.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 10
1.3.2. On ‘Purchase Order Data’ tab.
1.3.2. On ‘Partner’ tab.
1.3.2. On ‘Account Assignment’ tab.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 10
status bar should display the message “Document is O.K.” and the error light should be green
. Click on the Save/Post icon or the ‘Post’ button to create the material document and
credit the stock inventory for those items.
must be resolved.
MIGO_GR
Trigger:
Deliveries from vendors resulting from purchase orders. This transaction is very specific to PO-related goods
receipts. This transaction looks almost exactly like the GR for a Purchase Order in the MIGO transaction
instructions above.
** See pp. 1- 6 above
MIGO_GO

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 10
Trigger:
Final goods receipts from a production line against a production order are to be entered separately. This is very
similar to the MIGO transaction described above except is used in conjunction with a production order vs a
purchase order. Also, this transaction can be used for GR’s against a material document.
** See pp. 1- 6 above

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MIGO_TR_ Transfer Posting
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
Overview
Trigger: Need to move materials from one storage location to another.
Goods can be transferred from one storage location to another, within the same plant.
Movement Type
Plant
Storage location
Material
Quantity
UnE
Location from which material will be transferred from
Material to be transferred.
Quantity of material to be transferred
Unit of measure for material to be transferred.
The output is a material document.
No accounting document will be
generated.
No accounting impact
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Procedural Steps:
1.1. Access the transaction:
1.2. Choose the appropriate selection criteria:
Transaction box
transaction.
One-step transfer:
Choose “A08 Transfer
Posting”
Two-step transfer:
To initiate the storage location
transfer, choose:
To receive the storage
location transfer, choose:
One-step is generally used
when both storage locations
share the same warehouse
Reference
transaction box
Enter the desired movement
type and press ENTER.
One-step transfer:
unrestricted-use stock

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
blocked stock
Two-step transfer:
313 – Remove from
storage location
315 – Receive into
storage location
Posting Date
is issued
goods is transferred.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8
If you would like to enter multiple lines together, then, click to collapse the Detail section, the
screen will be changed to the following:
Enter part number/material number in the “Mat.Short Text” column.
C
User Action and
Values
Comments
Material /
Mat. Short
Text
Part number of
R Enter material
number
quantity
Plant Plant code R
R

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
C
User Action and
Values
Comments
will be issued from
SLoc.
Transfer
Pstg
Storage location which
the part will be
received into
R
Batch The batch number of
the material being
transfered
C
Batch Trfr
Pstg
The batch number of
the material being
transfered
C Batch Trfr Pstg will auto fill once
the batch has been entered.
Text Contains an
line item.
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
If you have issue multiple batches for the same line item, select the line item and click to split
it into multiple batches.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8
On the “Distribute Quantity” window as shown below, enter the Quantity and the corresponding
batch.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
Then, click to proceed. The system will then split the items into multiple lines to
Verify and update the information accordingly and click for the item(s).
Click the Save icon to save
SAP will navigate to LT06 for completing the warehouse portion of the transfer.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MK01_Create Vendor (Purchasing)
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 11
Overview
Trigger:
Purchasing requires a new vendor
A vendor master (Purchasing) is required to permit all external procurement transactions in the system. Typically, the Purchasing
organization is only authorized to create a Purchasing view, which allows RFQ’s, Quotations, Purchase Orders and Agreements
(Contracts) but prevents the payment of the invoice. Finance or Payables maintains the Accounting view to satisfy most audit
requirements that call for a separation of duties. This reduces the likelihood of duplicate vendor masters.
Vendor Could be a required field depending on account group specified. If the account
group chosen specified external number assignment, then an entry would be
required here.
Account Group Specifies the type of Vendor (Standard, One Time, etc.) A means of classifying
vendors within the system. The type of entry here will determine whether an entry
is required under vendor name
New Vendor
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 11
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access Create Vendor: Initial Screen by:
Via Menus a) Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data > Vendor >
Purchasing > Create
Via Transaction Code MK01
1.2. On screen “Create Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:
Vendor Vendor Number C Enter an appropriate vendor number if
external number is required or allowed
Purchasing
Org.
Purchasing Organization Identifier O Specifies that the vendor is permitted
only for your Purchasing Organization
Account
Group
Specifies the type of Vendor
(Standard, One Time, … )
R Enter the Account Group The type of vendor
dictates the
following screens
and field selections
Note: The Template fields are used for copying a vendor, typically from one Purchasing Organization to
another. Specify the vendor number and Purchasing Org that you wish to copy.
Press “ENTER”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 11
1.3. On screen “Create Vendor: Address”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:
Title Title of vendor O Enter title Commonly used in
cases where
employee is
created with a
vendor master.
Name Vendor Name R Up to 4 lines available Format is

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 11
replicated on
printed documents
(RFQ’s, POs ...)
Search Term Name by which search is conducted R Enter a name to use in Matchcode.
Up to 2 lines available.
Street/House
Number
Street Address of Vendor O Enter appropriate street address
Postal
Code/City
Postal, zip code, city of Vendor O Make necessary entries
Country Country of Vendor O Enter appropriate country
Region State location of Vendor O Enter appropriate state
PO Box PO Box number of Vendor O Enter appropriate box number
Postal Code Postal or zip code O Enter country postal code or zip code
District City or district O
Postal Code Zip Code / Postal Code C Enter Zip Code / Postal Code Requirement and
format are dictated
by the country code
entered
Language Language R Enter language to be used Accepts any input
No validation tables
Telephone Telephone Number O Enter appropriate number
FAX FAX Number O Enter Fax number
Email Email address O Email address of vendor
Data LIne Data Line O Extension for data conversion
Telebox Telebox O Extension for data conversion
More Fields or
Other Comm.
More fields dropdown/
Other communication button
O Offers more fields such as URL address
Press “ENTER”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 11
1.4. On screen “Create Vendor: Control”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 11
Customer If the vendor is also a customer, use
this field to link the two records
together for line item display and
transaction processing
O Enter if link between vendor and
customer records is needed.
Authorization Authorization group O Enter if needed.
Trading
Partner
Company ID of trading partner O Enter as appropriate if trading partner
is used.
Group Key If the vendor belongs to a group, you
can enter a freely assignable group
key here. If you create a matchcode
using this group key, group
evaluations are possible.
O Enter as appropriate if vendors are
grouped.
Tax code 1& 2 Tax Numbers of the customer/vendor
that is used for reporting to the tax
authorities
O Enter as appropriate for tax purposes.
Fiscal Address Fiscal Address O Specifies an additional master record
in which the official address is stored.
Used in countries
such as Italy
VAT reg. no VAT reg. number O For tax purposes
Equalization
checkbox
Equalization checkbox O For tax purposes
Natural
Person
checkbox
Natural Person checkbox O For tax purposes
Sales/purch.
Tax checkbox
Sales/purch. Tax checkbox O For tax purposes
Reference
data Location
nos. 1 & 2
Reference Data Industry Industry key used to group vendors by
location
For reports
Industry Industry O As identified in configuration
SCAC Standard Carrier Access Code O Used to identify forwarding agent
CAR Freight Carrier Freight Group O Used to define freight codes and
classes and can help to determine
freight costs
ServAgntProc
Grp
Service Agent Procedure Group O Used to determine pricing procedure
for shipping costs
More Button More button O Gives you additional fields for VAT #s
Check Digit Check digit for international location
number
O By checking you can verify whether
the International Location Number
(ILN) entered is valid

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 11
Actual QM
Sys.
Actual QM System O Allows you to store a description of the
vendor’s QM system here
QM System
To
Validity date of certification O Date up to which certification system
is valid
Press “ENTER”
1.5. On screen “Create Vendor: Purchasing Data”, enter information in the fields as specified
in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 11
Order
Currency
Order Currency R Enter Currency Code for transactions
with this vendor
Terms of
Payment
Terms of Payment O Enter code for typical Terms of
Payment with this vendor
Incoterms Incoterms O Select code and enter value in second
box (FOB - city)
Minimum Minimum Order Value O Enter minimum dollar value permitted

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 11
Order Value per purchase order
Schema
group, vendor
Schema group, vendor O Enter Schema code
Pricing date
categ.
Pricing date category O Enter Price determination key for
Purchase orders
Order optim.
Rest
Restriction profile number O Enter restriction profile number
Salesperson Salesperson O Enter salesperson
Telephone Telephone O Enter Telephone number
GR-based inv.
Verif.
checkbox
Goods receipt based invoice
Verification flag
O Click on if applicable
AutoevalGRSe
tmt Del.
checkbox
Evaluated receipt settlement flag
(ERS)
AutoevalGRSe
tmt Ret.
checkbox
Automatic ERS for return items O Click on if applicable
Acknowledgm
ent reqd.
checkbox
Acknowledgment required flag. O Click on if applicable
Automatic PO Automatic PO flag O Click on if applicable
Subseq.
Settlement
Subsequent settlement flag O Click on if applicable
Subseq. Settl.
index
Subsequent Settlement index flag O Click on if applicable
B.vol.comp./ag
.nec
Business Volume comparisons/agreem
necessary
Doc. Index
active
Document index active O Click on if applicable
Grant discount
in kind
Qualifying for discount O Click on if applicable
Returns
vendor
Vendor returns in shipping O Click on if applicable
Relevant for
price determ.
Indicator for price determination node O Click on if applicable
Relevant for
agency
business
Checkbox for indicating whether
Vendor is partner in agency business
ABC indicator ABC indicator for vendors O Click on if applicable
Modeoftrnsprt-
Border
Mode of transports for border crossing O Click on if applicable
Office of entry Customs office O Click on if applicable
Sort criterion Sort criteria for deliveries O Click on if applicable
Purchasing
group
Purchasing group default value O Enter if applicable
Planed Deliv.
Time
Planned delivery time default data val. O Enter if applicable
Confirmation
Control
Conformation control default data val. O Enter if applicable
Unit of Unit of measure Group default data O Enter if applicable

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 11
measure grp Val.
Rounding
profile
Rounding profile default data val. O Enter if applicable
Price marking
agreed
Vendor price marking O Enter if applicable
Rack-jobbing
service agreed
Rack-jobbing service O Click on if applicable
Order entry:
vendor
Purchase Order entry will be done by
the vendor
Serv. Level Vendor service level O Enter if applicable
Press “ENTER”
1.6. On screen “Create Vendor: Partner Functions”, enter information in the fields as specified
in the below table:
Partner
Function
Enter Partner Function Code O Table validated / selection
Number Enter valid vendor number O
Name Name of vendor C System default from vendor number
DP Select / Activate if multiple vendors
and desired
O Table validated / selection - only one
selection per partner function
1.6.1. Dialog Box
If you identified several deliveries or other parties in the Vendor Master record, the
system will display the alternatives in a dialog box. A selected default vendor will be
displayed first

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 11
1.7. “Save” the vendor. (Select floppy disk icon, ctrl S, or F11). This will return you to the
initial screen, ready for another entry and will provide a message that the account (vendor)
has been successfully created.
1.8. Return to Main Purchasing Menu. (Select Yellow up Pointing Arrow or Shift F3)
Refer to Business Process Procedure “Display a Vendor” - to verify this result.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MK02_Change Vendor (Purchasing)
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 9
Overview
Trigger:
Purchasing requires a change to a vendor master
A vendor master (Purchasing) provides critical default values to various purchasing documents (RFQ’s, Purchase Orders, etc.)
including the details printed on these documents. A vendor may physically move or change its payment terms or modify other
important details. This process explains how to access and make changes. Authorization must exist in the system to allow
Vendor masters to be changed.
Vendor Enter valid Vendor number or use Matchcode to search
Purchasing Org Enter your Purchasing Organization Identifier
General Data Box Check as desired based on data that requires the change
Purchasing Data Box Check as desired based on data that requires the change
Changed Vendor Master
Tips and Tricks
One or more of the boxes in either General Data or Purchasing Organization Data must be
selected in order to access screens to edit. If there is a need to view / edit all of the Purchasing
Vendor Master screens, a button to ‘select all’ exists immediately below the green check mark.
Note: The Payment Transaction button will not access the screen if the Vendor master has only
been created for Purchasing. That screen is typically managed by the accounting or central
views and has bank details, alternate payee, etc.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 9
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data > Vendor
> Purchasing > Change
1.2. On screen “Change Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:
Vendor Vendor Number C Enter vendor number or use
matchcode
Purchasing
Org.
Purchasing Organization Identifier O Enter appropriate Purchasing Org.
General Data/
Purchasing
Org Boxes
Checkboxes R Check the appropriate boxes where
change is required.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 9
1.4. On screen “Change Vendor: Address”, modify information as needed in the fields as
Title Title of vendor O Enter title Commonly used in
cases where

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 9
employee is
created with a
vendor master.
Name Vendor Name R Up to 4 lines available Format is
replicated on
printed documents
(RFQ’s, POs ...)
Search Term Name by which search is conducted R Enter a name to use in Matchcode.
Up to 2 lines available.
Street/House
Number
Street Address of Vendor O Enter street address of vendor
Postal
Code/City
Postal, zip code, city of Vendor O Make necessary entries
Country Country of Vendor O Enter appropriate country
Region State location of Vendor O Enter appropriate state
PO Box PO Box number of Vendor O Enter appropriate box number
Postal Code Postal or zip code O Enter country postal code or zip code
District City or district O
Postal Code Zip Code / Postal Code C Enter Zip Code / Postal Code Requirement and
format are dictated
by the country code
entered
Language Language R Enter language to be used Accepts any input
No validation tables
Telephone Telephone Number O Enter appropriate number
FAX FAX Number O Enter Fax number
Email Email address O Email address of vendor
Data LIne Data Line O Extension for data conversion
Telebox Telebox O Extension for data conversion
More Fields or
Other Comm.
O Offers more fields such as URL address
1.6. On screen “Change Vendor: Control”, modify information as necessary in the fields as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 9
Customer If the vendor is also a customer, use
this field to link the two records
together for line item display and
O Enter number/name if link is desired
between customer/vendor record
Authorization Authorization group O Enter as needed.
Trading
Partner
Company ID of trading partner O Enter is trading partners are used.
Group Key If the vendor belongs to a group, you
can enter a freely assignable group
key here. If you create a matchcode
using this group key, group
evaluations are possible.
O Enter if vendor is part of a grouping
key.
Tax code 1& 2 Tax Numbers of the customer/vendor
that is used for reporting to the tax
O Enter as needed for tax purposes.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 9
authorities
Fiscal Address Fiscal Address O Specifies an additional master record
in which the official address is stored.
Used in countries
such as Italy
VAT reg. no VAT reg. number O For tax purposes
Equalization
checkbox
Equalization checkbox O For tax purposes
Natural
Person
checkbox
Natural Person checkbox O For tax purposes
Sales/purch.
Tax checkbox
Sales/purch. Tax checkbox O For tax purposes
Reference
data Location
nos. 1 & 2
Reference Data Industry Industry key used to group vendors by
location
For reports
Industry Industry O As identified in configuration
SCAC Standard Carrier Access Code O Used to identify forwarding agent
CAR Freight Carrier Freight Group O Used to define freight codes and
classes and can help to determine
freight costs
ServAgntProc
Grp
Service Agent Procedure Group O Used to determine pricing procedure
for shipping costs
More Button More button O Gives you additional fields for VAT #s
Check Digit Check digit for international location
number
O By checking you can verify whether
the International Location Number
(ILN) entered is valid
Actual QM
Sys.
Actual QM System O Allows you to store a description of the
vendor’s QM system here
QM System
To
Validity date of certification O Date up to which certification system
is valid
1.8. On screen “Change Vendor: Purchasing Data”, modify information as required in the fields

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 9
Order
Currency
with this vendor
Terms of
Payment
box (FOB - city)
Minimum
Order Value
Minimum Order Value O Enter minimum dollar value permitted
per purchase order

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 9
Schema
group, vendor
Pricing date
categ.
Pricing date category O Enter Price determination key for
Purchase orders
Order optim.
Rest
GR-based inv.
Verif.
checkbox
Verification flag
AutoevalGRSe
tmt Del.
checkbox
(ERS)
AutoevalGRSe
tmt Ret.
checkbox
Automatic ERS for return items O Click on if applicable
Acknowledgm
ent reqd.
checkbox
Subseq.
Settlement
Subseq. Settl.
index
B.vol.comp./ag
.nec
Business Volume comparisons/agreem
necessary
Doc. Index
active
Grant discount
in kind
Returns
vendor
Relevant for
price determ.
Indicator for price determination node O Click on if applicable
Relevant for
agency
business
Modeoftrnsprt-
Border
Mode of transports for border crossing O Click on if applicable
Purchasing
group
Purchasing group default value O Enter if applicable
Planed Deliv.
Time
Planned delivery time default data val. O Enter if applicable
Confirmation
Control
Conformation control default data val. O Enter if applicable
Unit of
measure grp
Unit of measure Group default data
Val.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 9
Rounding
profile
Rounding profile default data val. O Enter if applicable
Price marking
agreed
Rack-jobbing
service agreed
Order entry:
vendor
the vendor
Serv. Level Vendor service level O Enter if applicable
1.10. On screen “Change Vendor: Partner Functions”, modify information as required in the
Partner
Function
Partner Function Code O Table validated / selection
Number Valid vendor number O Enter vendor name/number
Name Name of vendor C System default from vendor number
DP Select / Activate if multiple vendors
and desired
O Table validated / selection - only one
selection per partner function
1.12. The initial “change” screen will be displayed with a message stating that the vendor has
been successfully changed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MK03_Display Vendor (Purchasing)
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 10
Overview
Trigger:
A user needs to display a Vendor Master in the system
A vendor master (Purchasing) provides critical default values to various purchasing documents (RFQ’s, Purchase Orders, etc.)
including the details printed on these documents. A user may wish to view an existing vendor master to obtain information.
This process explains how to access and display the vendor master data. Authorization must exist in the system to allow
Vendor Masters to be displayed
Vendor Enter valid Vendor number or use Matchcode to search
Purchasing Org Enter your Purchasing Organization Identifier
General Data Box Check as desired
Purchasing Data Box Check as desired
Vendor Master is displayed
Tips and Tricks
One or more of the boxes must be selected in either General Data or Purchasing Organization Data in
order to access screens to display. If all of the Purchasing Vendor Master screens need to be viewed, a
button to ‘select all’ exists immediately below the green check mark.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 10
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access Display Vendor: Initial Screen by:
> Purchasing > Display
1.2. On screen “Display Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:
Vendor Vendor Number C Enter vendor number or use
matchcode
Purchasing
Org.
Purchasing Organization Identifier O Enter appropriate Purchasing Org.
General Data/
Purchasing
Org Boxes
Checkboxes R Check the appropriate boxes where
display is required.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 10
1.4. On screen “Display Vendor: Address”, view information available as described in the table
below:
Title Title of vendor
Name Vendor Name
Search Term Name by which search is conducted

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 10
Street/House
Number
Street Address of Vendor
Postal
Code/City
Postal, zip code, city of Vendor
Country Country of Vendor
Region State location of Vendor
PO Box PO Box number of Vendor
Postal Code Postal or zip code
District City or district
Postal Code Zip Code / Postal Code
Language Language
Telephone Telephone Number
FAX FAX Number
Email Email address
Data Line Data Line. Extension for data conversion
Telebox Telebox. Extension for data conversion
More Fields or
Other Comm.
1.4. On screen “Display Vendor: Control”, view information as described in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 10

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 10
Customer If the vendor is also a customer, use this field to link the two records together for line item display and transaction
processing
Authorization Authorization group
Trading
Partner
Company ID of trading partner
Group Key If the vendor belongs to a group, you can enter a freely assignable group key here. If you create a matchcode
using this group key, group evaluations are possible.
Tax code 1& 2 Tax Numbers of the customer/vendor that is used for reporting to the tax authorities
Fiscal Address Fiscal Address
VAT reg. no VAT reg. number
Equalization
checkbox
Equalization checkbox
Natural
Person
checkbox
Natural Person checkbox
Sales/purch.
Tax checkbox
Sales/purch. Tax checkbox
Reference
data Location
nos. 1 & 2
Reference Data Industry. Industry key used to group vendors by location
Industry Industry, As identified in configuration
SCAC Standard Carrier Access Code.
Used to identify forwarding agent
CAR Freight Carrier Freight Group. Used to define freight codes and classes and can help to determine freight costs
ServAgntProc
Grp
Service Agent Procedure Group. Used to determine pricing procedure for shipping costs
More Button More button. Gives additional fields for VAT #’s
Check Digit Check digit for international location number
Actual QM
Sys.
Actual QM System. Allows you to store a description of the vendor’s QM system here
QM System
To
Validity date of certification. Date up to which certification system is valid

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 10
1.6. On screen “Display Vendor: Purchasing Data”, view information as described in the table
below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 10
Order
Currency
Order Currency
Terms of
Payment
Terms of Payment
Incoterms Incoterms
Minimum
Order Value
Minimum Order Value
Schema
group, vendor
Schema group, vendor
Pricing date
categ.
Pricing date category
Order optim.
Rest
Restriction profile number
Salesperson Salesperson
Telephone Telephone
GR-based inv.
Verif.
checkbox
Verification flag
AutoevalGRSe
tmt Del.
checkbox
(ERS)
AutoevalGRSe
tmt Ret.
checkbox
Automatic ERS for return items
Acknowledgm
ent reqd.
checkbox
Acknowledgment required flag.
Automatic PO Automatic PO flag
Subseq.
Settlement
Subsequent settlement flag
Subseq. Settl.
index
Subsequent Settlement index flag
B.vol.comp./ag
.nec
Business Volume comparisons/agreement necessary
Doc. Index
active
Document index active
Grant discount
in kind
Qualifying for discount
Returns
vendor
Vendor returns in shipping
Relevant for
price determ.
Indicator for price determination node
Relevant for
agency
business
ABC indicator ABC indicator for vendors
Modeoftrnsprt-
Border
Mode of transports for border crossing
Office of entry Customs office

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 10
Sort criterion Sort criteria for deliveries
Purchasing
group
Purchasing group default value
Planed Deliv.
Time
Planned delivery time default data val.
Confirmation
Control
Conformation control default data val.
Unit of
measure grp
Unit of measure Group default data
Val.
Rounding
profile
Rounding profile default data val.
Price marking
agreed
Vendor price marking
Rack-jobbing
service agreed
Rack-jobbing service
Order entry:
vendor
the vendor
Serv. Level Vendor service level
1.8. On screen “Display Vendor: Partner Functions”, view information as described in the table
below:
Partner
Function
Enter Partner Function Code
Number Enter valid vendor number
Name Name of vendor
DP Select / Activate if multiple vendors and desired

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 10
1.9. When viewing is complete, click on the Exit button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ML81N_Service Entry Sheet
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
After services that have been performed for your firm have been recorded in the service entry
sheet, one or more responsible persons (depending on the system settings) must check that the
work is satisfactory and formally accept the services
To accept the services that have been performed and recorded.
The following procedures are available to you for accepting services performed by service providers:
• One-step acceptance
The person responsible accepts the service entry sheet at the touch of a key.
 The same person carries out the processes of service entry and acceptance.
 Service entry and service acceptance are organizationally separated, in order to preserve the dual
control principle.
• Multi-step acceptance
You can make service acceptance subject to a release procedure, in which various departments or individuals have to
indicate their approval. The document is not regarded as accepted until the last release point has released it.
Entry Sheet Service Entry sheet Number to be accepted
Acceptance of Services performed.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
The accepted entry sheet constitutes the basis for the process of Invoice Verification for Services.
The account assignment objects are charged at the time of acceptance. When the service entry
sheet is accepted, a logistics document (material document) is generated.
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management Service entry sheet  Maintain
Via Transaction Code ML81N
1.2. On the “Display Entry Sheet” screen, choose Other Purchase Order / Other
document (Shift + F5)
1.3. In the “Select Purchasing Order/Entry Sheet” dialog box, in the Entry Sheet field,
enter the entry sheet number as specified in the below table and choose
Continue.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Entry Sheet Entry Sheet Number that is to be
approved
o Enter Service Entry Sheet Number
1.4. On the “Display Entry Sheet” screen, choose Display <-> Change to change
the Service Entry Sheet.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
1.5. In the “Change entry Sheet” screen, choose Accept (Ctrl. + F1) to accept the
service entry sheet as it is and Save entries.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.6. Choose Back to return to the SAP Easy Access menu.
Result:
Service entry sheet has been accepted.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 9
Overview
Trigger:
The services actually performed (work actually done) by a service provider are recorded in a
Service Entry Sheet with reference to the purchase order.
To record services actually performed by a Service Provider.
You can enter both planned and unplanned services:
• Planned services
Can be adopted directly in the service entry sheet.
• Unplanned services
Are not precisely described, quantified, or priced until the work actually done is entered. The system checks whether
unplanned services are within the limit set in the purchase order.
Purchase Document Number
Item Number of the Purchase Document
Purchase Order Number for which service Entry sheet is to be recorded.
Item Number of the Purchase Order for which Service Entry Sheet is to be
recorded.
Performed services are entered with reference
to the Purchase Order.
Tips and Tricks
A service provider's invoice relating to a certain invoice can be entered only after the entry sheet
has been accepted.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 9
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Materials Management Service entry sheet  Maintain
Via Transaction Code ML81N
1.2. On the “Display Service Entry Sheet” screen, choose Other Purchase Order / Other
document (Shift + F5)
1.3. A dialog box is shown, in the “Select Purchasing Order/Entry Sheet” screen, enter
information in the fields as specified in the below table and choose Continue.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 9
Purchase
Order Number
Purchase Order with reference to
which Service Entry Sheet is to be
created
R Enter Purchase Order Number
Purchase
Order Item
Number
Purchase Order item Number R Enter Item Number
1.4. The purchase order is now selected. In the “Service Entry against Purchase Order
45000000xx 0010” screen, choose Create service entry sheet (Ctrl. + F1), to
create a service entry for the purchase order.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 9
1.5. In the “10000000xx Create Entry Sheet Screen”, choose Service Sel. found below,
to copy services from purchase order

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 9
1.6. On the “Service Selection” dialog box, select From Purchase order radio button.
The system displays the purchase order in the field. Select the Adopt Full Quantity
checkbox and then choose Continue.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 9
1.7. In the “Select Services as Reference” screen, select the 1 row, then choose
Services / Adopt Services (F9)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 9

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 9
1.8. In the “10000000xx Create Entry Sheet” screen make the following entries and then
choose continue (enter).
Short text
Cleaning report week <This week number>
<The short text is at the top of the screen just below the purchase order
number>

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 9
1.9. Click Save.
1.10. Choose Back to return to the SAP Easy Access menu.
Result
The Service Entry Sheet has been created with reference to the purchase order.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM01_Create Material Master(Classification View)
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 11
OVERVIEW
Trigger:
Materials need to be extended Classification view in order to store the batch related information for
those materials.
Manual extension of Classification view
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of master data depends largely
on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or decentralized. Some material data is valid for all
organizational levels while other data is valid only at certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the
system use the same material master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can
be added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add other information later as
it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material are possible but at a
minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure assigned on the basic data view. Additional
department views (i.e. Classification, Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP, Warehouse, Quality, etc.) can be added at a later time
by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will need to be extended to the plants before it can be used
there.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created. Thus, material master
information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material”
transaction is used rather than the “Change Material” transaction.
Pre-requisite for Classification View: Material Master is already defined for the material.
Input – Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Enter Material number to be extended classification view.
Material Classification view is extended N/A
Tips and Tricks:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 11
Procedural Steps
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material master>Material>Create (General)
> Immediate
Via Transaction Code MM01
1.2. On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 11
Field Name Description R/O/C/P User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number to be extended Other fields are
populated
automatically
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry to which
O Leave blank. Enter code or select from
pull down menu
Material Type Group to which material is assigned. O Leave blank. Select from the Pull
Down Menu
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which the system
obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless new material is
based on an existing material
Press Enter (two times) or click on
Enter Green button
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C/P; R = Required, P = Client Required, O = Optional, and C =
Conditional)
Note : The message
is being
displayed in the status bar. Press enter key to continue.
1.3. On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 11
Click on Classification view.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter or click on continue button .
1.4. A pop-up screen “class type” is displayed to select proper class type from the list pertains
to the selected material.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 11
Note : Selected batch class type 023 (batch class) as an example in this classification view.
1.5. Press Enter key or click on continue button .
1.6. On tab “Classification”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 11
Assignment s
Class Class Name R Select appropriate class from the list
Description Class Description D Display only
Standard class Standard class O Whether class is standard or not to
access all information
Status Status of the class C Value is derived automatically from the
class master
Icon Icon C This value is based on the status
value.
Itm Sort Item C Sorting/sequence number
Press Enter key.
Conditional)
1.7. Characteristics pertains to the class will be shown in General tab page

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 11
1.8. To Delete class : select the class which is to be deleted and click on icon
1.9. To add more classes, click on icon.
1.10. Steps after entering data on the screens
After entering all required data, select the Save button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM01_Create Material Master
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 88
Overview
Trigger:
• A material master is required for a material.
• A material needs to have additional department views created.
• A new material is to be used in a production process.
• A material needs to be extended to another plant.
• Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
• A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP, and Warehouse) can be added at a later time by extending the
material. As additional plants are added, a material will need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are to be carried out for that
PRT.
Material Required only if using external numbers. Leave blank if using SAP internal
numbering (recommended)
Industry Sector Enter sector most describing this particular business (example: C for Chemical Use
F4 for list of choices
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select the material type for the material you are
creating. For example, FHMI for Prod. Resources/tools, ROH for Raw Materials,
FERT for Finished Products, etc.
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, LB, GA) Defaults if Engineering
View exists
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional information will be required
New material created

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 88
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant
BPP Table of Contents
The procedures detailed here include all system supplied views for a trade good in the pharmaceutical
sector. Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and
views desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are
not desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
1.5 Basic Data
1.8 Classification
1.9 Sales org.
1.11 Sales: General/plant
1.12 Foreign trade exp.
1.13 Sales text
1.14 Purchasing
1.15 Foreign trade import
1.16 Purchase Order Text
1.17 MRP
1.21 Forecasting
1.22 Work scheduling
1.23 Prod. Resources/tools
1.24 Plant data/storage
1.26 Warehouse mgmt
1.28 Quality mgt.
1.29 Accounting
1.32 Costing
1.34 Plant stock
1.35 Storage location stock
1.36 Extending a material to add a departmental view
1.40 Extending a material to another plant
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 88
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a material
description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be copied
over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material type
will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical MRP
data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values (can be
overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an MRP controller
looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new
materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
• Menus: Defaults >> Views
• Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new material.
• Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
• Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
• Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new material.
• Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial screen.
In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs on each of
the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material in other
plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material Master>Other>Extend
Material View(s)).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 88
Procedure Steps
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material master>Material>Create (General)
> Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools > Prod.
resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material Master>Material >
Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material > Material >
Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material >Material>Create
(General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data >Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous Goods Management>
Environment> Material master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material >Create
(General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical Objects>Material>Create (General)
> Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill of Materials>
Environment> Material Master >Material > Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material master>Material>Create (General)
> Immediately

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 88
1.2. On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Material Key identifying material O Leave blank - enter only if external
numbering used
Recommend internal
numbering
Industry
Sector
R Enter code or select from pull down
menu
Material Type Group to which material is assigned. R Select from the Pull Down Menu Among other things,
Material type
controls views
presented, number
ranges etc.
Copy From
Material:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 88
Press Enter.
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 88
Press Enter.
1.4. On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Organization
al Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be
Storage
Location
Storage Location Identification key O Enter Storage Location where material
will reside or select from pull down
menu
Sales org. Sales Organization O Required if sales view was selected
Distr channel Distribution Channel O Required if sales view was selected
Whse number Warehouse number O Required if warehouse management
view selected
Storage type Storage type O Required if warehouse management
view selected
Profiles Section Header
MRP Profile MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store MRP
parameters that are independent of the
material master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 88
Forecast prof. Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store forecast
parameters independently of a material
master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 88
Enter.
1.5. On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab, enter information

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 88
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
General Data Section Header
Base Unit of
Measure
Units of measure in which stocks of
the material are managed
R Enter UOM or select from pull down list
Material Group Key allowing grouping of same or
similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old Material
Number
Legacy system material number, or,
previous SAP material master number
O Enter if appropriate
External
Material Group
Assigning the material an external
group
Division Key used in determining sales and
business areas
O Enter division ID, or select from pull
down list
Lab. / Office Key/ID. for Person / Group
responsible for material
Product
Allocation
Allows grouping of materials by
characteristics
Product
Hierarchy
Alphanumeric character string for
grouping together materials by
combining different characteristics. It
is used for analyses and price
determination.
X Plant Matl
Status
Indicates whether the material may
be used within different departments
Valid from Date from which the cross-plant
material status is valid
Assign effect.
vals.
Indicates whether you can assign
values to the effectivity parameters or
override the date, when you explode
an assembly or a finished product.
GenItemCat
Group
Materials grouping that helps the
system to determine item categories
during sales document processing.
Dimensions /
EANs
Section Heading
Gross Weight Gross Wt of Material O Enter Gross weight
Weight Unit UOM for net / gross wt C Enter UOM or select from pull down list
under Mass
Net Weight Net wt. Of material O Enter net weight
Volume Space material occupies per unit of
volume
Volume Unit UOM relevant to Volume C Enter or select from Volume pull down
list
Size /
Dimensions
free form text O Enter if appropriate
EAN/UPC International article number O Enter if appropriate
EAN Category used to allow the system to assign an
EAN
Packaging Section Heading

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 12 of 88
Material Data
Matl grp Pack.
matls
Material group: shipping materials O
Basic Data
Texts
Section Heading
Languages
maintained
The number of languages maintained
for basic data texts
O
Basic data text Button to access data texts O Enter additional information for
descriptions, Uof M, EAN’s,
Documents, internal comments,
inspections, and consumption
Configuration
Method
Section Heading
CM Relevance Determines whether the object is
controlled by Configuration
Management

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 13 of 88
1.6. On tab “Basic Data 2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 14 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 15 of 88
Other Data Section Header
Product/Inspecti
on Memo
Number under which you have
stored a production or
inspection memo for the
material.
R Enter material description
Ind. Standard
Descr
Industry standard description O Enter if known
Page Format Page format of the materials
production or inspection memo.
O Enter if known
CAD Indicator This indicator shows that the object
(such as BOM or document) was
created or changed in a CAD
system. Data transfer in the SAP
system via CAD interface.
O Leave Blank
Basic Material Primary material or component O Leave Blank
Environment Section Header
DG ind. profile Alphanumeric key that uniquely
identifies the dangerous goods
profile.
O Choose appropriate key
Environmentally
Rlvt.
Identifies hazardous material O Leave blank
Highly viscous Indicator that shows if the material
is a highly viscous substance.
O leave blank
In bulk/liquid Indicator that shows if the
dangerous good is to be transported
in bulk.
O leave blank
Design
Document
assigned
Section Header
No link Indicates
• either that no drawings
are assigned to the
material
• or that several
drawings are assigned
to the material
O Check the box if appropriate
Drawing Section Header
Document Key identifying the document O leave blank
Document Type allows grouping of like documents O leave blank
Doc Vers version of the document O Leave Blank
Page Number O Leave Blank
Doc ch no O Leave Blank
Page Format O Leave Blank

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 16 of 88
No. Sheets O Leave Blank
Client Specific
Configuration
Section Header
Cross Plant CM Alphanumeric key uniquely
identifying the configurable material
O
Material is
configurable
Indicator that determines whether
the material is configurable
O If this indicator is set, you can assign a
variant class to the material, making it
possible to use it as a configurable
material
Variant Specifies that the material is a
variant of a configuration
material. This makes it
possible, for example, to
prefabricate frequently required
variants and to place them in
stock.
O Leave Blank
Configure
variant
Button to access variant
configuration
O Press button to access variant
configuration
Additional To enter additional information O Press button to access to enter
additional information
Enter or choose Classification Tab.
1.7. On pop up screen “Class type” select the appropriate entry and press enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 17 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 18 of 88
1.8. On screen “Classification”, enter the appropriate class and press the “Next Screen”
button (F8).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 19 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 20 of 88
1.9. On the tab “Sales: sales org 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 21 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 22 of 88
General Data Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Division Division grouping O Use pull down to select appropriate
entry
Sales Unit Unit of measure in which the
material is sold
O Enter a value in this field only if you
want to use a unit of measure differing
from the base unit of measure
Sales unit not
var.
Variable Sales unit not allowed
check box
O Leave unchecked if variable sales units
are required.
Unit of
measure grp.
Key that you can use for grouping
several units of measure.
O Use pull down to select appropriate
entry
X-distr. Chain
status
Cross-distribution-chain material
status. Indicates whether the
material may be used in individual
functions in Sales and Distribution
for all distribution chains.
entry
Valid from Date from which the cross-
distribution-chain material status is
valid.
entry
D chain-spec.
status
Distribution-chain-specific material
status. Indicates whether, for a
specific distribution chain, the
functions in Sales and Distribution.
entry
Valid from Date from which distr.-chain-spec.
entry
Delivering
plant
Delivering plant from which
goods are delivered to the
customer.
entry
Mat’l grp Material group O Use pull down to select appropriate
entry
Cash discount Cash discount indicator O Check box if applicable
Conditions Button to access pricing conditions O Use pull down to select appropriate
entry
Tax Data Section Header
Tax
Classification
Tax classification for a particular
country
R Enter using pull down menu.
Quantity
Stipulations
Section Header
Min. order qty Minimum order quantity in base unit
of measure
entry
Min dely qty Minimum delivery quantity in delivery
note processing
entry
Delivery unit Delivery unit Only exact multiples of
this number can be delivered.
entry
Rounding
profile
Rounding profile. Key that the
system uses to adjust the order
proposal quantity to deliverable units.
entry

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 23 of 88
Enter.
1.10. On the tab “Sales: Sales Org. 2” enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 24 of 88
Grouping
Terms
Section Heading
Mat’l Statistics
grp
Material statistics group for this
material and helps determine which
data the system updates in the
logistics information system.
O Enter from pull down menu if
appropriate
Material
pricing grp
Material Pricing Group. A way of
grouping materials to which you want
to apply the same conditions.
O Enter from pull down menu
Volume rebate
group
Volume rebate group O Enter from pull down menu
Acct.
assignment
grp
Account assignment group for this
material
Gen. Item cat.
Grp
General item category group O Defaults in from item category group
and sales document type
Item category
grp
Item category group from material
master
O Defaults in from item category group
Pricing ref.
Material
Pricing reference material. Material
master record that the system uses
as a reference for pricing purposes.
Product
hierarchy
determination.
Commission
group
Commission group to which the
Material
Groups
Section header
Material group
1- 5
Additional custom groupings that can
be used for analysis
O Enter as appropriate
Product
attributes
Section header
Product
attribute 1 - 10
ID check box for product attributes.
Can be used to correlate with ship to
party’s acceptable attributes
O Check as appropriate
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 25 of 88
1.11. On the tab “Sales: General/Plant ” enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 26 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 27 of 88
Base unit of
measure
Base unit of measure R Defaults in from basic data
Replacement
part
Indicator that specifies whether the
material can be a replacement part,
must be a replacement part, or is not
a replacement part.
O Use Pull down menu
Gross weight Gross weight R Defaults in from basic data
Discount in
kind
Material qualifies for discount in kind.
Specifies whether and for what areas
the material qualifies for a discount in
kind.
O Use pull down menu
Net weight Net weight R Defaults in from basic data
Material freight
grp
Material freight group O Use pull down menu
Availability
check
Checking group for availability
check. Specifies whether and how
the system checks availability and
generates requirements for
materials planning or Flexible
Planning.
R Use pull down menu
Appr. Batch
rec. req.
Indicator: Approved batch record
required
O Check box as required
Batch
management
Batch management requirement
indicator
Shipping data
(Times on
days)
Section header
Trans grp Transportation group R Use pull down menu
Loading grp Loading group R Use pull down menu
Setup time Shipping setup time O Enter an appropriate value
Proc. time Shipping processing time O Enter an appropriate value
Base qty Base quantity for capacity planning in
shipping Quantity to which the
shipping processing time refers.
O Enter an appropriate value
Packaging
material data
Section header
Mat. Grp
Pack. matls
Material group: shipping materials.
Groups together materials which
require similar shipping materials.
General plant
parameters
Section header
Neg. stocks Negative stocks allowed in plant O Check box as appropriate
Profit center Profit center O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of material in plant O Use pull down menu
Ext. customer
repl.
Button to allow access to make
changes to External customer
O Select if appropriate

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 28 of 88
parameters replenishment parameters
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 29 of 88
1.12. On tab “Foreign trade export”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 30 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 31 of 88
Foreign
Trade Data
Section Heading
Comm./Imp.
Code No.
Commodity code / Import code
number for foreign trade
O Select from pull down list if needed
Export / Import
Group
Export/import material group O Select from pull down list if needed
CAS number
(pharm)
CAS number for pharmaceutical
products in foreign trade
PRODCOM
no.
Production statistics: PRODCOM
Alphanumeric key which allows a
systematic categorization of goods
for production statistics.
Origin/EU
Market
organization/
Preferences
Section Heading
Country of
Origin
Country of Origin O Select from pull down list if needed
Region of
Origin
Region in Country of Origin O Select from pull down list if needed
CAP product
list no.
CAP: Number of CAP products list
This field contains the number of the
material in the EU market products
group list.
CAP prod.
Group
Common Agricultural Policy: CAP
products group-Foreign Trade
Preference
Status
Identifies materials as authorized for
special treatment
Vendor Decl
Status
Vendor declaration status O Select from pull down list if needed
Customs tariff
prefs
Button to access customs tariff
preference data
Legal Control Section Heading
Exemption
Certificate
Exemption certificate indicator O Select from pull down list if needed
Exemption
cert. No.
Exemption certificate number O Enter exemption number if applicable
Iss. date of ex.
Cert.
Issue date of the exemption
certificate for this material
C Enter date if certificate entered
Military Goods Military goods indicator O Use if material is subject to regulations
for military goods
Legal Control Button to access settings for legal
control of shipments
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 32 of 88
1.13. On the tab “Sales text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages and press enter.
1.14. On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
<<< Screen print goes here >>>
Base Unit of
Measure
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM
and required by Vendor
Var. Oun Variable order unit active O Use pull down if appropriate
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchasing this
Material
R Enter or select from pull down list
Material Group Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Plant sp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.
Determines availability of Material for
purchase or production
O Blank indicates available
Valid from Date from which the plant-specific
Tax Ind. F.
material
Identifies taxable or tax free status O Use pull down menu
Discount in
kind
Indicates if material is eligible for a
discount in kind.
Material freight
group
Autom PO Allows PO to be created without
review during PR conversion
Batch
Management
Identifies the material as managed by
batch
O Check if appropriate
Purchasing
Values
Section Heading
Purchasing
Value Key
Identifies follow up intervals and
delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down
list
Other Data Section Heading
GR
Processing
time
Number of days required to inspect
and place in storage
O Enter number of days if relevant
Post to insp.
stock
Determines if materials received into
unrestricted or quality stock
O Set if relevant
Critical Part Identifies material as critical O Check box if appropriate
Quota Arr
Usage
Indicates functions where quota
arrangements apply to material
O Enter from pull down list if required
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO
issues
O Check box if appropriate
JIT sched.
Indicator
Indicator: Item relevant to JIT
delivery schedules

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 33 of 88
Mfr. Part
profile
Manufacturer part number profile O Use pull down menu
Mfr. Part
number
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu
Enter.
1.15. On tab “ Foreign trade import ”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
Foreign
Trade Data
Section Heading
Comm./Imp.
CodeNo
Export / Import
Group
CAS number
(pharm)
PRODCOM
no.
Origin/EU
Market
organization/
Preferences
Section Heading
Country of
Origin
Region of
Origin
CAP product
list no.
group list.
CAP prod.
Group
Preference
Status
special treatment
Vendor Decl
Status
Customs tariff
prefs
preference data
Exemption Exemption certificate indicator O Select from pull down list if needed

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 34 of 88
Certificate
Exemption
cert. No.
Iss. date of ex.
Cert.
for military goods
Enter.
1.16 On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages and press
enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 35 of 88
1.17 On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 36 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 37 of 88
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit of measure for
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
MRP Group The MRP group controls things
such as consumption of
Independent Requirements
R Select the applicable group from the
pull down menu
Purchasing grp Purchasing group O Use pull down menu
ABC indicator ABC indicator that classifies a
material as an A, B, or C part
according to its consumption
value.
Plant sp. Matl
status
Determines availability of Material
for purchase or production
MRP Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP /MPS to
be performed
R Often PD for lower level Materials
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
Planning time
fence
The planning time fence specifies
a period within which no automatic
changes are to be made to the
master plan.
O Enter value
Planning cycle Key that determines the day on
which the material is planned and
ordered.
MRP Controller Code for the person responsible
for MRP/MPS for this material
R Press F4 for list. Select desired code
from the list
Lot Size Data Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of Lot Sizing
that will occur.
R Enter EX for exact requirement
quantities, FX for Fixed lot size
production
Minimum lot size Minimum lot size O Enter value
Maximum lot size Maximum lot size O Enter value
Fixed Lot Size Quantity for each individual
Planned order, requisition, etc.
C Enter quantity to be planned when FX
is used for the Lot Size Key
Maximum stock
level
Maximum stock level allowed O Enter value
Ordering costs Costs incurred for each purchase
order
O Enter value
Storage costs
ind.
Indicator that specifies the storage
costs percentage the system uses
when calculating the lot size to
determine storage costs.
Assembly scrap
(%)
Percentage scrap that occurs
during production of the material if
the material is an assembly.
O Enter value

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 38 of 88
Takt time Takt time. If a requirement quantity
cannot be procured in a single lot,
you have to schedule several
receipts. In conjunction with the
overlap indicator in the lot size,
you can use the takt time to
specify that these receipts are
offset, that is, that they are
delayed by the takt time.
O Enter value
Rounding Profile Quantity to which the required
quantity must be rounded up
O Enter if production/order lots are
required to be in “increments of”
Rounding value Rounding value for purchase order
quantity. Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up the
procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Unit of measure
grp
Unit of measure group O Use pull down menu
MRP areas Section header
MRP areas Button to access and make
changes to MRP areas
O Select if necessary
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 39 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 40 of 88
Procurement Section Heading
Procurement
Type
Identifies the material as
purchased, produced in house, or
both
R Select from pull down menu Defaults in from the
material type.
Batch Entry Determines when, whether, and
how the batch for components is to
be entered in the production /
process order
Special
Procurement
Identifies inter plant items,
phantoms, or consignment
materials
Issue Stor.
Location
Location from which to issue /
receive material to / from
production
O Use if material is always issued /
received from / into the same location
Quota Arr.
Usage
Key specifying the business
processes for which quota
arrangements are active
Default supply
area
Proposed Supply Area in Material
Master Record. The supply area
is used as an interim storage area
on the shop floor which is used to
provide materials directly at the
production line.
O Select from pull down menu
Storage Loc for
EP
Storage location proposed for
receiving material obtained
externally
O Select from pull down list if the same
storage location is used for all receipts
of this material
JIT delivery
sched.
Item relevant to JIT delivery
schedules indicator
O Select from pull-down menu
Stock determin.
Group
Stock determination group O Select from pull down menu
Bulk Material Identifies material stored at the
work center (ex. Grease). When
set, this material is neither planned
nor costed
O Set only if bulk conditions apply
Co-Product Identifies a material that is
produced as a normal part of the
production of the ordered material.
This material has value.
O Set if material is to be valuated,
costed, and sold or used as a
component in another finished material
Joint production Button to access joint production
settings
Scheduling
In-House
Production
Number of days required to
produce the material in house,
regardless of the production
quantity
O Enter number of days if needed
GR Processing
Time
Number of days required for in
house processing after the goods
receipt has been posted (ex.
Quality inspection)
Sched. Margin
Key
Identifies the “float” times before
and after production
R Enter from Pulldown

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 41 of 88
Plnd Delivery
Time
Number of days required to obtain
material obtained externally
Planning
Calendar
Special calendar for use in
planning delivery cycles
O Use of deliveries can only occur on
specified days of the week
Net
requirements
calculation
Section Header
Safety stock Safety stock level O Enter a value if appropriate
Service level (%) Service level Percentage. The
system uses the service level to
calculate the safety stock.
O Enter a value if appropriate
Min. safety stock Minimum safety stock O Enter a value if appropriate
Coverage profile Range of coverage profile O Use pull down menu
Safety time ind. Safety time indicator O Use pull down menu
Safety time/act.
Cov.
Safety time/actual range of
coverage (in days)
STime period
profile
Period profile for safety time/actual
range of coverage

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 42 of 88
Enter

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 43 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 44 of 88
Forecast
Requirements
Section Heading
Period Indicator Specifies period types in which
forecasts are to be managed
O Select W (Weekly), M (Monthly), D,
(Daily) or P (Period from variant) if
used
Fiscal Year
Variant
Defines number of posting periods,
special period’s etc.
O Select from pull down if used. May
require additional configuration
Splitting Indicator Defines increment for further
breakdown of the forecast
O Select from pull down. Note: Must be
configured
Planning Section Heading
Strategy Group Identifies production group, e.g.,
Make to order, make to stock etc
O Select desired strategy from pull down
menu
Consumption
Mode
Identifies the time axis in which
independent requirements are
consumed
O Select from pull down Start with “2”
(backwards then
forwards)
Bwd
Consumption Per
Number of days in the past to
consume requirements
O Enter the desired number of days Suggest 999
Fwd
Consumption Per
Number of days in the future to
Mixed MRP Indicates whether material is
available for gross requirements
planning or subassembly planning
Planning Material Material whose planned
independent requirements the
system consumes
O Enter material number of planning
material
Planning Plant Identifier of the plant associated
with the planning material
O Enter Plant Id if applicable
Plng Conv.
Factor
Factor to convert this material’s
UOM to the planning material’s
UOM
Planning matl
Bunit
Business unit for this material N/A Cannot enter in this field
Availability
Check
Section Heading
Availability
Check
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are to be
used or individual Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02 (individual).
NOTE: This is the only required field
on this screen
Preference
depends upon
company
Tot. Repl. Lead
Time
Total lead time for finished
product, including production and
procurement along the longest
path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross project material O Use pull down menu
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 45 of 88
1.20 On tab “MRP4”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 46 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 47 of 88
BOM Explosion
/ Dependent
Requirements
Section Heading
Selection Method Key that determines how the BOM
will be selected
O Leave blank for quantity, 1 for
Explosion date, 2 for production
version
Component
Scrap %
% scrap when item is used as a
component
Individual/coll. Key defining whether individual or
collective requirements will be
used
O Leave blank for both
Requirements
group
Requires that all dependent
requirements for this material are
to be grouped together in one line
per time period
O Enter code from pull down if desired.
ProdVersions Button to access production
version settings
MRP dep.
requirements
MRP relevancy for dependent
requirements indicator. Controls
whether dependent requirements
are relevant to MRP or not.
Discontinued
Parts
Section Heading
Discontinuation
Ind.
Identifies if only this material is
discontinued or if all dependent
components are discontinued as
well
O Set when material is discontinued
Eff.-Out Date discontinuation is effective O Set when discontinuation indicator is
set
Follow-up Matl Material used as a replacement for
discontinued material
O Set when applicable
Repetitive
Manufacturing /
Assembly/Depl
oyment
Strategy
Section Heading
Repetitive mfg Allows material to be used in
repetitive manufacturing
O Set if needed
REM profile Key pointing to profile controlling
activities backflushing, movement
type to be used, etc
C Select from pull down if repetitive is
used
Action Control Defines sequence of actions
allowed for planned orders
O Select from pull down Requires
configuration
Fair share rule Fair share rule O Use pull down menu
Push distribution Push distribution indicator for
excess stock
Deployment
horizon
Deployment horizon in days O Enter value if necessary
Average plant
stock
Button to access average plant
stock information
Material memo Button to enter a memo for this O Select if appropriate

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 48 of 88
material
Storage
location MRP
Section header
SLoc MRP
indicator
Storage location MRP indicator
used to exclude storage locations
from material requirements
planning at plant level.
Spec. proc.
Type. Sloc
Special procurement type at
storage location level.Defines the
procurement type for the material
more precisely at storage
location level.
Reorder point Reorder point for storage location
MRP
O Enter value if necessary
Replenishment
qty
Replenishment quantity for storage
location MRP

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 49 of 88
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 50 of 88
1.21 On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 51 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 52 of 88
General data Section header
Base unit of
measure
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
Forecast
model
Indicator that defines on which
forecast model the system bases its
calculation of future requirements of
the material.
R Use pull down to change default value
Period
indicator
Indicator specifying the periods in
which the material's consumption
values and forecast values are
managed.
Lasr forecast Date on which the system carried out
the last forecast.
O Display field only
Fiscal year
variant
Fiscal year variant O Use pull down menu
RefMatl:
consumption
Reference material for consumption.
The system uses the consumption
data of this material for the forecast.
RefPlant
consumption
Reference plant for consumption.
Plant of the reference material on
whose consumption data the material
forecast is based.
Date to Date until which the consumption
data of the reference material is used
for the material forecast.
Multiplier Multiplier for reference material for
consumption Determines how much
of the consumption quantity of the
reference material should be used
O Enter appropriate value between 0 and
1.
Number of
periods
required
Section header
Historical
periods
Number of historical periods used in
the forecast
R Change default value if desired
Forecast
periods
Number of periods for which a
forecast should be created
Periods per
season
Number of periods per seasonal
cycle
O Enter value if desired
Initialization
pds
Number of historical period values to
be used for initialization
Fixed periods Number of periods for which the
system will not recalculate the
forecast values in the next forecast.
Control data Section header
Initialization Indicator which specifies that the
system should initialize a forecast
model.
Tracking limit Tracking limit to check forecast R Change default value if desired

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 53 of 88
accuracy
Reset
automatically
Reset forecast model automatically if
tracking limit is exceeded
O Check box if necessary
Model
selection
Indicator used in forecast model
selection that specifies how the
system checks the values
Selection
procedure
This procedure defines how the
system selects the optimum forecast
model.
Param
optimization
Indicator that causes the system to
optimize the smoothing factors
needed by the given forecast model.
Optimization
level
Specifies the increment by which the
system optimizes the forecast
parameters.
Weighting
group
Weighting group for weighted moving
average model
Correction
factors
Indicator: take correction factors into
account. Set this indicator if the
correction factors defined in
customizing are to be used in the
calculation of the forecast values.
Alpha factor The alpha factor is the smoothing
factor for the basic value..
Beta factor The beta factor is the smoothing
factor for the trend value
Gamma factor The gamma factor is the smoothing
factor for the seasonal index
Delta factor The delta factor is the smoothing
factor for the mean absolute
deviation
Execute
forecast
Button to execute the forecast O Select if desired
Forecast
values
Button to filter forecast values O Select if desired
Consumption
vals
Button to filter consumption values O Select if desired

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 54 of 88
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 55 of 88
1.22 On tab “Work Scheduling”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 56 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 57 of 88
General Data Section header
Base unit of
measure
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
Unit of Issue Unit of Measure for Goods Issue O Enter ONLY if different from Base
(Standard/Inventory) UOM
Leave Blank unless
absolutely required
Production
Unit
Unit of measure for production O Enter production UOM only if different
from Base (Standard/Inventory) UOM
Leave Blank unless
absolutely required
P-S matl
status
Plant specific material status O Use pull down menu
Production
Scheduler
Person / Group responsible for this
material at this plant
O Select from pull down menu (F4 or
click on boxed down arrow
Issue Storage
Location
Location from which this material is to
be issued
O Use of you will always issue from the sam
location for this plant
Prod. Sched
profile
Production scheduling profile O Use pull down menu
Material group Group of materials for transition
matrix
O Enter appropriate value
Serial no.
profile
Overall profile Overall profile for order change
management
Inspection
stock
Identifies material that is to be
received into Inspection stock instead
of Unrestricted stock
O Click “on” if quality inspection is
required
Critical part Indicator that this is a critical part O Chack box if desired
ProdVersions Button to access production version
settings
O Select if desired
Batch rec.req. Indicator: Approved batch record
required
O Check box is desired
Batch entry Determination of batch entry in the
production/process order Defines
when batches have to be determined
when using the PP/WM interface.
Batch
Management
managed by batch
O Click “on” if batch management
desired.
Requires all
inventory
transactions to be
done using batch
identification.
Tolerance
Data
Section header
Under delivery
Tolerance
Percentage by which production
quantities may be under reported
O Enter percentage if desired
Over delivery
Tolerance
quantities may be over reported
Unltd Over
delivery
Allows an unlimited quantity to be
received against a production order
O Click “on” if an unlimited production
quantity is desired.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 58 of 88
In-house
production
time in days
Section header
Setup time Setup and teardown time. Specifies
the number of workdays needed to
set up and tear down the various
work centers where the material is
processed.
O Enter value if necessary Dependent on lot
size
Interoperation Interoperation time. Specifies the
number of workdays required for the
transition of a produced material
between work centers or work center
groups.
size
Processing
time
Processing time. Specifies the time
needed to process the material in the
operations at the different work
centers.
size
Base quantity Base quantity. Quantity to which the
in-house production time and the
processing time of the material
relate.
size
InhseProd
Time
In-house production time
independent of lot size
R Enter value if different from default
value
Independent of lot
size
Enter.
1.23 On tab “Prod. resources/tools”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
Base unit of
measure
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
Leave Blank unless
absolutely required
Plant-sp. matl
status
Load records Create load records for prod.
resources/tools Indicator which
controls whether requirements
records for production resources/
tools are written within scheduling.
Task list
usage
Production resource/tool. Controls in
which task lists the production
resources/tools may be used.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 59 of 88
Grouping key
1
Grouping key 1 for production
resources/tools
Grouping key
2
resources/tools
Default
values for
task list
assignment
(not
changeable)
Section header
Control key Control key for management of
production resources/tools
O Use pull down menu. Check box if no
changes are to be allowed
Standard text
key
Standard text key for production
resources/tools
Quantity
formula
Formula for calculating the total
quantity of production
resources/tools.
changes are to be allowed wn menu
Usage value
formula
usage value of a production
resource/tool.
changes are to be allowed down menu
Ref. Date for
start
Reference date to start of production
resource/tool usage
R Use pull down menu to change the
default value. Check box if no changes
are to be allowed down menu
Offset to start Offset between the reference date
and the start of production
resource/tool (PRT) usage.
O Enter value if necessary. Check box if
no changes are to be allowed
Ref. Date for
finish
Reference date for end of production
resource/tool usage
R Use pull down menu to change default
value. Check box if no changes are to
be allowed down menu
Offset to finish Offset between the reference date
and the finish of the production
resource/tool usage.
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 60 of 88
1.24 On tab “Plant data/stor. 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 61 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 62 of 88
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull down list Defaults from Basic
Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is issued O Enter Unit of Issue or select from pull
down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Picking area Picking area for lean WM O Use pull down menu
Temp.
Conditions
Temperature at which material
should be stored
O Enter code for temp condition or select
from pull down menu
Storage
Condition(s)
Indicates which storage conditions
are required for this material
O Enter storage code or select from pull
down menu
Container
reqmt(s)
Key for which kind of container the
material must be stored in
O Enter container code or select from pull
down menu
Haz. Material
number
Identifies material as HAZMAT and
assigns HAZMAT code
O Enter HAZMAT number or select from
pull down menu
CC phys. Inv. nd. Indicates Cycle Counting Method O Enter Cycle Count code, or select from
pull down menu
CC Fixed Indicates that cycle counting
indicator can’t be changed by ABC
Analysis
O Check box if material is always to
remain in specified category
Number of GR
slips
Number of GR slips to be printed O Enter value if appropriate
Label type Label type determines how labels
are created
Lab form Label form. Determines size and
layout of label
Appr. Batch rec.
req.
Approved batch record indicator
required
Batch
Management
Specifies whether the material is
managed in batches
O Check box if material is managed in
batches
Shelf Life Data Section Heading
Max. Storage
Period
Maximum period which material
can be stored
O Enter maximum period This number is for
information only and
has no functional
use
Time Unit Unit in which the period is
measured
O Enter unit or select from pull down
menu
Min. Rem. Shelf
Life
Number of days material needs to
be kept for the system to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total Shelf Life Number of days material will keep
in total
O Enter number of days
Period ind. For
SLED
Period indicator for shelf life
expiration date
O Use pull down to change default value
Rounding rule
SLED
Rounding rule for calculation of
shelf life expiration date
Storage
percentage
Storage percentage. Percentage
specifying how much of the
minimum remaining shelf life must
be left if the material is to be sent
O Enter a value as necessary

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 63 of 88
to another plant
Enter.
1.25 On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Weight/volume Section Heading
Gross weight Gross weight O Defaults in from basic data view
Weight unit Unit of weight O Defaults in from basic data view

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 64 of 88
Net weight Net weight O Defaults in from basic data view
Volume Volume O Defaults in from basic data view
Volume unit Unit of volume O Defaults in from basic data view
Size/dimensions Size dimensions O Defaults in from basic data view
General plant
parameters
Section header
Neg. stocks in
plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant O Check box as appropriate
Log. Handling
group
Logistics handling group for
workload calculation
Serial No. profile Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of material in
plant
Stock determin.
Group
The stock determination group
combined with the Stock
Determination Rule at plant level
create a key for the stock
determination strategy.
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 65 of 88
1.26 On tab “Warehouse mgmt 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
Base Unit of
measure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Hazardous
material
Hazardous material number O Enter or defaults from Basic data View
WM unit Warehouse unit of measure O if different from base unit of measure
Unit of issue Units that material is issued in O Enter or defaults from Storage view
Gross weight gross weight of material O enter or defaults from Basic data view
Volume Volume of material O defaults from Basic data View
Proposed UoM
from Material
Unit of measure to be used in the
warehouse
O Enter if known

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 66 of 88
Capacity usage Capacity used by material O Enter if known
Picking storage
type
Storage type used in rough-cut
planning and detailed planning
O Enter if known
Appr. batch rec.
req.
Goods receipt from production can
only be made after the batch has
been approved
O Indicator button on/ off
Batch
Management
managed in batches
Storage
strategies
Section header
Stock Removal Material is to be removed from
storage
O Enter if known
Stock
placement
Material is to be placed in storage O Enter if known
Storage section Section where material is to be
stored
O Enter if known
Bulk storage Classifies materials according to the
way they are stored in a bulk storage
area
O Enter if known
Special
movement
Special movement is allowed for this
material
Message to IM Automatic message sent to inventory
management
2-step picking Key that determines whether 2-step
picking will be used or not for a
material.
Allow addn to
stock
Material can be added to stock if it
has particular characteristics.
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 67 of 88
1.27 On tab “Warehouse mgmt 2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
Palletization
data
Section header
LE quantity Loading equipment quantity. O The system uses this quantity to pack
a quantity of material into a location
or loading devices
Repeat for up to
three pallet types
Un Unit of Measure for the LE Quantity O If LE quantity is entered then Un
must be entered.
SUT Storage unit type O Use pull down menu
Storage bin
stock
Section header
Storage Bin Smallest addressable unit in a
warehouse.
Picking area Picking area O Use pull down menu
Maximum. bin
quantity.
Largest qty. that may be stored in a
storage bin of this storage type.
Control quantity Control quantity threshold value O Enter value if necessary
Minimum. bin
quantity.
Smallest qty. that may be stored in a
O Key that is used to classify storage
units
O
Replenishment
qty
Replenishment quantity O Enter value if necessary
Rounding Qty. The requested qty. is rounded down O Enter value if necessary

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 68 of 88
to this qty. when materials are picked
from this st. type.
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 69 of 88
1.28 On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 70 of 88
Base Unit of
measure
Post to insp. stock Determines if materials received into
O Set if relevant
QM material auth. Material Authorization Group for
Activities in QM
Documentation
reqd
Documentation is required O Check box if required
GR processing
time
Goods receipt processing time in
days
Inspection interval Interval until next recurring
inspection
Catalog profile Catalog Profile. Key of the
catalog profile that is to form the
basis of the maintenance
notification or quality notification.
Plant-sp. matl
status
Procurement
data
Section header
QM procurement
activ
Indicator to activate QM in
procurement
O Check box if desired
QM control key Control Key for Quality Management
in Procurement
Certificate type Determines the content of a quality
certificate
Target QM system Required QM system for vendor O Use pull down menu
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 71 of 88
1.29 On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 72 of 88
Base Unit of
Measure
Data.
Valuation
Category
Indicates whether stocks are
valuated together or separately
O (Split Valuation)
Division O Use pull down menu
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation Class Defines which group of G/L
accounts material is assigned
R Select from pull down menu to change
default value
VC Sales order
stk
Valuation Class for Sales Order
Stock. Default value for the
valuation class for valuated sales
order stocks of the material.
Proj. stk val.
Class
Valuation Class for Project Stock.
Default value for the valuation
class for valuated project stocks of
the material.
Price Control Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or moving
average price
R ‘S’ = Standard Pricing
‘V’ – Moving Average Price
Defaults in from the
material type.
Price Unit Number of units price refers to R Enter price unit
Mov. Avg. Price Moving average price of the
material
O Enter price
Standard Price If price control is set to standard
price, then this is the value of the
standard price
O Enter price
Total Stock Total quantity of all valuated stock C Display only
Total Value Total Value of stock C Generated by multiplying standard
price by total stock
Future price Future price for material valuation O Enter price
Valid from Validity date for future price O Enter date
Previous
period/year
Button to access previous period
data
O Select if desired
Std cost estimate Button to access standard cost
estimate
O Select if desired
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 73 of 88
1.31 On tab “Accounting 2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Determination
of lowest value
Section Heading
Tax price 1 Valuation price based on tax law:
level 1
O Enter value Repeat for up to
three prices
Commercial
price 1
Valuation price based on
commercial law: level 1
three prices
Devaluation ind. Lowest value: devaluation
indicator
O Enter value
Price unit Price unit for valuation prices
based on tax/commercial law
O Enter value
LIFO data Section header

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 74 of 88
LIFO/FIFO-
relevant
Determines whether the material
or the movement type is relevant
to LIFO and FIFO valuation.
LIFO pool Pool number for LIFO valuation O Use pull down menu
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 75 of 88
1.32 On tab “Costing 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 76 of 88
General data Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Data.
No costing Indicator that specifies whether a
cost estimate or a procurement
alternative can be created for a
material.
With qty
structure
Material is costed with quantity
structure
Origin group Origin Group as Subdivision of
Cost Element
Material origin Material related origin O Check box if desired
Overhead group Costing overhead group O Use pull down menu
Plant-sp. matl
status
Quantity
structure data
Section data
Alternative BOM An alternative BOM in a BOM
group
O Enter value
BOM usage This key defines the area where
the BOM can be used.
Group Key for task list group O Use pull down menu
Group counter Group counter. This key and the
task list group uniquely identify a
task list
O Enter value
Task list type Task list type. Key which
classifies task lists according to
their functionality
Sp. Procurement
type
Special Procurement Type for
Costing
Costing lot size Costing lot size. Lot size of the
costed object (such as a material
or sales order) used in the product
cost estimate.
O Enter value
Co-product Indicator you can use to specify
that the material can also be used
as a co-product.
Fxd price Indicates the material as a fixed
price co-product.
settings
O Select if desired

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 77 of 88
Versions Button to access versions O Select if desired
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 78 of 88

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 79 of 88
Standard cost
estimate
Section header
Cost estimate Buttons to select cost estimate
time frame
O Select Current, Future or Previous
period/fiscal year
Planned price Planned price from the respective
standard cost estimate
O Enter value
Planned prices Section header
Planned price1 Future Planned Price 1. Price
that the system can take as a
basis for product costing
O Enter value Repeat for price 2
and price 3 if
desired
Planned price
date 1
Date from Which Future Planned
Price 1 Is Valid
O Enter date Repeat for date 2
and date 3 if
desired
Valuation data Section header
default value
VC Sales order
stk
Proj. stk val.
Class
the material.
average price
material type.
Price unit Number of units price refers to R Defaulted by system
material
R Defaults in from accounting view
standard price
Enter.
1.34 On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this material in this
plant:
Enter.
1.35 On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this storage location:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 80 of 88
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
1.36 To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (l) Logistics>Material Management>Material master>Material>Create (General)
> Immediately
(m) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools > Prod.
(n) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material Master>Material >
Create(General)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 81 of 88
1.37 On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
O Leave blank. System will default in the
value stored for this material
Material Type Group to which material is assigned. O Leave blank. System will default in the
Copy From
Material:
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
Press Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 82 of 88
1.38 On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the screen(s) to be
added.
Enter.
1.39 On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 83 of 88
Organization
al Levels
Section Header
Storage
Location
menu
view selected
view selected
master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 84 of 88
Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
1.40 To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (o) Logistics>Material Management>Material master>Material>Create (General)
> Immediately
(p) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools > Prod.
(q) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material Master>Material >
Create(General)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 85 of 88
1.41 On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
O Leave blank. System will default in the
Material Type Group to which material is assigned. O Leave blank. System will default in the
Copy From
Material:
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
Press Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 86 of 88
1.41 On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the basic data views.
Enter.
1.42 On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other information in
the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 87 of 88
Organization
al Levels
Section Header
Storage
Location
menu
view selected
view selected
master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 88 of 88
Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM02_Change Material Master(Classification View)
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 8
OVERVIEW
Trigger:
Materials need to be extended Classification view in order to store the batch related information for
those materials.
Manual extension of Classification view
there.
Pre-requisite for Classification View: Material Master classification is already extended for the material.
Material Enter Material number data to be changed in classification view.
Material Classification view is changed N/A
Tips and Tricks:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 8
Procedural Steps
Via Menus
(a) Logistics Material Management  Material master Material  Change
(General)  Immediate
1.2. On screen “Change Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 8
populated
automatically
Change
Number
Change Number O Change number if any to track the
history
Press Enter or click on Enter Green
button
Conditional)
1.3. On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes (classification)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 8
1.4. On screen “Classification”, edit information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Assignment s
Class Class Name R Select appropriate class from the list
Standard class Standard class O Whether class is standard or not to

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 8
access all information
Status Status of the class C Value is derived automatically from the
class master
Icon Icon C This value is based on the status
value.
Itm Sort Item C Sorting/sequence number
Press Enter key.
Conditional)
1.5. Characteristics pertains to the class will be shown in General tab page

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 8

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 8
1.6. To Delete class : select the class which is to be deleted and click on icon
1.7. To add more classes, click on icon.
1.8. Steps after modifying/changing data on the screens
After modifying all required data, select the Save button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM02_Change Material Master
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
• A request to immediately change one or more fields in the material master views
Fields within the material master can be added and maintained after the initial creation process. Some fields cannot be changed
after creation (i.e. material description) and some should not be changed without proper precautions.
To change a material master record, the data for the view the user wants to change must already be maintained.
Note that to add a view or extend a material to a new plant, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the
“Change Material” transaction.
Input-Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Material Master View (s) changed Chosen view in Material Master will change
Tips and Tricks
When selecting view for change, it is possible to avoid time and effort, by clicking on right mouse button
and use “Select All” rather than indicating each view button
When changing material master views you can proceed in a linear fashion between views by pressing
“Enter” key or pressing Check mark key. By pressing the view tabs you can control progression through
views as per your preference.
The Views that you use will drive the “Organizational level” pop-up window and it’s fields.
Views:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
• Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new material. Select ‘View
selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.
• Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new material. Select ‘Org.
levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access ‘Change Material’ by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material master>Material>Change >
Immediately
resources/tools > Material > Change>Immediately
(c) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Master Data>Products>Material >Trading
Goods > Change
(d) Logistics>Logistics Execution >Master Data>Material>Material > Change>
Immediately
(e) Logistics>Customer Service> Technical Objects> Material>Change
(f) Logistics>Quality Management Test Equipment Management> Test
Equipment > Material >Change
(g) Logistics>Project Systems> Basic data> Material master>Material>Change
1.2. On screen ‘Change Material: Initial screen’: enter information in table below:
Material Material number R Enter the material number if known
or search via matchcode
Change
Number
Unique number used to identify a
change master record
O Enter number if required
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
1.3. On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the screens desired.
Press Enter.
1.4 On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels”: enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
Note: The information required will depend upon which views were selected.
Organization
al Levels
Section Header
Storage
Location
menu
view selected
view selected
master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
Enter.
1.5 On subsequent screens, make the necessary changes.
1.6 Save the revised material master using the “Save” button or use “Ctrl S”.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM03_Display Material Master(Classification View)
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
OVERVIEW
Trigger:
Materials need to be displayed Classification view in order to see/display the batch related
information for those materials.
Manual Classification view
there.
Material Enter Material number to be displayed classification view.
Material Classification view is displayed N/A
Tips and Tricks:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus
Logistics Material Management  Material master  Material  Display 
Display Current
1.2. On screen “Display Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
populated
automatically
Press Enter or click on Enter Green
button

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Conditional)
1.3. On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes (classification)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
1.4. Select the required class typem(023) from the following displayed screen.
1.5. On screen “Classification”, fields are displayed as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
Assignment s
Class Class Name D Display only
Standard class Standard class D Display only
Status Status of the class D Display only
Icon Icon D Display only
Itm Sort Item D Display only
Conditional)
1.6. To exit from the screen, click on exit button or press Shift+F3 keys.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM03_Display Material Master
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
Need to view current material master data for one material.
A material master record can be displayed so that a user has access to see detailed information without having the authority to
change it.
View At least one view (for example, Basic Data, Sales, Accounting, MRP, etc.) must be
selected
Information about the material
Tips and Tricks
• If the same values are used frequently, it will be faster to access the material master data by
setting up defaults. Default values can be set up for Industry Sector, Views and Organizational
levels. These defaults are set from the MM03 initial screen, from the menu selection “Defaults”.
• If all views should be displayed, it is faster to clicking on right mouse button and use “Select All”
(or press the “Select All” icon) rather than clicking on each view button.
• To display a material for a specific date, please use Display Material Master by Key Date,
transaction MM19. This transaction will show the fields associated with the material on the
entered, key date.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
a) Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Material Master>Material>Display >
Display current
b) Logistics>Materials Management>Inventory Management>Environment>
information>Material
c) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Material Master > Material > Display
> Display current
d) Logistics > Plant Maintenance > Technical Objects > Material > Display
e) Logistics > Customer Service > Technical Objects > Material > Display
f) Logistics > Quality Management > Quality Planning > Logistics Master Data
> Material > Display
g) Logistics > Project System > Basic Data > Master Data > Material > Display
1.2. On screen “Display Material (Initial Screen)”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:
Material Material number R Material known or via matchcode
1.3. On the pop-up screen “Select View(s)”: enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Select View View or views that contain the
information to be displayed
R Select the appropriate view(s)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
1.4. On the pop-up screen “Organizational Levels”, enter the appropriate information in table below
(the system will determine which organizational levels are appropriate for the views that have
been selected):
Plant Plant number where material is
located
C Plant number known or via matchcode
search
Storage
Location
Location where material is stored C Enter storage location if known If you are looking
for storage location
specific
information, then
you will be required
to enter the storage
location.
Valuation
Type
How material is valued C Leave blank - will default from
Materials Master
This field is only
used when a
material is split
valued.
Sales org. The organizational unit that is
responsible for selling the material
C Enter the appropriate sales org., if you
want to see the Sales information
Distr. channel The way in which the material
reaches the customer
C Enter the appropriate Distribution
channel if you want to see the Sales
information.
Enter Press enter or click on the check
mark
R Will display view you have chosen or
Basic data if you chose more than one
view. It is then possible to tab to the
specific view of current interest.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
1.5 On the screen “Display Material <material number you entered> (Material type
of the material you entered); you may do the following:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
• Select the tab associated with the view of information you wish to check. Scroll back and forward arrows
appear in the upper right-hand corner of the table view. Alternately, a list of views, which exist for the
material, can be seen by pressing on right most arrow. You can navigate to appropriate view via
selecting from this list.
• If you wish to see the defined alternate units of measure, Material descriptions in other languages, Basic
data text, Inspection Text, or Internal Comments that exist for the material, press the “Additional Data”
button. Press the button “Main data” to return to the views.
• If you wish to review the changes that have been made to this material, select from the menu,
Environment > Display Changes. Double-click on the appropriate date, and you will know who changed
which fields on what date and at what time, for this material.
• If you wish to check a different material, you can either press the button “Other Material”, or green arrow
back to the initial screen.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM06_ Flagging a Material for Deletion
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
A material has been discontinued, obsolete, or is no longer required.
Materials should be flagged for deletion when requirements no longer exist and the material number is
obsolete.
Material flagged for deletion remains searchable in SAP and can be un-flagged for use, if needed. This
will require Quality Operations approval for use.
Plant Plant identification/designation
Tips and Tricks
Material can be flagged for all plants, one plant, at the storage location level, valuation type, sales
organization, distribution channel, warehouse, and storage type.
Flagging the material at the material level and plant level will mark all other levels for deletion.
Procedural Steps

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Prerequisites
On MM02 (material Master Change), material must have the plant material status set to OM
(obsolete material) and have no stock in inventory. Once material is set to OM no activity can happen
on the material unless the plant specific status has is changed to a valid status.
Via Menus Logistics>Equipment and Tools Management> Master data> Material> Flag for
Deletion> MM06
Logistics>Materials Management> Material Master> Material> Flag for Deletion>
MM06
Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data> Material> Material> Flag for
Deletion> MM06
Logistics>Production-Process> Process Order> Environment> Master Data>
Material Master> Material> Flag for deletion> MM06
Accounting> Project System> Documents> Document Management System>
Environment> Bills of material> Environment> Material Master> Flag for Deletion>
MM06
1.2. On screen “Flag Material for Deletion: initial screen” (MM06) enter information as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Field Name Description Req.
Opt.
Cond.
User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Number R Enter material to be flagged for
deletion
Plant Designation uniquely identifying a
plant
O Typically
materials are
flagged at the
plant level for
deletion
Stor. Location Number of location where the
material is stored
O
Valuation Type Valuation Number for material O
Sales Org. Unit responsible for the sale of the
item
O
Distr. Channel Channel is which material reaches
the customer
O
Warehouse No. Physical warehouse where the O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
material is stored
Storage Type Sub division of the warehouse O
Change Number Change master record number O
Press enter
1.3. On screen “Flag Material for Deletion: Data Screen”(MM06); Check the box
corresponding to the level at which you want the material flagged for deletion.
Field Name Description Req.
Opt.
Cond.
User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Number O
Plant Designation uniquely identifying a
plant
O Typically materials are flagged at
the plant level for deletion
Stor. Location Number of location where the
material is stored
O
Valuation Type Valuation Number for material O
Sales Org. Unit responsible for the sale of the
item
O
Distr. Channel Channel is which material reaches
the customer
O
Warehouse No. Physical warehouse where the
material is stored
O
Storage Type Sub division of the warehouse O
Change Number Change master record number O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
Up on saving you will receive a message saying that
Material is now flagged for deletion.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM11_Schedule Creation of Material
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 60
Overview
Trigger:
A request to schedule future Creation of material masters
Creation of Material Masters can be scheduled at a Key date in future.
department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP, and Warehouse) can be added at a later time by extending the
material. As additional plants are added, a material will need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are to be carried out for that
PRT.
Material Required only if using external numbers. Leave blank if using SAP internal
numbering (recommended)
Industry Sector Enter sector most describing this particular business (example: C for Chemical Use
F4 for list of choices
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select the material type for the material you are
creating. For example, FHMI for Prod. Resources/tools, ROH for Raw Materials,
FERT for Finished Products, etc.
Schedule date Date for which Material Creation is scheduled for
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, LB, GA) Defaults if Engineering
View exists
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional information will be required
New Material Master is scheduled for creation

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 60
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a material
description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be copied
over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material type
will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical MRP
data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values (can be
overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an MRP controller
looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new
materials as they are created.
Views:
• Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new material.
• Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
• Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new material.
• Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
Executing transaction MM13 should activate scheduled creation of Material Masters.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 60
Procedure Steps
Via Menus Logistics > Materials Management > Material Master > Material > Create
(General) > Schedule
1.2. On ‘Schedule Creation of Material: Initial screen’; enter information in the fields as
Material Key identifying material O Leave blank - enter only if external
numbering used
Recommend internal
numbering
Industry
Sector
R Enter code or select from pull down
menu
Material Type Group to which material is assigned. R Select from the Pull Down Menu Among other things,
Material type
controls views
presented, number
ranges etc.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 60
Copy From
Material:
Chge sched.
for
Date on which change is scheduled R Enter date in the future for when
change is required
Change
number
change to a material master record
O Enter number if required See Engineering
Change
Management
Press Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 60
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Press Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 60
1.4. On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Organization
al Levels
Section Header
Storage
Location
menu
view selected
view selected
material master record.
master record.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 60
Enter.
1.5. On screen “Schedule Creation of Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 60
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
General Data Section Header
Base Unit of
Measure
Units of measure in which stocks of
the material are managed
R Enter UOM or select from pull down list
Material Group Key allowing grouping of same or
similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old Material
Number
Legacy system material number, or,
previous SAP material master number
External
Material Group
Assigning the material an external
group
Division Key used in determining sales and
business areas
O Enter division ID, or select from pull
down list
Lab. / Office Key/ID. for Person / Group
responsible for material
Product
Allocation
Allows grouping of materials by
characteristics
Product
Hierarchy
determination.
X Plant Matl
Status
Indicates whether the material may
be used within different departments
Valid from Date from which the cross-plant
Assign effect.
vals.
Indicates whether you can assign
values to the effectivity parameters or
override the date, when you explode
an assembly or a finished product.
GenItemCat
Group
Materials grouping that helps the
system to determine item categories
during sales document processing.
Dimensions /
EANs
Section Heading
Gross Weight Gross Wt of Material O Enter Gross weight
Weight Unit UOM for net / gross wt C Enter UOM or select from pull down list
under Mass
Net Weight Net wt. Of material O Enter net weight
Volume Space material occupies per unit of
volume
Volume Unit UOM relevant to Volume C Enter or select from Volume pull down
list
Size /
Dimensions
free form text O Enter if appropriate
EAN/UPC International article number O Enter if appropriate
EAN Category used to allow the system to assign an
EAN
Packaging
Material Data
Section Heading
Matl grp Pack. Material group: shipping materials O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 60
matls
Basic Data
Texts
Section Heading
Languages
maintained
The number of languages maintained
for basic data texts
O
Basic data text Button to access data texts O Enter additional information for
descriptions, Uof M, EAN’s,
Documents, internal comments,
inspections, and consumption
Configuration
Method
Section Heading
CM Relevance Determines whether the object is
controlled by Configuration
Management

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 60
1.6. On tab “Basic Data 2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 60
Other Data Section Header
Product/Inspecti
on Memo
Number under which you have
stored a production or
inspection memo for the
material.
R Enter material description
Ind. Standard
Descr
Industry standard description O Enter if known
Page Format Page format of the materials
production or inspection memo.
O Enter if known
CAD Indicator This indicator shows that the object
(such as BOM or document) was
created or changed in a CAD
system. Data transfer in the SAP
system via CAD interface.
O Leave Blank
Basic Material Primary material or component O Leave Blank
Environment Section Header
DG ind. profile Alphanumeric key that uniquely
identifies the dangerous goods
profile.
O Choose appropriate key
Environmentally
Rlvt.
Identifies hazardous material O Leave blank
Highly viscous Indicator that shows if the material
is a highly viscous substance.
O leave blank
In bulk/liquid Indicator that shows if the
dangerous good is to be transported
in bulk.
O leave blank
Design
Document
assigned
Section Header
No link Indicates
• either that no drawings
are assigned to the
material
• or that several
drawings are assigned
to the material
O Check the box if appropriate
Drawing Section Header
Document Key identifying the document O leave blank
Document Type allows grouping of like documents O leave blank
Doc Vers version of the document O Leave Blank
Page Number O Leave Blank
Doc ch no O Leave Blank
Page Format O Leave Blank

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 12 of 60
No. Sheets O Leave Blank
Client Specific
Configuration
Section Header
Cross Plant CM Alphanumeric key uniquely
identifying the configurable material
O
Material is
configurable
Indicator that determines whether
the material is configurable
O If this indicator is set, you can assign a
variant class to the material, making it
possible to use it as a configurable
material
Variant Specifies that the material is a
variant of a configuration
material. This makes it
possible, for example, to
prefabricate frequently required
variants and to place them in
stock.
O Leave Blank
Configure
variant
Button to access variant
configuration
O Press button to access variant
configuration
Additional To enter additional information O Press button to access to enter
additional information

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 13 of 60
1.7. On the tab “Sales: sales org 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 14 of 60
Base Unit of
Measure
Division Division grouping O Use pull down to select appropriate
entry
Sales Unit Unit of measure in which the
material is sold
O Enter a value in this field only if you
want to use a unit of measure differing
from the base unit of measure
Sales unit not
var.
Variable Sales unit not allowed
check box
O Leave unchecked if variable sales units
are required.
Unit of
measure grp.
Key that you can use for grouping
several units of measure.
entry
X-distr. Chain
status
Cross-distribution-chain material
status. Indicates whether the
functions in Sales and Distribution
for all distribution chains.
entry
Valid from Date from which the cross-
distribution-chain material status is
valid.
entry
D chain-spec.
status
Distribution-chain-specific material
status. Indicates whether, for a
specific distribution chain, the
functions in Sales and Distribution.
entry
Valid from Date from which distr.-chain-spec.
entry
Delivering
plant
Delivering plant from which
goods are delivered to the
customer.
entry
Mat’l grp Material group O Use pull down to select appropriate
entry
Cash discount Cash discount indicator O Check box if applicable
Conditions Button to access pricing conditions O Use pull down to select appropriate
entry
Tax Data Section Header
Tax
Classification
Tax classification for a particular
country
R Enter using pull down menu.
Quantity
Stipulations
Section Header
Min. order qty Minimum order quantity in base unit
of measure
entry
Min dely qty Minimum delivery quantity in delivery
note processing
entry
Delivery unit Delivery unit Only exact multiples of
this number can be delivered.
entry
Rounding
profile
Rounding profile. Key that the
system uses to adjust the order
proposal quantity to deliverable units.
entry
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 15 of 60
1.8. On the tab “Sales: Sales Org. 2” enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 16 of 60
Grouping
Terms
Section Heading
Mat’l Statistics
grp
Material statistics group for this
material and helps determine which
data the system updates in the
logistics information system.
O Enter from pull down menu if
appropriate
Material
pricing grp
Material Pricing Group. A way of
grouping materials to which you want
to apply the same conditions.
Volume rebate
group
Volume rebate group O Enter from pull down menu
Acct.
assignment
grp
Account assignment group for this
material
Gen. Item cat.
Grp
General item category group O Defaults in from item category group
Item category
grp
Item category group from material
master
O Defaults in from item category group
Pricing ref.
Material
Pricing reference material. Material
master record that the system uses
as a reference for pricing purposes.
Product
hierarchy
determination.
Commission
group
Commission group to which the
Material
Groups
Section header
Material group
1- 5
Additional custom groupings that can
be used for analysis
O Enter as appropriate
Product
attributes
Section header
Product
attribute 1 - 10
ID check box for product attributes.
Can be used to correlate with ship to
party’s acceptable attributes
O Check as appropriate
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 17 of 60
1.9. On the tab “Sales: General/Plant ” enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 18 of 60
Base unit of
measure
Base unit of measure R Defaults in from basic data
Replacement
part
Indicator that specifies whether the
material can be a replacement part,
must be a replacement part, or is not
a replacement part.
O Use Pull down menu
Gross weight Gross weight R Defaults in from basic data
Discount in
kind
Material qualifies for discount in kind.
Specifies whether and for what areas
the material qualifies for a discount in
kind.
Net weight Net weight R Defaults in from basic data
Material freight
grp
Availability
check
Checking group for availability
check. Specifies whether and how
the system checks availability and
generates requirements for
materials planning or Flexible
Planning.
R Use pull down menu
Appr. Batch
rec. req.
Indicator: Approved batch record
required
Batch
management
Batch management requirement
indicator
Shipping data
(Times on
days)
Section header
Trans grp Transportation group R Use pull down menu
Loading grp Loading group R Use pull down menu
Setup time Shipping setup time O Enter an appropriate value
Proc. time Shipping processing time O Enter an appropriate value
Base qty Base quantity for capacity planning in
shipping Quantity to which the
shipping processing time refers.
Packaging
material data
Section header
Mat. Grp
Pack. matls
Material group: shipping materials.
Groups together materials which
require similar shipping materials.
General plant
parameters
Section header
Neg. stocks Negative stocks allowed in plant O Check box as appropriate
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of material in plant O Use pull down menu
Ext. customer
repl.
parameters
Button to allow access to make
changes to External customer
replenishment parameters

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 19 of 60
Enter.
1.10. On tab “Foreign trade export”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 20 of 60
Foreign
Trade Data
Section Heading
Comm./Imp.
Code No.
Export / Import
Group
CAS number
(pharm)
PRODCOM
no.
Origin/EU
Market
organization/
Preferences
Section Heading
Country of
Origin
Region of
Origin
CAP product
list no.
group list.
CAP prod.
Group
Preference
Status
special treatment
Vendor Decl
Status
Customs tariff
prefs
preference data
Exemption
Certificate
Exemption
cert. No.
Iss. date of ex.
Cert.
for military goods
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 21 of 60
1.11. On the tab “Sales text”, enter appropriate text in the desired languages and press enter.
1.12. On the tab “Purchasing” (This view is used only for externally procured materials. So the
screen print is not provided here for this Finished Product) enter information in the fields
as specified in the below table:
Base Unit of
Measure
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM
and required by Vendor
Var. Oun Variable order unit active O Use pull down if appropriate
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchasing this
Material
R Enter or select from pull down list
Material Group Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Plant sp.matl
status
Determines availability of Material for
purchase or production
Tax Ind. F.
material
Identifies taxable or tax free status O Use pull down menu
Discount in
kind
Indicates if material is eligible for a
discount in kind.
Material freight
group
Autom PO Allows PO to be created without
review during PR conversion
Batch
Management
Identifies the material as managed by
batch
O Check if appropriate
Purchasing
Values
Section Heading
Purchasing
Value Key
Identifies follow up intervals and
delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down
list
Other Data Section Heading
GR
Processing
time
Number of days required to inspect
and place in storage
O Enter number of days if relevant
Post to insp.
stock
Determines if materials received into
O Set if relevant
Critical Part Identifies material as critical O Check box if appropriate
Quota Arr
Usage
Indicates functions where quota
arrangements apply to material
O Enter from pull down list if required
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO
issues

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 22 of 60
JIT sched.
Indicator
Indicator: Item relevant to JIT
delivery schedules
Mfr. Part
profile
Manufacturer part number profile O Use pull down menu
Mfr. Part
number
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu
Enter.
1.13. On tab “ Foreign trade import ” (This view is used only for externally procured materials.
So the screen print is not provided here for this Finished Product), enter information in the
Foreign
Trade Data
Section Heading
Comm./Imp.
CodeNo
Export / Import
Group
CAS number
(pharm)
PRODCOM
no.
Origin/EU
Market
organization/
Preferences
Section Heading
Country of
Origin
Region of
Origin
CAP product
list no.
group list.
CAP prod.
Group
Preference
Status
special treatment
Vendor Decl
Status
Customs tariff Button to access customs tariff O Select if appropriate

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 23 of 60
prefs preference data
Exemption
Certificate
Exemption
cert. No.
Iss. date of ex.
Cert.
for military goods
Enter.
1.14 On tab “Purchase order text” (This view is used only for externally procured materials. So
the screen print is not provided here for this Finished Product), enter appropriate text in the
desired languages and press enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 24 of 60

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 25 of 60
Base Unit of
Measure
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
MRP Group The MRP group controls things
such as consumption of
Independent Requirements
R Select the applicable group from the
pull down menu
Purchasing grp Purchasing group O Use pull down menu
ABC indicator ABC indicator that classifies a
material as an A, B, or C part
according to its consumption
value.
Plant sp. Matl
status
Determines availability of Material
for purchase or production
MRP Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP /MPS to
be performed
R Often PD for lower level Materials
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
Planning time
fence
The planning time fence specifies
a period within which no automatic
changes are to be made to the
master plan.
O Enter value
Planning cycle Key that determines the day on
which the material is planned and
ordered.
MRP Controller Code for the person responsible
for MRP/MPS for this material
R Press F4 for list. Select desired code
from the list
Lot Size Data Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of Lot Sizing
that will occur.
R Enter EX for exact requirement
quantities, FX for Fixed lot size
production
Minimum lot size Minimum lot size O Enter value
Maximum lot size Maximum lot size O Enter value
Fixed Lot Size Quantity for each individual
Planned order, requisition, etc.
C Enter quantity to be planned when FX
is used for the Lot Size Key
Maximum stock
level
Maximum stock level allowed O Enter value
Ordering costs Costs incurred for each purchase
order
O Enter value
Storage costs
ind.
Indicator that specifies the storage
costs percentage the system uses
when calculating the lot size to
determine storage costs.
Assembly scrap
(%)
Percentage scrap that occurs
during production of the material if
the material is an assembly.
O Enter value
Takt time Takt time. If a requirement quantity
cannot be procured in a single lot,
you have to schedule several
O Enter value

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 26 of 60
receipts. In conjunction with the
overlap indicator in the lot size,
you can use the takt time to
specify that these receipts are
offset, that is, that they are
delayed by the takt time.
Rounding Profile Quantity to which the required
quantity must be rounded up
O Enter if production/order lots are
required to be in “increments of”
Rounding value Rounding value for purchase order
quantity. Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up the
procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Unit of measure
grp
Unit of measure group O Use pull down menu
MRP areas Section header
MRP areas Button to access and make
changes to MRP areas
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 27 of 60
Procurement Section Heading
Procurement
Type
Identifies the material as
purchased, produced in house, or
R Select from pull down menu Defaults in from the
material type.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 28 of 60
both
Batch Entry Determines when, whether, and
how the batch for components is to
be entered in the production /
process order
Special
Procurement
Identifies inter plant items,
phantoms, or consignment
materials
Issue Stor.
Location
Location from which to issue /
receive material to / from
production
O Use if material is always issued /
received from / into the same location
Quota Arr.
Usage
Key specifying the business
processes for which quota
arrangements are active
Default supply
area
Proposed Supply Area in Material
Master Record. The supply area
is used as an interim storage area
on the shop floor which is used to
provide materials directly at the
production line.
Storage Loc for
EP
Storage location proposed for
receiving material obtained
externally
O Select from pull down list if the same
storage location is used for all receipts
of this material
JIT delivery
sched.
Item relevant to JIT delivery
schedules indicator
O Select from pull-down menu
Stock determin.
Group
Stock determination group O Select from pull down menu
Bulk Material Identifies material stored at the
work center (ex. Grease). When
set, this material is neither planned
nor costed
O Set only if bulk conditions apply
Co-Product Identifies a material that is
produced as a normal part of the
production of the ordered material.
This material has value.
O Set if material is to be valuated,
costed, and sold or used as a
component in another finished material
settings
Scheduling
In-House
Production
Number of days required to
produce the material in house,
regardless of the production
quantity
GR Processing
Time
Number of days required for in
house processing after the goods
receipt has been posted (ex.
Quality inspection)
Sched. Margin
Key
Identifies the “float” times before
and after production
R Enter from Pulldown
Plnd Delivery
Time
Number of days required to obtain
material obtained externally
Planning
Calendar
Special calendar for use in
planning delivery cycles
O Use of deliveries can only occur on
specified days of the week

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 29 of 60
Net
requirements
calculation
Section Header
Safety stock Safety stock level O Enter a value if appropriate
Service level (%) Service level Percentage. The
system uses the service level to
calculate the safety stock.
Min. safety stock Minimum safety stock O Enter a value if appropriate
Coverage profile Range of coverage profile O Use pull down menu
Safety time ind. Safety time indicator O Use pull down menu
Safety time/act.
Cov.
Safety time/actual range of
coverage (in days)
STime period
profile
Period profile for safety time/actual
range of coverage

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 30 of 60
Enter
Forecast Section Heading

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 31 of 60
Requirements
Period Indicator Specifies period types in which
forecasts are to be managed
O Select W (Weekly), M (Monthly), D,
(Daily) or P (Period from variant) if
used
Fiscal Year
Variant
Defines number of posting periods,
special period’s etc.
O Select from pull down if used. May
require additional configuration
Splitting Indicator Defines increment for further
breakdown of the forecast
O Select from pull down. Note: Must be
configured
Planning Section Heading
Strategy Group Identifies production group, e.g.,
Make to order, make to stock etc
O Select desired strategy from pull down
menu
Consumption
Mode
Identifies the time axis in which
independent requirements are
consumed
O Select from pull down Start with “2”
(backwards then
forwards)
Bwd
Consumption Per
Number of days in the past to
Fwd
Consumption Per
Number of days in the future to
Mixed MRP Indicates whether material is
available for gross requirements
planning or subassembly planning
Planning Material Material whose planned
independent requirements the
system consumes
O Enter material number of planning
material
Planning Plant Identifier of the plant associated
with the planning material
O Enter Plant Id if applicable
Plng Conv.
Factor
Factor to convert this material’s
UOM to the planning material’s
UOM
Planning matl
Bunit
Business unit for this material N/A Cannot enter in this field
Availability
Check
Section Heading
Availability
Check
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are to be
used or individual Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02 (individual).
NOTE: This is the only required field
on this screen
Preference
depends upon
company
Tot. Repl. Lead
Time
Total lead time for finished
product, including production and
procurement along the longest
path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross project material O Use pull down menu
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 32 of 60
1.18 On tab “MRP4”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table
BOM Explosion Section Heading

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 33 of 60
/ Dependent
Requirements
Selection Method Key that determines how the BOM
will be selected
O Leave blank for quantity, 1 for
Explosion date, 2 for production
version
Component
Scrap %
% scrap when item is used as a
component
Individual/coll. Key defining whether individual or
collective requirements will be
used
O Leave blank for both
Requirements
group
Requires that all dependent
requirements for this material are
to be grouped together in one line
per time period
O Enter code from pull down if desired.
ProdVersions Button to access production
version settings
MRP dep.
requirements
MRP relevancy for dependent
requirements indicator. Controls
whether dependent requirements
are relevant to MRP or not.
Discontinued
Parts
Section Heading
Discontinuation
Ind.
Identifies if only this material is
discontinued or if all dependent
components are discontinued as
well
O Set when material is discontinued
Eff.-Out Date discontinuation is effective O Set when discontinuation indicator is
set
Follow-up Matl Material used as a replacement for
discontinued material
O Set when applicable
Repetitive
Manufacturing /
Assembly/Depl
oyment
Strategy
Section Heading
Repetitive mfg Allows material to be used in
repetitive manufacturing
O Set if needed
REM profile Key pointing to profile controlling
activities backflushing, movement
type to be used, etc
C Select from pull down if repetitive is
used
Action Control Defines sequence of actions
allowed for planned orders
O Select from pull down Requires
configuration
Fair share rule Fair share rule O Use pull down menu
Push distribution Push distribution indicator for
excess stock
Deployment
horizon
Deployment horizon in days O Enter value if necessary
Average plant
stock
Button to access average plant
stock information
Material memo Button to enter a memo for this
material
Storage Section header

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 34 of 60
location MRP
SLoc MRP
indicator
Storage location MRP indicator
used to exclude storage locations
from material requirements
planning at plant level.
Spec. proc.
Type. Sloc
Special procurement type at
storage location level.Defines the
procurement type for the material
more precisely at storage
location level.
Reorder point Reorder point for storage location
MRP
Replenishment
qty
Replenishment quantity for storage
location MRP

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 35 of 60
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 36 of 60
1.19 On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 37 of 60
Base unit of
measure
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
Forecast
model
Indicator that defines on which
forecast model the system bases its
calculation of future requirements of
the material.
Period
indicator
Indicator specifying the periods in
which the material's consumption
values and forecast values are
managed.
Lasr forecast Date on which the system carried out
the last forecast.
O Display field only
Fiscal year
variant
Fiscal year variant O Use pull down menu
RefMatl:
consumption
Reference material for consumption.
The system uses the consumption
data of this material for the forecast.
RefPlant
consumption
Reference plant for consumption.
Plant of the reference material on
whose consumption data the material
forecast is based.
Date to Date until which the consumption
data of the reference material is used
Multiplier Multiplier for reference material for
consumption Determines how much
of the consumption quantity of the
reference material should be used
O Enter appropriate value between 0 and
1.
Number of
periods
required
Section header
Historical
periods
Number of historical periods used in
the forecast
Forecast
periods
Number of periods for which a
forecast should be created
Periods per
season
Number of periods per seasonal
cycle
Initialization
pds
Number of historical period values to
be used for initialization
Fixed periods Number of periods for which the
system will not recalculate the
forecast values in the next forecast.
Control data Section header
Initialization Indicator which specifies that the
system should initialize a forecast
model.
Tracking limit Tracking limit to check forecast
accuracy

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 38 of 60
Reset
automatically
Reset forecast model automatically if
tracking limit is exceeded
Model
selection
Indicator used in forecast model
selection that specifies how the
system checks the values
Selection
procedure
This procedure defines how the
system selects the optimum forecast
model.
Param
optimization
Indicator that causes the system to
optimize the smoothing factors
needed by the given forecast model.
Optimization
level
Specifies the increment by which the
system optimizes the forecast
parameters.
Weighting
group
Weighting group for weighted moving
average model
Correction
factors
Indicator: take correction factors into
account. Set this indicator if the
correction factors defined in
customizing are to be used in the
calculation of the forecast values.
Alpha factor The alpha factor is the smoothing
factor for the basic value..
Beta factor The beta factor is the smoothing
factor for the trend value
Gamma factor The gamma factor is the smoothing
factor for the seasonal index
Delta factor The delta factor is the smoothing
factor for the mean absolute
deviation
Execute
forecast
Button to execute the forecast O Select if desired
Forecast
values
Button to filter forecast values O Select if desired
Consumption
vals
Button to filter consumption values O Select if desired

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 39 of 60
Enter.
1.20 On tab “Work Scheduling”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 40 of 60
Base unit of
measure
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
Leave Blank unless
absolutely required
Production
Unit
Unit of measure for production O Enter production UOM only if different
from Base (Standard/Inventory) UOM
Leave Blank unless
absolutely required
P-S matl
status
Production
Scheduler
Person / Group responsible for this
material at this plant
O Select from pull down menu (F4 or
click on boxed down arrow
Issue Storage
Location
Location from which this material is to
be issued
O Use of you will always issue from the sam
location for this plant
Prod. Sched
profile
Production scheduling profile O Use pull down menu
Material group Group of materials for transition
matrix
O Enter appropriate value
Serial no.
profile
Overall profile Overall profile for order change
management
Inspection
stock
received into Inspection stock instead
of Unrestricted stock
O Click “on” if quality inspection is
required
Critical part Indicator that this is a critical part O Chack box if desired
ProdVersions Button to access production version
settings
O Select if desired
Batch rec.req. Indicator: Approved batch record
required
O Check box is desired
Batch entry Determination of batch entry in the
production/process order Defines
when batches have to be determined
when using the PP/WM interface.
Batch
Management
managed by batch
O Click “on” if batch management
desired.
Requires all
inventory
transactions to be
done using batch
identification.
Tolerance
Data
Section header
Under delivery
Tolerance
quantities may be under reported
Over delivery
Tolerance
quantities may be over reported
Unltd Over
delivery
Allows an unlimited quantity to be
received against a production order
O Click “on” if an unlimited production
quantity is desired.
In-house Section header

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 41 of 60
production
time in days
Setup time Setup and teardown time. Specifies
the number of workdays needed to
set up and tear down the various
work centers where the material is
processed.
size
Interoperation Interoperation time. Specifies the
number of workdays required for the
transition of a produced material
between work centers or work center
groups.
size
Processing
time
Processing time. Specifies the time
needed to process the material in the
operations at the different work
centers.
size
Base quantity Base quantity. Quantity to which the
in-house production time and the
processing time of the material
relate.
size
InhseProd
Time
In-house production time
independent of lot size
R Enter value if different from default
value
Independent of lot
size
Enter.
1.21 On tab “Prod. resources/tools”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Base unit of
measure
this product
Defaults if Basic
Data 1 view exists
Leave Blank unless
absolutely required
Plant-sp. matl
status
Load records Create load records for prod.
resources/tools Indicator which
controls whether requirements
records for production resources/
tools are written within scheduling.
Task list
usage
Production resource/tool. Controls in
which task lists the production
resources/tools may be used.
Grouping key
1
resources/tools

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 42 of 60
Grouping key
2
resources/tools
Default
values for
task list
assignment
(not
changeable)
Section header
Control key Control key for management of
production resources/tools
Standard text
key
Standard text key for production
resources/tools
Quantity
formula
quantity of production
resources/tools.
changes are to be allowed wn menu
Usage value
formula
usage value of a production
resource/tool.
changes are to be allowed down menu
Ref. Date for
start
Reference date to start of production
resource/tool usage
R Use pull down menu to change the
default value. Check box if no changes
are to be allowed down menu
Offset to start Offset between the reference date
and the start of production
resource/tool (PRT) usage.
Ref. Date for
finish
Reference date for end of production
resource/tool usage
R Use pull down menu to change default
value. Check box if no changes are to
be allowed down menu
Offset to finish Offset between the reference date
and the finish of the production
resource/tool usage.
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 43 of 60
1.22 On tab “Plant data/stor. 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 44 of 60
Base Unit of
Measure
Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is issued O Enter Unit of Issue or select from pull
down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Picking area Picking area for lean WM O Use pull down menu
Temp.
Conditions
Temperature at which material
should be stored
O Enter code for temp condition or select
from pull down menu
Storage
Condition(s)
Indicates which storage conditions
are required for this material
O Enter storage code or select from pull
down menu
Container
reqmt(s)
Key for which kind of container the
material must be stored in
O Enter container code or select from pull
down menu
Haz. Material
number
Identifies material as HAZMAT and
assigns HAZMAT code
O Enter HAZMAT number or select from
pull down menu
CC phys. Inv. nd. Indicates Cycle Counting Method O Enter Cycle Count code, or select from
pull down menu
CC Fixed Indicates that cycle counting
indicator can’t be changed by ABC
Analysis
O Check box if material is always to
remain in specified category
Number of GR
slips
Number of GR slips to be printed O Enter value if appropriate
Label type Label type determines how labels
are created
Lab form Label form. Determines size and
layout of label
Appr. Batch rec.
req.
Approved batch record indicator
required
Batch
Management
managed in batches
O Check box if material is managed in
batches
Shelf Life Data Section Heading
Max. Storage
Period
Maximum period which material
can be stored
O Enter maximum period This number is for
information only and
has no functional
use
Time Unit Unit in which the period is
measured
O Enter unit or select from pull down
menu
Min. Rem. Shelf
Life
Number of days material needs to
be kept for the system to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total Shelf Life Number of days material will keep
in total
O Enter number of days
Period ind. For
SLED
Period indicator for shelf life
expiration date
O Use pull down to change default value
Rounding rule
SLED
Rounding rule for calculation of
shelf life expiration date
Storage
percentage
Storage percentage. Percentage
specifying how much of the
minimum remaining shelf life must
be left if the material is to be sent
to another plant
O Enter a value as necessary

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 45 of 60
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 46 of 60
1.23 On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 47 of 60
Weight/volume Section Heading
Gross weight Gross weight O Defaults in from basic data view
Weight unit Unit of weight O Defaults in from basic data view
Net weight Net weight O Defaults in from basic data view
Volume Volume O Defaults in from basic data view
Volume unit Unit of volume O Defaults in from basic data view
Size/dimensions Size dimensions O Defaults in from basic data view
General plant
parameters
Section header
Neg. stocks in
plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant O Check box as appropriate
Log. Handling
group
Logistics handling group for
workload calculation
Serial No. profile Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of material in
plant
Stock determin.
Group
The stock determination group
combined with the Stock
Determination Rule at plant level
create a key for the stock
determination strategy.
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 48 of 60
1.24 On tab “Warehouse mgmt 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Base Unit of Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 49 of 60
measure
Hazardous
material
Hazardous material number O Enter or defaults from Basic data View
WM unit Warehouse unit of measure O if different from base unit of measure
Gross weight gross weight of material O enter or defaults from Basic data view
Volume Volume of material O defaults from Basic data View
Proposed UoM
from Material
Unit of measure to be used in the
warehouse
O Enter if known
Capacity usage Capacity used by material O Enter if known
Picking storage
type
Storage type used in rough-cut
planning and detailed planning
O Enter if known
Appr. batch rec.
req.
Goods receipt from production can
only be made after the batch has
been approved
Batch
Management
managed in batches
Storage
strategies
Section header
Stock Removal Material is to be removed from
storage
O Enter if known
Stock
placement
Material is to be placed in storage O Enter if known
Storage section Section where material is to be
stored
O Enter if known
Bulk storage Classifies materials according to the
way they are stored in a bulk storage
area
O Enter if known
Special
movement
Special movement is allowed for this
material
Message to IM Automatic message sent to inventory
management
2-step picking Key that determines whether 2-step
picking will be used or not for a
material.
Allow addn to
stock
Material can be added to stock if it
has particular characteristics.
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 50 of 60
1.25 On tab “Warehouse mgmt 2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Palletization
data
Section header
LE quantity Loading equipment quantity. O The system uses this quantity to pack
a quantity of material into a location
or loading devices
Repeat for up to
three pallet types
Un Unit of Measure for the LE Quantity O If LE quantity is entered then Un
must be entered.
SUT Storage unit type O Use pull down menu
Storage bin
stock
Section header
Storage Bin Smallest addressable unit in a
warehouse.
Picking area Picking area O Use pull down menu
Maximum. bin
quantity.
Largest qty. that may be stored in a
Control quantity Control quantity threshold value O Enter value if necessary
Minimum. bin
quantity.
Smallest qty. that may be stored in a
O Key that is used to classify storage
units
O
Replenishment
qty
Replenishment quantity O Enter value if necessary

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 51 of 60
Rounding Qty. The requested qty. is rounded down
to this qty. when materials are picked
from this st. type.
Enter.
1.26 On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 52 of 60
Base Unit of
measure
Post to insp. stock Determines if materials received into
O Set if relevant
QM material auth. Material Authorization Group for
Activities in QM
Documentation
reqd
Documentation is required O Check box if required
GR processing
time
Goods receipt processing time in
days
Inspection interval Interval until next recurring
inspection
Catalog profile Catalog Profile. Key of the
catalog profile that is to form the
basis of the maintenance
notification or quality notification.
Plant-sp. matl
status
Procurement
data
Section header
QM procurement
activ
Indicator to activate QM in
procurement
QM control key Control Key for Quality Management
in Procurement
Certificate type Determines the content of a quality
certificate
Target QM system Required QM system for vendor O Use pull down menu
Enter.
1.27 On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 53 of 60
Base Unit of
Measure
Data.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 54 of 60
Valuation
Category
Indicates whether stocks are
valuated together or separately
O (Split Valuation)
Division O Use pull down menu
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
default value
VC Sales order
stk
Proj. stk val.
Class
the material.
average price
material type.
Price Unit Number of units price refers to R Enter price unit
material
O Enter price
standard price
O Enter price
Total Stock Total quantity of all valuated stock C Display only
Total Value Total Value of stock C Generated by multiplying standard
price by total stock
Future price Future price for material valuation O Enter price
Valid from Validity date for future price O Enter date
Previous
period/year
Button to access previous period
data
O Select if desired
Std cost estimate Button to access standard cost
estimate
O Select if desired
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 55 of 60
1.28 On tab “Accounting 2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
Determination
of lowest value
Section Heading
Tax price 1 Valuation price based on tax law:
level 1
three prices
Commercial
price 1
Valuation price based on
commercial law: level 1
three prices
Devaluation ind. Lowest value: devaluation
indicator
O Enter value
Price unit Price unit for valuation prices
based on tax/commercial law
O Enter value
LIFO data Section header
LIFO/FIFO-
relevant
Determines whether the material
or the movement type is relevant

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 56 of 60
to LIFO and FIFO valuation.
LIFO pool Pool number for LIFO valuation O Use pull down menu
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 57 of 60
General data Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Data.
No costing Indicator that specifies whether a
cost estimate or a procurement

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 58 of 60
alternative can be created for a
material.
With qty
structure
Material is costed with quantity
structure
Origin group Origin Group as Subdivision of
Cost Element
Material origin Material related origin O Check box if desired
Overhead group Costing overhead group O Use pull down menu
Plant-sp. matl
status
Quantity
structure data
Section data
Alternative BOM An alternative BOM in a BOM
group
O Enter value
BOM usage This key defines the area where
the BOM can be used.
Group Key for task list group O Use pull down menu
Group counter Group counter. This key and the
task list group uniquely identify a
task list
O Enter value
Task list type Task list type. Key which
classifies task lists according to
their functionality
Sp. Procurement
type
Special Procurement Type for
Costing
Costing lot size Costing lot size. Lot size of the
costed object (such as a material
or sales order) used in the product
cost estimate.
O Enter value
Co-product Indicator you can use to specify
that the material can also be used
as a co-product.
Fxd price Indicates the material as a fixed
price co-product.
settings
O Select if desired
Versions Button to access versions O Select if desired
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 59 of 60
Standard cost
estimate
Section header

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 60 of 60
Cost estimate Buttons to select cost estimate
time frame
O Select Current, Future or Previous
period/fiscal year
Planned price Planned price from the respective
standard cost estimate
O Enter value
Planned prices Section header
Planned price1 Future Planned Price 1. Price
that the system can take as a
basis for product costing
O Enter value Repeat for price 2
and price 3 if
desired
Planned price
date 1
Date from Which Future Planned
Price 1 Is Valid
O Enter date Repeat for date 2
and date 3 if
desired
Valuation data Section header
default value
VC Sales order
stk
Proj. stk val.
Class
the material.
average price
material type.
Price unit Number of units price refers to R Defaulted by system
material
standard price
Enter.
1.31 On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant:
Enter.
1.32 On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this storage location:
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM12_Schedule Changing of Material
Materials Mangement
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
A request to schedule future changes to one or more fields in the material master views
Caution must be practiced when changing any of the fields on any of the material master Data Views. The master data flows into all
transaction codes and can have a detrimental effect if not tightly controlled.
Schedule date Date for which change is scheduled for
Material Master View (s) changed on
scheduled date
Tips and Tricks
When selecting which view to change, it is possible to minimize time and effort by clicking the right mouse
button and use “Select All” rather than selecting each view button individually.
When changing material master views, it is possible to proceed in a linear fashion between views by
pressing “Enter” or clicking on the check mark. By using the ‘arrow lines button’ to the right of the view
tabs you can immediately go to the view of you choice.
Executing transaction MM13 must activate all schedule changes.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
Materials Mangement
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedure Steps
Via Menus Logistics > Materials Management > Material Master > Material > Change >
Schedule
1.2. On ‘Change Material (Schedule): Initial screen’; enter information in the fields as specified
in the table below:
Material Material master number R Number known or search via
matchcode
Chge sched.
for
Date on which change is scheduled R Enter date in the future for when
change is required
Change
number
change to a material master record
O Enter number if required See Engineering
Change
Management
1.4. On screen “Select View (s) Screen”: enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
Materials Mangement
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Select View Views that contain the field that need
changes
R Click on appropriate view See Tips and
Tricks
1.6. On screen “Organizational Levels”: enter information in table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
Materials Mangement
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
Plant Plant number where material is
located
R Enter Plant number
Enter Press enter or check mark R Will display view you have chosen.
Proceed to change field required,
Only fields
appearing in white
can be changed
1.7. Make necessary changes to view.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM13_Activate Scheduled Changes
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
A request to activate scheduled changes in the material master.
Caution must be practiced when changing any of the fields on any of the material master Data Views. The master data flows into all
transaction codes and can have a detrimental effect if not tightly controlled.
Activate to Date for which change is scheduled for
Material Master View (s) Activated
Tips and Tricks
Activate all scheduled changes for a material.
Scheduled changes can be done using transaction MM12 for the material to have changes from the
future date for certain fields and it is a prerequisite.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Procedure Steps
Via Menus SAP Menu  Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material
 Change  Activate
1.2. On ‘Activate Scheduled Changes for a key date; enter information in the fields as specified
in the table below:
Material Material master number R Number known or search via
matchcode
Activate To Date to which scheduled changes
are activated
O Enter date in the future for when
change is required
Activate from Date from which scheduled changes
are activated
O Enter number if required
Keep user
names
Keep user names in change
documents
O
Changes per
processing
block
Number of Changes per processing
block
O
Test mode(No Test mode O Test mode

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Activation)
1.4. Click on the Back button or F3 and uncheck the Test mode (no activation).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
Deletion of a material master is planned on a schedule date.
In case of schedule deletion of a material, the change is stored in change document and not in material master record itself. The
date at which the change is to take effect is stored in the document header. Such changes have to be activated manually.
Material
Change Scheduled for
The Material Number that is to be scheduled for deletion.
The date on which the change is to take effect.
Material is scheduled for deletion
Tips and Tricks
Scheduled changes to material master records must be activated manually. They are not
activated automatically.
When you activate scheduled changes to material master records, Scheduled deletion flags also
get activated.
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics - Materials Management - Material Master - Material - Flag for deletion -
Schedule

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
1.2. On the “Schedule Material for Deletion” screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table and choose Enter
Material Number uniquely identifying the
Material
R Enter Material Number
Plant Plant where the material is to be
deleted.
O Enter plant
Storage
location
Storage location where the material
is to be deleted.
O Enter Storage Location
Valuation
Type
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
Sales Org. O
Distr. Channel O
Warehouse
Number
O
Storage Type O
Change
Number
O
Chge Sched.
for
Date for which the changes is
scheduled.
R

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
1.3. Select the organizational level(s) at which you want to flag the material for deletion
and Choose Save
Result:
The material has been scheduled for deletion.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM60_Materials List
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 3
Overview
Trigger:
To see the report of material masters available in the organization at plant level.
Materials list at plant level along with valuation price can be reviewed.
None
.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM60_Materials List
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 3
Procedural Steps
Via Menus SAP Menu  Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Other 
Materials List
1.2. On the screen “Materials List”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
table below:
Selection
Criteria
Material Materials Number O Vendor known or via matchcode
search if the
Narrow the search
parameters by
number.
Material Type Material Type Via matchcode search
Material Group Material Group O Select from drop down menu
Created by
Name of Person who created the
Object
Valuated
Materials Only
Display only Materials that have
accounting data use
O Check on or off

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MM60_Materials List
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 3
1.4. Review the “Materials List” screen:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMAM_Change Material Type
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary to change the material type. For example, a
material that was always procured externally in the past and whose material type allows only
external procurement is also to be produced in-house in the future. Therefore, you must assign
the material to a material type that also allows in-house production.
You want to produce a material that was only procured externally until now and whose material type is raw material. You now need
to assign it to the material type semi-finished product.
If you change from a material type that allows only in-house production to a material type that allows only external procurement, or
vice versa, the system converts the procurement type accordingly.
If you change to a material type that allows different user department data than the old material type, the system does the following:
• Resets to their initial value all fields for a user department that no longer exists.
• Lists user department fields that become required fields as a result of changing the material type.
Material
New Material Type
Number of the material whose material type you want to change.
Material type to which the material shall be assigned
Material Type for the material is changed.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
• If you use the material ledger, the material must be settled in it.
• If the old material type did not require you to specify a price control (for example,
standard price or moving average price) for the material, the new material type must not
be configured such that it allows only standard price as the price control.
• If the material has been maintained from the Production Resources/Tools view, this view
must also be allowed for the new material type.
• If the material is not a configurable material, the new material type must not be allowed
only for configurable materials.
• If inspection plans are required for quality management inspection of the material, they
must be allowed for the new material type.
If the material is already in stock, or if reservations or purchasing documents exist for it, the
following conditions must also be met:
• The stock values of the material of the new material type must be updated in the same
G/L account as the stock values of the material of the old material type.
• Quantities and values of the material of the new material type must be updated in exactly
the same way in all plants as quantities and values of the material of the old material
type.
• If there is a transfer requirement for the material and if quants of the material exist, the
new material type must also allow the material data to be maintained from the
Warehouse Management view.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics - Materials Management - Material Master - Material – Change Material
Type
Via Transaction Code MMAM
1.2. On the “Change Material Type” initial screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table and Choose Execute.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
Material Material for which the material type
shall be changed.
R Enter Material Number
New material
type
The new material type to which the
material shall be assigned
R Enter New Material Type If there are
different types of
accounting
methods for the
two material
types, the system
will ask for a new
valuation class for
the new material
type.
Old material
type
Material type to which the material
has been allocated up to now
Can not be
changed

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.3. A message appears telling you that you are changing the material type. Confirm
this message by choosing Enter
1.4. If, due to their valuation class, the two material types refer to different accounts, a
dialog box appears asking you to enter a valuation class that is valid for the new
material type for all plants or company codes.
1.5. Confirm the new valuation class by choosing Continue.
Result:
Material Type for the material has been changed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMBE_Stock Overview
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Overview
Trigger:
The requirement is to check inventory status of a Material.
To determine how much stock of a material is on-hand.
Stock Overview Stock Overview of Material Status
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMBE_Stock Overview
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics > Materials Management > Inventory Management > Environment>
Stock > Stock Overview
Via Transaction Code MMBE
1.2. If you are executing this report from the menu (See above), the Screen “Stock Overview :
Company Code/Plant/Storage Location/Batch” is displayed.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMBE_Stock Overview
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
1.3. Enter material number then click on the EXECUTE icon (F8):

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMBE_Stock Overview
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
1.4. The stock overview is shown in units:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMBE_Stock Overview
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
1.5. All stock is broken down into categories. Double click on a line to see a detailed list of
where the inventory is:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMBE_Stock Overview
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
1.6. Or to see the entire overview for a stock category, scroll Up or Down using icons:
1.7. Stocks are shown by organizational level:
<<Screen-print>>
1.8. Remember, the Stock Overview is accessible from many places:
FROM MATERIAL MASTER – From any material master view use this menu path:
Path: Environment > Stock Overview

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMBE_Stock Overview
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
FROM BOM – Select an item on the BOM and use this menu path:
Path: Environment > Material > Display > Stock Overview
FROM CHANGE NUMBER – Select an object from the object overview screen in the change number and
use this menu path:
Path: Environment > Other > Stock

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MMSC_ Material Master
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
• A request to extend a material master to a new or additional storage location(s)
Utilize this transaction when extending a material to a new storage location.
Input-Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Material master will be extended to a new
storage location
Tips and Tricks
Procedural Steps

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
1.1. Access ‘Extend to Stock Location’ by:
Via Menus (TBD, Jan/Feb 2011) (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material master>Material>Change >
Immediately
resources/tools > Material > Change>Immediately
(c) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Master Data>Products>Material >Trading
Goods > Change
(d) Logistics>Logistics Execution >Master Data>Material>Material > Change>
Immediately
(e) Logistics>Customer Service> Technical Objects> Material>Change
(f) Logistics>Quality Management Test Equipment Management> Test
Equipment > Material >Change
(g) Logistics>Project Systems> Basic data> Material master>Material>Change
Via Transaction Code MMSC

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
1.2. On screen ‘Enter Storage Locations Collectively: Initial Screen’ enter information in table
below, and select “List all existing storage locations” in the list control box:
Material Material number R Enter the material number if known
or search via matchcode
active or select from pull down
menu
Enter.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
1.3. On screen ‘Enter Storage Locations Collectively: List’, enter the desired storage locations
for extension.
1.4. Save.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MN01_Create Message_RFQ
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Trigger:
If a new vendor, document type or purchasing organization is created, it may be necessary to run this
transaction to assure proper output of document.
Automatic output will streamline and possibly eliminate the clerical duty of manually sending purchasing documents to the vendor.
Also, it will assist a company in its strategy to migrate to a paper-less work environment.
Purchasing Documents will automatically be populated with all the necessary information to output the document.
Document Type You must know the purchasing document type. The standard system includes
type “AN” for RFQs, however a new doc type can be created if desired.
Vendor Number The vendor must have a vendor number or name in SAP
Partner Function For output, the partner function VN is typically used. This can vary depending on
address that is required for display on actual document and the setup of partner
functions.
Medium Several methods of output are provided in SAP, some examples are: 1 = Printing
2 = Faxing 6 = EDI 7 = SAP Office
Tips and Tricks
The purchasing department should set a policy as to what method of transmission will be used for the
output of purchasing documents. Some choices are printing, faxing, SAPOffice, and/or EDI. You can set
the output up per vendor or per document type.
A document can have more then one output configured, i.e. print and fax. This requires additional
configuration (An extra output type).

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
1.1. Output Determination for RFQ’s: Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing →Master Data →Messages →
RFQ → Create
Via Transaction Code MN01
1.2. On screen “Create Output-Condition Records: Purchasing RFQ”, progress in the following
manner:
Output Type Purchasing document for output R Enter NEU for new, in this case RFQ.
The drop-down menu contains all of
the possible selections
This is based on
configuration. NEU
is standard
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”, “R”= Required, “O”= Optional, ”C”= Conditional)
Select the “Key Combination” radio button.
A pop-up screen will appear with three choices (in standard configuration). The three choices are:
• Purchasing Output Determination: Purch. Org/Vendor for EDI
• Purchasing Output Determination: Doc. type/Purch. Org./Vendor
• Purchasing Output Determination: Document type
You must make a selection from the radio buttons shown above or others as configured.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
1.3. On the “Create Condition Records: Fast Entry” Screen, enter information in the fields as
DOC. TYPE Document Type C Enter Doc. Type if a key
combination that contained Doc.
Type was chosen.
User must enter
AN for RFQ’s
Purch.
Organization
Purchase Organization C Enter Purchase organization if a
key combination that contained
Purch, Org, was chosen.
Vendor Vendor C Enter Vendor if a key
combination that contained
Vendor was chosen.
PartF Partner Function R See drop-down menu. Most
likely, VN will be the partner
function used for all output to
vendors but this can vary.
Partner Recipient of output as defined in SAP Office O Enter recipient of the output
document
Medium Medium through which the purchasing
document will be sent to the vendor
R There are possible choices,
most likely, 1 (printing) and 2

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
(faxing) are most relevant
Tim Timing: When the document will be output R 1: Send with Periodically
scheduled Job
2: Send with Job with additional
time specification eg. RSNAT00
as background job
3: Explicit request eg. via
function of applications
4: Immediately (in application
update)
L Language R Enter language that will be used
to display text.
Press “ENTER”
Next, highlight the line and press the “Communication” Button.
If the output is print, see the following table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
Output Device Printer that the output will be sent. R Select the applicable printer
Number of
Messages
Amount of documents to be printed O If left blank, one document will
be outputted.
Spool Request
Name
The name is determined by the user who
makes the request or by the program in which
a request is generated. There is no naming
convention enforced upon you.
O Enter name of spool as
necessary
Suffix 1 Second part of the three-part name of a spool
request. The name is determined by the user
who places the order or by the program in
which an order is generated. There is no
necessary naming convention.
O Enter as needed
Suffix 2 Third part of the three-part name of a spool
O Enter as needed
SAP Cover Page This field determines whether to include a
cover sheet containing information such as
recipient name, department name, format
used, etc.
O ' ' : No cover sheet
'X' : Output cover sheet
‘D’: Cover sheet output depends
on the setting of the output
device (printer) being used.
Recipient This field contains the spool request
recipient's name that appears on the cover
sheet of hardcopy printouts. The default value
for the name of the recipient is the current
user name.
O Enter name of recipient from
cover page if needed
Department This field contains the name of the department
originating the spool request. On hardcopy
printouts, the name is displayed on the cover
sheet.
O Enter department name if
desired for display on cover
sheet
Text for Cover
Page
This field contains a description of the spool
request. It may consist of any number of
letters, digits, special characters and blanks.
O Enter text here if desired
Authorization This field contains the authorization for the
spool request. Only users with this
authorization are allowed to display the
contents of the spool request.
O Enter if authorized
Archiving Mode Print only, Archive only, print and archive O Enter if archiving
Print Immediately This field contains the authorization for the
O Check box for immediate printing
from the spool
Delete after
Output
Switch for deleting a print job. If the switch is
set, the spool job is deleted immediately after
printing. Otherwise it remains in the spool file
after printing and can be printed again if
O Check if clearance of document
off of the spool is desired.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
required.
Layout Module The field contains the name of the function
module that can be used as a layout module
for print formatting (as an alternative to a
SAPscript form) when printing.
Form Name of a form. A form in SAPscript is used
for page layout. The form contains various
elements, which are used for layout control of
the individual pages and also contain layout
information for texts that are to be output on
the individual pages.
Enter if applicable
SmartForm Actual form name Enter if applicable
Press “SAVE”
If you are setting up RFQ’s to be faxed, please view the following table.
Address No. In output control the fax number that can be
used for this address is defined. A default fax
number is used. The fax number can be
entered into the address management.
Please note that a fax number from the
partner master data can overwrite this fax
number.
O This information will be defaulted
form the Vendor Master record.
Leave this field
blank.
Send Time Either immediately or at night R Enter as appropriate
Print Immediately Switch for printing immediately. Printing is
immediate if this switch is set. Otherwise the
R Check the box for immediate
output.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
output is held in the spool.
Release after
output
after printing and can be printed. Otherwise
the output is held in the spool.
O Make entry if spool job is to be
deleted immediately.
Press “SAVE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MN02_Change Message_RFQ
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Trigger:
A change in output type for a purchasing document is required.
type “NEU” for new and “AN” for RFQs, however a new doc type can be created
if desired.
Partner Function For output, the partner function VD is typically used. This can vary depending on
functions.
Tips and Tricks
the output up per vendor or per document type. It is also critical that good communication exists between
a company and its suppliers to assure that all are agreed on the change in document output.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
1.1. Output Determination for RFQ’s: Access transaction by:
Via Menus a) Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing →Master Data
→Messages → RFQ → Change
1.2. On screen “Change Output-Condition Records: Purchasing RFQ”, progress in the
following manner:
This is based on
configuration. NEU
is standard

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
1.3.On the “Change Condition Records: Fast Entry” Screen, enter information in the fields as
Type was chosen.
User must enter
AN for RFQ’s

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Purch.
Organization
Vendor was chosen.
likely, VD will be the partner
document
Tim Timing: When the document will be output R 1: Send with the next selection
run eg. RSNAST00 Online
2: Send with time specification
eg. RSNAT00 as background job
update)
to display text.
Press “ENTER”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
Number of
Messages
be outputted.
Spool Request
Name

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
used, etc.
user name.
sheet.
O Enter if applicable and if
department is desired on cover
page.
Text for Cover
Page
O Enter if applicable and if text is
desired for cover page
from the spool
Delete after
Output
required.
O Make entry if job is to be deleted
after printing
O Enter as applicable
Enter as applicable
SmartForm Actual form name Enter as applicable
Press “SAVE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
If you are setting up RFQ’s to be faxed, please view the following table.
number.
Leave this field
blank.
Send Time Either immediately or at night R
output.
Release after
output
O
Press “SAVE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MN03_Display Message_RFQ
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Trigger:
There is a need to display output conditions for a purchasing document.
type “NEU” for new and “AN” for RFQs, however a new doc type can be created
if desired.
Partner Function For output, the partner function VN is typically used. This can vary depending on
functions.
Tips and Tricks
the output up per vendor or per document type. It is also critical that good communication exists between
a company and its suppliers to assure that all are agreed on the change in document output.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
1.1. Display Output Determination for RFQ’s: Access transaction by:
→Messages → RFQ → Display
1.2. On screen “Display Output-Condition Records: Purchasing RFQ”, progress in the
following manner:
This is based on
configuration. NEU
is standard

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
Press “ENTER”
1.3. On the “Display Condition Records: Fast Entry” Screen, enter information in the fields as
Type was chosen.
User must enter
AN for RFQ’s
Purch.
Organization
Vendor was chosen.
document

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
update)
to display text.
Press “ENTER”
If displaying printed output, see the following table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
Number of
Messages
be outputted.
Spool Request
Name
used, etc.
user name.
sheet.
O Enter if department name on
cover page is desired
Text for Cover
Page
O Enter if text on cover page is
desired
O Enter is authorized
from the spool
Delete after Switch for deleting a print job. If the switch is O Enter is job is to be deleted

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
Output set, the spool job is deleted immediately after
required.
immediately after printing
Enter as applicable
Press “SAVE”
If you are displaying RFQ’s to be faxed, please view the following table.
ddress No. In output control the fax number that can be
number.
Leave this field
blank.
Send Time Either immediately or at night R Make entry as to time desired
output.
Release after
output
O Make entry if job is to deleted
immediately after printing.
Press “SAVE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
BPP_MN04_Create Message_PO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Trigger:
If a new vendor, document type or purchasing organization is created, it may be necessary to run
this transaction to assure proper output of the purchasing document.
type “NEU” for POs, however a new doc type can be created if desired.
functions.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
1.1. Output Determination for Purchase Orders: Access transaction by:
→Messages → Purchase Order → Create
1.2. On screen “Create Output-Condition Records: Purchase Order”, progress in the following
manner:
Output Type Purchasing document for output R Enter NEU for new, in this case PO.
This is based on
configuration. NEU
is standard
Select the “Key Combination” button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
Press “ENTER”
1.3.On the “Create Condition Records – New PO Printout: Fast Entry” Screen, enter information in
Type was chosen.
User must enter
NB for standard
PO
Purch.
Organization
Vendor was chosen.
document

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
update)
to display text.
Press “EXECUTE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
Number of
Messages
be outputted.
Spool Request
Name
used, etc.
user name.
O Enter is name is required
sheet.
O Enter if name is required
Text for Cover
Page
O Enter if text is required
from the spool
Delete after
Output
O Enter if job is to be deleted after
printing

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
required.
Enter if applicable
SmartForm Actual form name Enter if applicable
Press “SAVE”
If you are setting up Purchase Orders to be faxed, please view the following table.
number.
Leave this field
blank.
Send Time Either immediately or at night R Enter appropriate send time
output.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
Release after
output
faxing
Press “SAVE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
BPP_MN05_Change Message_PO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 7
Trigger:
A change in the output determination of purchase orders is required.
functions.
Tips and Tricks
the output up per vendor or per document type. It is critical that proper communication has taken place
between a company and its suppliers to assure that all are agreed on the change to the output of the
purchase orders.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 7
Procedural Steps
1.1. Change Output Determination for Purchase Orders: Access transaction by:
→Messages → Purchase Order → Change
1.2. On screen “Change Output-Condition Records: Purchase Order”, progress in the
following manner:
This is based on
configuration. NEU
is standard
Press “ENTER”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 7
1.3. On the “Change New PO Printout (NEU) Selection” Screen, enter information in the fields
Type was chosen.
User must enter
NB for standard
PO
Purch.
Organization
Vendor was chosen.
likely, VD will be the partner
document
update)
to display text.
Press “EXECUTE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 7
Number of
Messages
be outputted.
Spool Request
Name
Suffix 1 Second part of the three-part name of a spool O Enter as applicable

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 7
used, etc.
user name.
O Enter if name is desired
sheet.
O Enter is department name is
desired on cover page
Text for Cover
Page
O Enter is text for cover page is
desired
from the spool
Delete after
Output
required.
output
Enter as applicable

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 7
Press “SAVE”
If you are setting up Purchase Orders to be faxed, please view the following table.
number.
Leave this field
blank.
output.
Release after
output
output

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 7
Press “SAVE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MN06_Display Message PO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Trigger:
User wishes to display the output determination for purchase orders
functions.
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
1.1. Display Output Determination for Purchase Orders: Access transaction by:
→Messages → Purchase Order → Display
1.2. On screen “Display Output-Condition Records: Purchase Order”, progress in the following
manner:
This is based on
configuration. NEU
is standard
Press “ENTER”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
1.3. On the “Display New PO Printout (NEU) Selection” Screen, enter information in the fields
Type was chosen.
User must enter
NB for standard
PO
Purch.
Organization
Vendor was chosen.
document
update)
to display text.
Press “EXECUTE”

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Number of
Messages
be outputted.
Spool Request
Name
Suffix 1 Second part of the three-part name of a spool O Enter as applicable

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
used, etc.
user name.
O Enter if name is desired
sheet.
O Enter if department name is
desired
Text for Cover
Page
O Enter if text is desired
from the spool
Delete after
Output
required.
O Enter is job is to be deleted after
output
Enter as applicable

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6
If you are displaying Purchase Orders to be faxed, please view the following table.
number.
Leave this field
blank.
output.
Release after
output
output

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MR11_Clear GR IR differances
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 6
Overview
Trigger:
User wishes to review and clear GR/IR difference.
GR/IR differences needs to be reviewed and cleared periodically.
Tips & Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 6
Procedural Steps
Via Menus Logistics  Material Management Logistics Invoice Verification  GR/IR
Account Maintenance  Maintain GR/IR Clearing Account
Via Transaction Code MR11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 6
1.2. On screen, “Maintain GR/IR Clearing Account”, enter information in the fields as
specified in e below table:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 6
Document Header Data
Company
Code
Company Code R
Posting Date Posting Date R Defaulted to current date
Reference Reference O
Doc. Header
Txt
Doc. Header Txt O
Choose
Vendor Vendor O
Freight vendor Freight vendor O
Purch.
Organization
Purch. Organization O
Purchasing
Group
Purchasing Group O
Plant Plant O
Purchasing
Document
Purchasing Document O
Item Item O
Purchase
Order Date
Purchase Order Date O
Purch. Doc.
Category
Purch. Doc. Category O
Order Type Order Type O
Surplus Types
Delivery
surplus
Delivery surplus O Defaulted check box set
Invoice
surplus
Invoice surplus O
Clear
GR/IR
Clearing
Account
GR/IR Clearing Account O Default check
Delivery Cost
Accounts
Delivery Cost Accounts O Default check
ERS Purchase
Orders
ERS Purchase Orders O
ERS –
Delivery Costs
ERS – Delivery Costs O
Last
movement
before key
date
Last movement before key date O Default current date
Qty Var. Less
Than/Equal To
Qty Var. Less Than/Equal To O Default 100.0 percentage
Value
Variance Less
Than/= To
Value Variance Less Than/= To O
Processing

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 6
Automatic
clearance
Automatic clearance O
Prepare List Prepare List O Default check
Layout Layout O
1.4. On the “Maintain GR/IR Clearing Account”, screen, multiple actions can be
performed including post, display purchase order. These can all be accomplished
by selecting the check boxes for the desired purchasing document button/icon.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 6

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
MRBR_Purchasing Info System: Vendor
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 4
Overview
Trigger:
To release a blocked invoice
To release a blocked invoice
Purchasing Organization 1000
Purchasing Group Enter your group # - Press Execute
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access Purchasing Info System Report by:
Via Menus Logistics -> Materials Management -> Logistics Verification -> Further Processing
-> Release Blocked Invoices
Via Transaction Code MRBR
1.2. Enter selection criteria:
Selection of Blocked Invoices
Company Code Company code for which the invoice is to
be released
R 1000
Invoice Document Invoice Document O
Fiscal Year Fiscal Year O
Vendor Vendor O
Posting Date Posting Date O
Due Date Due Date O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 4
Purchasing Group Purchasing Group O Enter your group #
User User O
Processing
Release Manually Choose this radio button to release the
invoices manually
O Defaulted
Release
Automatically
Choose this radio button to release the
invoices automatically
O
Move Cash
Discount Date
Choose this check box to move cash
discount dates to the released date
(system changes the dates for terms of
payement)
O
Blocking Procedure
Blocked due to
variances
Choose this radio button to show the
blocked invoices due to variances
O Defaulted
Manual Payment
Block
manually blocked invoices.
O
Stochastically
Blocked
stochastically blocked invoices.
O
Display Options
Variant O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 4
1.3. Press execute icon, the system shows the blocked invoices as shown given below
screen.
1.4 After issue with PO is resolved, the user must delete the blocking reason. Scroll to
the right to the blocking reason to be deleted. Click on it once and press the delete
blocking reason pushbutton. Then click on the line item and
press the green flag (release) icon or F9. Press save button. Invoice is
released for payment
NOTE: Check for payment cannot be cut and mailed until the blocking is released
1.5 To generate hardcopy:
 Click Printer button
 Select printer (use dropdown – leave inputs in window blank, press enter to get
a list of all printers. Double click on the desired printer)

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 4
 Click green check mark
• User can also select to download to a spreadsheet – List - Export – Save to PC
file. The system will ask for information as to what kind of file the report is to
be saved to. The user should respond according to his/her needs.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
SARA_ Archive Administration
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 11
Overview
Trigger:
Need to customize the archiving program.
Archiving consists of three basic stages: archiving, deleting and removing secondary indices. Separate programs for each stage
can be started individually or, by setting parameters within this transaction, executed automatically.
In the central customizing of archiving, you define the following parameters for each archive object:
1. The logical path and file names of the archive
2. Archive file size
3. Settings for the delete program
4. Settings for post-processing program
5. File storage to storage system
6. Sequence
You define the following parameters for cross-archiving object customizing:
1. Data archiving monitor
2. Check access for archive selection
3. Verification of archive files
4. Time of verification
You define the following parameters for Basis customizing:
1. Cross-client file names/paths
2. Client-specific file names
You define the following parameters for Application-specific customizing:
These options vary with the object type to be archived. Examples are ‘Account and Document type life’ for object
FI_DOCUMNT and ‘Mark master record for deletion’ for the FI_ACCOUNT object
The cross-archiving object and Basis customizing features are primarily technical in nature and pertain to Basis administration.
The application-specific features are dependent on the object name selected so they will not be covered in this BPP.
Therefore, only the object-specific feature will be covered in this BPP since it is related to application users and is stable in nature.
Logical file name Platform-independent logical file name, under which the archive file is to be
created.
Maximum size in MB Controls the maximum size of the archive file
Maximum number of data objects Controls the maximum number of data objects that the archive file can contain
Delete program settings Various settings – see below
File storage sequence The sequence of subsequent file processing is selected here.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 11
Tips and Tricks

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 11
Procedural Steps
1.1. Access the transaction by:
Via Menus
Node Transaction code Text
Nodes SARA Archive management
Preceding node Archiving
Preceding node Pricing document
Preceding node Pricing
Preceding node Environment
Preceding node Bonus Buy
Preceding node Conditions: Sales
Preceding node Condition/Arrangement
Preceding node Vendor Rebate Arrangements
Preceding node Subsequent Settlement
Preceding node Master Data
Preceding node Purchasing
Preceding node Materials Management
Preceding node Logistics
Preceding node Customer Rebate Arrangements

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 11
Nodes SARA Archive
Preceding node Plant
Preceding node Assortments
Preceding node Products
Preceding node Sales and Distribution
Nodes SARA Archive Management
Preceding node Preference Handling
Preceding node Preference
Preceding node Foreign Trade/Customs
Preceding node KANBAN
Preceding node Production

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 11
Nodes SARA Archive
Preceding node Service Processing
Preceding node Customer Service
Nodes SARA Archive

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 11
Preceding node Service Agreements
Preceding node Customer Service
Preceding node Vendor Reb. Arrangements
Preceding node Vendor Reb. Arrangements
Preceding node Customer Reb. Arrangements

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 11
Preceding node Customer Reb. Arrangements
Nodes SARA Create
Preceding node Archive
Nodes SARA Data Retention Tool
Preceding node System Messages
Preceding node Administration
Preceding node ABAP Workbench
Via Transaction Code SARA
1.2. On the screen “Archive Management: Initial” first enter the object name you want the customized
settings to apply to then select the “Customizing” push-button.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 11
1.3. In the “Data Archiving Customizing” pop-up box, select “Archive Object-Specific Customizing:
Technical Settings”.
1.4 On the screen “Change View ‘Customizing View for Archiving’: Details”, enter the information as

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 11

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 11
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action
and Values
Comments
Logical file name Platform-independent logical file name, under
which the archive file is to be created.
R This should default as
ARCHIVE_DATA_FILE
Maximum size in MB Controls the maximum size of the archive file R
Maximum number of
data objects
Controls the maximum number of data objects
that the archive file can contain
R
Delete Program –
Test Session Variant
Name of the program variant used for
executing the test run.
C
Delete Program –
Production session
variant
Name of the program variant used to start the
productive run.
C
Delete Program –
Delete jobs
If the Start Automatic indicator is selected, the
system will automatically run a program to
delete the documents after they are archived.
O Documents should be deleted
after they are archived.
Delete Program –
Build Index
If this field is flagged, an index will be created
for the archive object - it will then be possible
to access selected data objects in the archive
file using this index.
O An index allows the user to
view the transaction summary
information on the Display Line
Item screen, but not allow the
user to drilldown (because the
details have been archived off
the system).
Post-processing
Program – Variant
Name of the program variant used to start the
productive run
C
Post-processing
Program – Start
Automatic
If this field is flagged, the system will
automatically run a program to delete the
secondary indices.
O The index should be deleted if
all reference to the transaction
is being removed from the
active system.
File Storage to
Storage System –
Content Repository
Name of the storage repository for physical
objects
O You can find more
information about content
repositories in the R/3
Library under Basis - Basis
Services - SAP Knowledge
Provider - Content
Management Service
File Storage to
Storage System –
Start Automatic
(connection to archive
system)
Indicates that the archive files are to be
forwarded to the optical archive after
processing (this requires the connection of an
archive system via Archive Link)
O
Sequence The sequence of subsequent file processing is
selected here. If a content repository for the
storage of archive files is recorded in the
storage system, the sequence between the
delete phase and the file storage is
determined at this point. The steps marked
‘Start Automatic’ are started in the selected
sequence.
R Enter either
‘Delete
before
storage’ or
‘Store
before
delete’

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 11
Note: In column “R/O/C” of above table, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional
1.5. To save the customizing settings of the archive program, select Table View → Save or select the 
Save icon.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
VL10B_Delivery Due List For Purchase Orders
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 5
Overview
Trigger:
The purpose of this activity is to create Delivery for Stock Transport Order.
During Stock transport Order with Delivery, the stock transport Purchase Order is created in the receiving Plant. Then
replenishment delivery is created at issuing plant.
Shipping Point/Receiving Pt
Deliv. Creation Date
Replenishment Delivery is created.
Tips and Tricks
The replenishment delivery can be done either for a specific STO or for all orders due in a specified time
range.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 5
Procedure Steps
Via Menus Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound
Delivery → Create → Collective Processing of Documents Due for Delivery →
Purchase Orders
Via Transaction Code VL10B
1.2. On the Purchase Orders, Fast Display screen, enter the following data:
Shipping
Point/Receivin
g Pt
The physical location (for example, a
warehouse or collection of loading
ramps) from which you ship the item
O
Deliv. Creation Delivery Creation Date O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 5
Date
1.3 Choose Tab Purchase Orders, enter STO number in the field Purchasing Document, and
choose Execute
1.4 On the Activities Due for Shipping “Purchase Orders, Fast Display” screen, choose the line
and choose Background.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 5
1.5 On the Activities Due for Shipping “Purchase Orders, Fast Display” screen, a new line with
Sales Document 8XXXXXXX will be added. Choose Log for Delivery Creation.
1.6 On the Delivery Creation Log screen, choose Documents.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 EhP 4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 5
1.7 Here you will find the delivery number 8XXXXXXX. Note the delivery number.
1.8 Leave the screen with Back.
Result: Replenishment Delivery has been created for Stock Transport Purchase Order.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
XK01_Create Vendor Centrally
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 1 of 21
Overview
Trigger:
A new vendor needs to be created.
All vendor data is stored in the vendor master record and controls how transaction data is posted to a vendor.
Vendor master data is used not only by the accounting department but also by the materials management department. When
setting up the master records, there is the option to create the accounting and materials management sections separately, each in
its own application area, or together by creating the vendor master “centrally”.
A vendor master record includes data such as:
· vendor name, address, language, and phone numbers
· tax numbers
· bank data
· account control data, such as the G/L reconciliation account for the vendor account
· payment methods and terms of payment as agreed with the vendor
· purchasing data
Input – Required Fields Comments
Vendor Name of vendor
Company Code Company code in which the vendor is being set up
Purchasing Organization Purchasing organization that the vendor is associated with
Account Group
Reference Vendor An existing vendor that the new vendor can be copied from
All vendor information for New Vendor
Tips and Tricks
This process describes creating the vendor master centrally (accounting views and the purchasing views
of the vendor master record). To create just the purchasing views, see the BPP for transaction MK01.
By creating/storing vendor master records centrally, permits common access and allow the entering of
data only once and to avoid contradictory/redundant data. If a vendor's address has changed, for
example, the user needs to enter the change only once, and both the accounting department and the
purchasing department will have access to the most current data.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 2 of 21
Procedural Steps
> Central > Create
Via Transaction Code XK01
1.2. On screen “Create Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Vendor If using external number assignment, enter the
vendor's account number. If using internal
number assignment, the system assigns a
number when saving the master data.
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 3 of 21
Company
code
the company code ID R
Account group A classifying feature within the vendor master
record which determines if the vendor account
number will be assigned internally or externally
and which fields are proposed for input
R Enter account classifying number
or use system assigned number
Reference
Vendor The vendor’s account number that is being
used as a reference as an alternative way in
which to create a vendor account
O Note: Vendor specific data of the
referenced vendor such as
address is not carried over. The
data from the referenced vendor
is used for default values and it is
suggested that all screens be
reviewed before saving any data
Company
Code
The company code assigned with the reference
vendor
O
Purchasing
Organization
The purchasing associated with the referenced
vendor
C

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 4 of 21
1.4. On screen “Create Vendor: Address Screen”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 5 of 21

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 6 of 21
Vendor Internal
Name Vendor or company name R Enter selected vendor name
Search term Short name which is used to set up a
matchcode
R Enter search term such as abbreviated
address or initials
Street street address R
City city R
Postal code or
PO box
PCode
zip code R
Country two digit country identifier R
Region (state) two letter state abbreviation R
Language one letter language code R
Telephone Telephone number O Other communication types can also
be maintained
Fax Fax number O
Standard
comm line
Other line for communication O
Comments Use this block for optional comments
or notes
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 7 of 21
1.6. On screen “Create Vendor: Control”, enter information in the optional fields as applicable
in the table below:

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 8 of 21

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 9 of 21
Customer If the vendor is also a customer, use this field to link
the two records together for line item display and
O
Trading
Partner
When posting to this account, the company ID is
transferred to the line item so that the elimination
functions can be carried out within consolidation.
O
Authorization The authorization group allows extended
authorization protection for particular objects.
O
Group Key If the vendor belongs to a group, can assign a group
key here. If creating a matchcode using this group
key, group evaluations are possible.
O
Tax Information
Tax code 1&2 Tax Numbers of the customer/vendor that is used for
reporting to the tax authorities.
O
Equalization
tax
Indicator is used for equalization tax in Spain O Select as required for
reporting
Naturalization
person
Indicator used to distinguish between natural and
legal persons for tax purposes
O Select as required for
reporting
Sales
purchase tax
Determines sales tax liability O Select as required for
reporting
Fiscal Address Establishes master data record for official address
Standard Access Carrier Code is a indicator used in
North America to identify forwarding agents.
O Unique code for identifying a
forwarding agent
Tax
jurisdiction
code
Tax code used for establishing the tax rates in the
United States defining tax authorities for payment.
O Research and enter
applicable tax jurisdiction
code. * Note It is always the
city to which the goods are
supplied
Representativ
e name
Name of business partners representative O Enter as required
Vat
Registration
number
Vat (Value added tax) registration number of the
customer, vendor , or company code
O Enter as required by EU
Type of
business
The field of business in which a business partner
operates usually defined by the company
O Enter as required
Type of
Industry
The industry category in which a business partner
operates
O Enter description

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 10 of 21
Representativ
e name
Name of business partners representative O Enter as required
Reference data
Location 1 Reference line using first 7 digits of the international
location number. An international location number is
used when establishing a company in Germany
O Enter as required
Location 2 Reference line where entering digits 8-12 of the 13
digit international location number
O Enter as required
Credit info
number
Enter external reference number for credit agency O Enter as required
Industry key Assigned industry key used to identify industry data O Enter as required
Train Station Name of the train station a specified customer uses
for delivery
O Enter address as required
Actual QM
System
Identify of the QM system if used by the vendor can
be identified here
O Enter information as required
QM system to Date the QM system if used is certified to O Enter certification to date
External
Manufacturer
code
Manufacturer name or number that specifies the
manufacturer outside of the R3 system name
O Enter or use as required

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 11 of 21
1.8. On screen “Create Vendor: Payment Transactions”, enter the vendor’s banking
information if applicable (e.g. for wire transfers):
Country Bank country key R
Bank Key Key under which bank data in the respective country
is stored
R
Account
Holder
Another name that the payment program can use if
the name of the account holder is not the same as the
name of the vendor
O
Bank Account The number at the bank under which the account is
managed
R
CK Indicator as to whether account is a checking or
savings account
R

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 12 of 21
BnkT Key for which business partner’s bank the system
should use
O Business Partner’s defined by
role within organization
e.g. proprietor bank of a the
owner of a vendor
Reference
Details
Additional specifications for the bank details of the
vendor
O
CO Bank Collection authorization indicator. O
Alternative
Payee
The vendor’s account number O This field is used only if the
payment is to be made
directly to the vendor and not
to the vendor’s bank
DME Indicator Note: Not Applicable in U.S. O
Instruction Key Note: Not Applicable in U.S. O
PBC/POR
Number
Note: Not Applicable in U.S. O
Alternative
Payee in
Document/Indi
vidual Spec.
indicator
If this indicator is set the user can enter bank payment
instructions applicable to the document which differs
from the vendor’s master record
O
Permitted
Payee Label
O Note: When clicking on this
label leads to matchcode
For selecting vendor’s
account

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 13 of 21
1.10. On screen “Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting”, enter information in the

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 14 of 21
Reconciliation
account
account which is updated parallel to the sub-ledger
account for normal postings
R
Sort key This field determines how the allocation field is
populated during document entry. When displaying
line items, the line items are sorted initially by the
allocation field.
O
Reference
Data/
Prev.acct. no.
If renumbering vendor’s master record number the
previous number can be stored here
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 15 of 21
1.12. On screen “Create Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting”, enter information in the
optional fields as applicable:
Payment
Terms
Key for defining payment terms composed of cash
discount percentages and payment periods
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 16 of 21
Payment
Methods
different methods by which the vendor can be paid
using the automatic payment program
O
Automatic
Payment
Transactions/
Pyt. Advice
by EDI
This indicator is used to identify that the vendor
should be sent all payment advice by EDI
Tolerance
group
Settings for vendor-specific parameters in Logistics
Invoice Verification.
O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 17 of 21
1.14. On screen “Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting:, enter information in the fields as
specified in the table below.
Dunn.
Procedure
Dunning procedure O

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 18 of 21
Dunn.
Recipient
Dunning recipient O
Last Dunned Date of last dunning notice O
Dunning
Clerk
Dunning clerk identifier that appears on printouts O
Dunning
block
Dunning block indicator O
Leg.
Dunn.proc.
Date of the legal dunning notice was initiated O
Dunning level Dunning level O
Grouping key Grouping key O
Local
process.
Local processing for branches O
Acctg clerk Accounting clerk identification code O
Acct at
vendor
Account number at vendor O
User vendor Vendor accounting clerk name/identifier O
Clerk’s fax Vendor accounting clerks fax number O
Clrk’s
internet
Vendor accounting clerks internet address O
Account
memo
Internal memo of accounting O
1.16. On screen Create Vendor: Purchasing Data, Enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Order
Currency
with this vendor
Terms of
Payment
box (FOB - city)
Minimum
Order Value
Minimum Order Value O Enter minimum dollar value permitted
per purchase order
Schema
group, vendor
Pricing date Pricing date control O Enter Price determination key for

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 19 of 21
control Purchase orders
Order optim.
Rest
GR-based inv.
Verif
Verification flag
AutoevalGRSe
tmt Del.
(ERS)
Acknowledgm
ent reqd.
Subseq.
Settlement
Subseq. Settl.
index
B.vol.comp./ag
.nec
Business Volume
comparisons/agreement necessary
Doc. Index
active
Qualifying for
DKd
Returns
vendor
Pricing Pricing node in customer hierarchy O Click on if applicable
Modeoftrnsprt-
Border
Mode of transports for border
crossing
Grant discount
in kind
Indicator whether discount in kind
granted
Relevant for
price
determination
If the master record represents a
node in a in customer hierarchy, the
pricing indicator determines whether
the node is relevant for pricing.

Solution:
Title:
Functional Area:
SAP Release:
EzAIO
ECC 6.0 Ehp4
< Doc. # > < Date > < Name > < #.#> 20 of 21
Relevant for
agency
business
Indicator that this business partner
can participate in agency business.
Purchasing
group
Purchasing group O Enter if applicable
Planed Deliv.
Time
Planned delivery time O Enter if applicable
Confirmation
Control
Conformation control O Enter if applicable
Unit of
measure grp
Unit of measure Group O Enter if applicable
Rounding
profile
Rounding profile O Enter if applicable
Vendor price
marking
Rack-jobbing
service
Order entry:
vendor
the vendor
O Not currently used by SAP Future
enhancement
Serv. Level Vendor service level O Enter

sap-mm-complete-end-user-manual-to-118-transactional-process (1).pdf

sap-mm-complete-end-user-manual-to-118-transactional-process (1).pdf

More Related Content

Similar to sap-mm-complete-end-user-manual-to-118-transactional-process (1).pdf (20)

More from Tapera Mangezi,PMP® (7)

Recently uploaded (20)

sap-mm-complete-end-user-manual-to-118-transactional-process (1).pdf